JP2021073024A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's motivation to play a game by increasing a degree of attention to the game and interest in the game.SOLUTION: A game machine 10 allows a determination performance for clearly expressing that a lottery result permits a shift to a jackpot game state in detection of presence of a movable accessory member 39 in a predetermined area in a front side of an image display part 341 by a plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d by execution of a chance-up performance in execution of the chance-up performance for increasing a degree of expectation that a lottery result of a jackpot lottery permits a shift to a jackpot game state by movement of the movable accessory member 39 from a standby position to an operation position during a touch operation reception period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 40

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, as one of the gaming effects accompanying the progress of the game, there is an effect of operating a movable accessory member called a gimmick (for example, Patent Document 1). reference). Further, as the game effect, the touch operation effect is executed by touching the front side of the liquid crystal display device in the game machine within the operation acceptance period (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

JP-A-2017-136430 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-055786

By the way, as a game machine, it is important to raise the degree of attention and interest in the game to improve the player's motivation to play.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of increasing the degree of attention and interest in a game and improving the player's motivation to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
The main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game,
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition, and
A game state transition means (41) that shifts the game state between the notification game state in which the notification game for notifying the determination result of the determination means (41) is executed and the special game state.
An image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variablely displayed, and an image display means (341).
When an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341), the detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting the object and the detection means (38a to 38d).
When it is moved between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) and moved between the first position and the second position, it is detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d). Movable accessory member (39) to be
An effect executing means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute the game effect in the progress of the game.
With
The effect executing means (51) is
A first effect executing means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) during a predetermined period (touch operation reception period) is provided. ,
By moving the movable accessory member (39) from the first position to the second position in the predetermined period, the determination result by the determination means (41) shifts to the special gaming state. When the expectation improvement effect (chance increase effect) for improving the expectation degree is executed, the detection means (38a to 38d) causes the movable accessory in the predetermined area by executing the expectation degree improvement effect. When the presence of the member (39) is detected, it is possible to execute a definite effect that clearly indicates that the determination result by the determination means (41) is to shift to the special gaming state. And.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the attention to the jackpot game and the interest of the jackpot game to improve the player's willingness to play the jackpot game.

The perspective view which shows an example of the structure of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. The development view which shows an example of the structure of the game machine shown in FIG. The development view which shows an example of the structure of the game machine shown in FIG. The front view which shows an example of the game board when the movable accessory member of the game machine shown in FIG. 1 is in a standby position. The front view which shows an example of the game board when the movable accessory member is in an operating position. The front view which shows typically the detection range of each detection sensor of the game machine shown in FIG. The block diagram which shows an example of the system configuration of the game machine shown in FIG. The block diagram which shows an example of the storage area of the main control device of the game machine shown in FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the main control unit. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt processing executed by the main control unit. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the main timer interrupt process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the 1st hold command setting process executed in the start winning process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main processing executed by the main control unit. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a variable game control process executed in the main process of FIG. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of data setting processing executed in the variable game control processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the variation start processing executed in the variation game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine shown in FIG. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of an operation button operation detection process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of operation detection pattern determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of touch operation detection processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of touch operation detection pattern determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. FIG. 22A is a diagram showing an example of an operation data table showing the relationship between the operation detection pattern and the operation status, and FIG. 22B is a touch operation data table showing the relationship between the touch operation detection pattern and the touch operation status. The figure which shows an example. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. FIG. 24 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a table referred to when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 23, and FIG. 24 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first stop symbol selection table, FIG. 24 (B). Is a diagram showing an example of a variable type table. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect pattern type table which is referred to when the variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the movable accessory member operation effect. A timing chart showing an example of the operation timing of the movable accessory member and the touch operation acceptance period together with the effect pattern. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a movable accessory member operation timing selection table referred to in the movable accessory member operation timing determination process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 23. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a movable accessory member operation timing selection table referred to in the movable accessory member operation timing determination process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 23. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a movable accessory member operation timing selection table referred to in the movable accessory member operation timing determination process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 23. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a touch operation effect determination process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 23. The figure which shows an example of a touch operation effect. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of a touch operation effect selection table referred to in the touch operation effect determination process of FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of a touch operation effect selection table referred to in the touch operation effect determination process of FIG. 31. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a variable game effect processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a movable accessory member operation process executed in the variable game effect process of FIG. 35. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed in the variable game effect process of FIG. 35. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of touch operation effect execution processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of touch operation effect execution processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. 40 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect determination table referred to in the specific effect determination process of the touch operation effect execution process of FIG. 39, and FIG. 40 (B) is the specific effect determination table of FIG. 40 (A). The figure which shows the jackpot expectation degree of a specific production to be set. The front view which shows an example of the game board when the movable accessory member of the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention is in a standby position. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of a system configuration of the game machine shown in FIG. 41. The front view which shows typically the detection range of the detection sensor with respect to the symbol display part of the game machine shown in FIG. 41. The front view which shows typically the detection range of the detection sensor with respect to the display part of the sub-movable accessory member of the game machine shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of touch operation detection processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 46 (A) shows an example of a main touch operation data table showing the relationship between the main touch operation detection pattern and the main touch operation status, and FIG. 46 (B) shows the relationship between the sub touch operation detection pattern and the sub touch operation status. The figure which shows an example of the sub-touch operation data table which shows. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of touch operation effect execution processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows an example of the touch operation effect executed in the display part of a sub-movable accessory member. The figure which shows an example of the touch operation effect executed in the display part of a sub-movable accessory member. The figure which shows an example of the touch operation effect executed in the display part of a sub-movable accessory member. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect executed in the display part of the sub-movable accessory member of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of touch operation effect execution processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of touch operation effect execution processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows an example of the variable game effect executed by the game machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of touch operation effect execution processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of touch operation effect execution processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect executed in the display part of the main movable accessory member of the game machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect executed in the display part of the main movable accessory member of the game machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of touch operation effect execution processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of touch operation effect execution processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect executed in the display part of the sub-movable accessory member of the game machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of touch operation effect execution processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of touch operation effect execution processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the movable accessory member operation timing selection table referred to in the movable accessory member operation timing determination process executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on 9th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the fake operation effect of the movable accessory member executed by the game machine which concerns on 9th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on 9th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a movable accessory member operation process executed by a voice lamp control device of a game machine according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a movable accessory member operation process executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the twelfth embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous effect of the movable accessory member operation effect and touch operation effect executed by the game machine which concerns on 13th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a movable accessory member operation process executed by a voice lamp control device of a game machine according to a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of touch operation effect execution processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on 14th Embodiment of this invention. The front view which shows typically the detection range of the detection sensor with respect to the symbol display part of the game machine which concerns on 16th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of touch operation effect execution processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine according to the 16th embodiment of the present invention.

Hereinafter, the first to fifteenth embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings, and the present invention will be understood. Further, each of the following embodiments is an example embodying the present invention, and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 37.

[Outline configuration of gaming machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the game machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are development views of the game machine 10, and FIGS. 4 and 5 are front views of the game board 31 of the game machine 10. Hereinafter, the front-back, left-right, and up-down expressions used in the present embodiment are defined by the front-back direction D1, the up-down direction D2, and the left-right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine including a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is provided on an island facility (not shown) in a gaming hall. By fixing the outer frame 14, it is installed in the game hall. In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine, but other gaming machines such as a rotating body type gaming machine (slot machine), an arrange ball gaming machine, and a Jiyan ball gaming machine will be described. The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines.

[Structure of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the outer frame 14. Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the inner frame 12.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination unit 27, and the like.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 7) that switches an input signal to the voice lamp control device 5 described later according to the presence or absence of a pressing operation. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with or without operation) of the operation button 20. The operation button 20 is an operation on the operation button 20 by the player in a predetermined specific period in the variable game effect (notified game effect) executed in the variable game that clearly indicates the lottery result in the jackpot lottery to the player. It is operated to execute an operation button effect or the like that is executed as an opportunity.

The installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper plate 23, and may be any position of the front frame 11 as long as it can be operated by the player. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Further, the operation switch 20a is not limited to the contact type switch, and may be, for example, a piezoelectric element or the like, as long as it can be used to detect the presence or absence of operation by the player.

Further, instead of the operation button 20, it is conceivable to provide a touch panel that displays a touch key and accepts an operation by the player of the touch key. Further, the operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or the panel 25 in the variable game effect is reflected in the operation button effect and the like.

The firing handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to launch the game ball. In the game machine 10, a basic game is performed by firing a game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 32, which will be described later, with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22 by the player. In the game machine 10, when the launch handle 22 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec.

The upper plate 23 is arranged below the panel 25, stores the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 of the payout mechanism 130 described later, and arranges the stored game balls in a row. It is used to guide the game ball launch mechanism 32. Further, the lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23, and is used for storing the game balls surplus in the upper plate 23.

The panel 25 is colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the game machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end portion of the front frame 11, and are a variable game effect processing (see step S1707 and FIG. 35 in FIG. 17) and a jackpot game effect process (see step S1708 in FIG. 17). Execute the audio output effect that outputs the audio in the above. The installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. Further, the illumination unit 27 has a built-in light source such as an indicator lamp and an LED, and executes a lamp effect depending on a lighting mode such as lighting or blinking.

[Structure of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launch mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. In FIG. 2, the description on the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for the sake of simplification of the illustration.

The control unit 33 has a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the game machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing the control content is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to one direction of the sub control unit 332. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the game board 31 has an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first operating port 314, a second operating port 315, a variable winning port 316, and a through gate 317. An out port 318, a variable display unit 34, a magnet sensor 35, a radio wave sensor 36, a main display unit 37, a plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, and a movable accessory member 39 are provided.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending the game balls launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the game area on the board surface of the game board 31. Then, after being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, the game balls that did not enter the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the out opening 318. Will be done.

Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a launching rail 321 and a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323. The launch rail 321 is formed from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 is formed on the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is a guide. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 one by one onto the launch rail 321. The solenoid 323 is a driving means for launching the game ball supplied on the launch rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. Then, in the game machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in response to the operation of the launch handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 to the game board 31. The game ball launching mechanism 32 may be a mechanism for launching the game ball by using another driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

Returning to the description of FIGS. 4 and 5, the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the out opening 318 have openings that penetrate the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. Is formed. Then, on the back side of the game board 31, the entry of the game ball can be individually detected corresponding to each of the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316. Ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, 316a (see FIG. 7) are provided. Further, the through gate 317 is a gate through which the game ball can pass, and has a ball entry sensor 317a (see FIG. 7) capable of individually detecting the game ball passing through the through gate 317. In the game board 31, when the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes on the right side of the game board 31, that is, when the game ball is hitting to the right, the game ball may pass through the through gate 317.

The ball entry sensors 313a to 317a (see FIG. 7) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a are input to the main control unit 331. Hereinafter, the detection of the entry of a game ball by the entry sensors 313a to 317a may be referred to as winning. The ball entry sensors 313a to 317a are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but may be any sensor capable of individually detecting the entry of a game ball by another detection method.

Further, the second operating port 315 is provided with an electric accessory 315b for switching whether or not there is a restriction on the entry of the game ball into the second operating port 315. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, the electric accessory 315b opens to allow the game ball to enter the second operating port 315, and the electric accessory 315b closes to allow the game ball to enter the second operating port 315. The sphere is restricted.

Further, the variable winning opening 316 is provided with an opening / closing door 316b for switching whether or not there is a restriction on the entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening 316. The opening / closing door 316b is opened / closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, the opening / closing door 316b allows the game ball to enter the variable winning opening 316, and the opening / closing door 316b closes to limit the entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening 316. Door.

In the game machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315 is detected by the entry sensor 314a or the entry sensor 315a, the main control unit 331 performs a big hit lottery. Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display unit 37 according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery. Further, the lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub control unit 332, and the sub control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 and the like according to the lottery result.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316 is detected by the entry sensors 313a to 316a, A preset number of prize balls will be paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general winning opening 313 is 10, the number of winning balls when entering the first operating opening 314 or the second operating opening 315 is 3, and the number of winning balls is entered into the variable winning opening 316. If so, the number of prize balls is 13. In particular, in the game machine 10, when the lottery result performed by the main control unit 331 is a big hit, the game shifts to the big hit game state (special game state), and the variable winning opening 316 is opened, which will be described later. ) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times and 16 times), so that a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315, a big hit lottery is executed. Then, when the lottery result is won, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and a 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state), and a 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state. The 5R jackpot game state is an opening / closing execution in which a round game (unit game) in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is performed five times until a predetermined time elapses or until a predetermined number or more of game balls are won in the variable winning opening 316. It is a gaming state including a mode. The 16R probability variation jackpot game state is a game state including an open / close execution mode in which a round game (unit game) is performed 16 times, and a larger amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out than in the 5R jackpot game state, compared to the 5R jackpot game state. It is an advantageous gaming state for the player.

The variable display unit 34 has a symbol display unit 341 such as a liquid crystal display that is visibly arranged through an opening 31A formed in a substantially central portion of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the symbol variation display and the variable game according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to the ball entering the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315. Various displays such as an effect display are performed. The symbol display unit 341 is an example of the image display means of the present invention, and constitutes the effect means of the present invention. Further, the symbol display unit 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display. Further, it is conceivable to provide one or a plurality of sub display units separately from the symbol display unit 341. The sub display unit is arranged, for example, at the upper or lower portion of the symbol display unit 341, or at the left or right portion. The sub-display unit may be movable between a position that covers the symbol display unit 341 and a position that does not cover the symbol display unit 341. Further, the sub display unit may be arranged on the upper plate 23. The sub-display unit may constitute the image display means of the present invention alone or together with the design display unit 341.

For example, the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 is performed by, for example, scrolling a plurality of types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" in order in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the diagonal direction, and the like. In addition, sub-designs such as other characters or symbols may be displayed between the main symbols. Further, in the present embodiment, there are no sub-symbols, and there are nine types of main symbols "1" to "9".

In the game machine 10, in the variable game, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the main symbols stops after the lapse of the preset variation display time from the start of the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341. .. More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all the main symbols fluctuate along the preset fluctuation directions (for example, the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, etc.), and the fluctuations of the plurality of main symbols are stopped in order. Then, when the fluctuation of the main symbol in all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time elapses, the symbol variation display ends.

When the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 is completed, the symbol display unit 341 displays a state in which the main symbols are lined up on one or a plurality of effective lines. At this time, the stopped state of the main symbol clearly or suggests the lottery result in the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot" or "5R normal jackpot", the state in which the main symbols of the same symbol are lined up in the effective line is displayed, and it is clearly indicated that the lottery is a jackpot. Will be done. In addition, the jackpot type may be specified by the combination of the main symbols on the effective line, but it is not always specified. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", a state in which, for example, "777" symbol combinations are lined up on the effective line, which is set as a symbol combination indicating 16R probability variation jackpot among the main symbols. Is displayed, or a state in which combinations of the same symbols other than "777" are lined up on the effective line is displayed. Further, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", a state in which symbol combinations such as "333", which are set in advance as symbol combinations indicating 5R probability variation jackpot among the main symbols, are lined up on the effective line is displayed. Or, a state in which the same combination of symbols other than the combination of symbols indicating 16R probability variation jackpot or 5R probability variation jackpot such as "777" and "333" is lined up on the effective line is displayed. In addition, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", other than the combination of the main symbols set in advance as the symbol combination indicating the normal jackpot, for example, the combination of the symbols indicating the probability variation jackpot such as "222" and "444". A state in which combinations of the same symbols are lined up on the effective line is displayed. When the lottery result is "out of place", a state in which different combinations of main symbols are lined up on the effective line (for example, "323" or "723") is displayed.

In addition, the symbol display unit 341 displays a variable display of the main symbol in the variable game and a variable game effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit. If the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot" and a state in which jackpot symbol combinations other than the combination of the main symbols indicating 16R probability variation jackpot is lined up on the effective line is displayed, the 5R probability variation jackpot is displayed as a variable game effect. Alternatively, a suggestion effect suggesting that the 5R is a normal jackpot is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 16R probability variation jackpot is executed. Similarly, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" and a state in which jackpot symbol combinations other than the combination of the main symbols indicating the probability variation jackpot are lined up on the effective line is displayed, the 5R normal jackpot is displayed as a variable game effect. A suggestion effect suggesting that is is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect or the like that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 5R probability variation jackpot is executed.

Further, when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state, the symbol display unit 341 displays a jackpot game effect including an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect.

The magnet sensor 35 is provided around the first operating port 314 and on the back side of the game board 31. The magnet sensor 35 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the magnet sensor 35 is input to the main control unit 331. As a result, when an act of illegally guiding the game ball to the first operating port 314 using a magnet is performed, the fraudulent act can be detected. The magnet sensor 35 may be provided around the variable winning opening 316. As a result, in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game, when an act of winning a game ball that greatly exceeds the upper limit number is performed in the variable winning opening 316, it is possible to detect the fraudulent act.

The radio wave sensor 36 is provided around the first operating port 314 and the second operating port 315, and is provided on the back side of the game board 31. The radio wave sensor 36 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor 36 is input to the main control unit 331. As a result, when an act of illegally inputting a radio wave into the ball entry sensors 314a and 315a to erroneously detect the entry of a game ball is performed, the fraudulent act can be detected. The radio wave sensor 36 can detect radio waves of, for example, 50 MHz to 3 GHz.

The main display unit 37 includes an LED pair 371, two 7-segment displays 372, 373, and an LED group 374 arranged in the upper right portion of the game board 31. In the LED pair 371, the result of a lottery as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b in the main control unit 331 is displayed by a combination of lighting and extinguishing (lighting pattern), triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 317. In the 7-segment display 372, the variation display of the symbol is performed triggered by the winning of the first operating port 314, and the symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 331 is stopped and displayed. In the 7-segment display 373, the fluctuation display of the symbol is performed with the winning of the second operating port 315 as a trigger, and the symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 331 is stopped and displayed. In the LED group 374, the holding number N and the holding number M of the fluctuation display generated by winning the first operating port 314 and the second operating port 315 are displayed by the lighting patterns of the plurality of LEDs.

Whether or not the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are touch-operated by the player in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, for example, in a specific area corresponding to the predetermined area on the panel 25. It detects whether or not. Further, the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are not limited to the player's touch operation on the predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, and the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are not limited to the player's touch operation, and the hand is held over the front side of the symbol display unit 341. It may be able to detect the movement of the player. As shown in FIGS. 4 to 7, the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d include an upper left detection sensor 38a, a lower left detection sensor 38b, an upper right detection sensor 38c, and a lower right detection sensor 38d. Each of the detection sensors 38a to 38d is, for example, an optical sensor. The optical sensor may be either a reflection type sensor or a transmission type sensor, but a diffuse reflection type sensor is preferably used. When reflective sensors are used as the detection sensors 38a to 38d, the presence of an object within the detection range is detected based on, for example, a change in the amount of reflected light received.

As shown in FIGS. 4 to 6 (A), the upper left detection sensor 38a is arranged at or near the upper left portion in the peripheral portion of the symbol display unit 341, and the lower left detection sensor 38b is the lower left portion in the peripheral portion of the symbol display unit 341. The upper right detection sensor 38c is arranged at or near the upper right portion in the peripheral portion of the symbol display unit 341, and the lower right detection sensor 38d is arranged at or near the lower right portion in the peripheral portion of the symbol display unit 341. Have been placed.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d have different ranges in which the presence of an object can be detected. When it is determined that an object exists on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 when an object is detected by at least one detection sensor 38a to 38d of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, cross-hatching is performed in FIG. 6 (B). It is possible to detect the presence of an object on the front side of substantially the entire area of the symbol display unit 341. On the other hand, when it is determined that the object exists on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 when the object is detected by all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, the cross-hatched symbol is shown in FIG. 6 (C). The presence of an object on the front side of the central region of the display unit 341 can be detected.

When determining whether or not an object exists on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, the object is determined by at least one of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d due to the wide detection range of the object. It is preferable to determine that an object exists on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 when is detected. On the other hand, in the game machine 10 provided with the so-called warp, two or more detection sensors 38a to 38d are prevented from being erroneously detected by the player as having performed a touch operation by the game ball passing through the warp. It is preferable to determine that the object exists on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 on the condition that the presence of the object is detected by. Further, as in the present embodiment, even when the movable accessory member 39 is exposed from the opening 31A at the standby position and covers the upper part of the symbol display unit 341, the object is subjected to the two or more detection sensors 38a to 38d. It is preferable to determine that an object exists on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 on condition that the existence is detected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when an object is detected by all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, it is determined that the object exists on the front side of the symbol display unit 341.

Of course, when an object is detected by at least one detection sensor 38a to 38d among the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, it may be determined that the object exists on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. Further, when the movable accessory member 39 is present at the standby position, the presence of the object is detected by all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, while when a specific condition is satisfied, the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are detected. The presence of an object may be detected by some of the sensors. For example, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position, the presence of an object is detected by all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, and the movable accessory member 39 is in a position different from the standby position (operating position or standby position). The presence of an object may be detected by some of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d when the object is present at an intermediate position with the operating position). Further, when some of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are out of order, the presence of the object may be detected by the remaining detection sensors that have not failed, and the main game machine 10 may be used. In the operation check of the movable accessory member 39 when the power is turned on, each detection sensor is determined by individually determining whether or not the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position by each of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. It is possible to check whether 38a to 38d are out of order. Further, the operation chuck for checking whether the detection sensors 38a to 38d are out of order can be performed while the game is in progress. For example, when the movable accessory member 39 is moved to the operating position, each detection sensor 38a determines whether or not an object exists based on the detection result of one of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. It is also possible to check the operation of each of the detection sensors 38a to 38d by sequentially determining the ~ 38d.

Further, the detection sensors 38a to 38d may be arranged not only around the symbol display unit 341 but also around the peripheral portion of the symbol display unit 341. Further, the number of detection sensors may be one or more, and the number of detection sensors is not limited to four and may be any other number.

The movable accessory member 39 is located between a predetermined standby position (see FIG. 4) located above the symbol display unit 341 and an operating position (see FIG. 5) set below the standby position. It can be moved in the vertical direction along the surface of the symbol display unit 341. The operating position (see FIG. 5) is closer to the center of the symbol display unit 341 than the standby position (see FIG. 4). Further, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position (see FIG. 5), the coverage rate on the surface of the symbol display unit 341 is higher than when it is in the standby position (see FIG. 4). A plurality of lamps 391 are arranged in an annular shape on the peripheral edge of the movable accessory member 39. In the present embodiment, 15 lamps 391 are arranged, and each lamp 391 can be individually turned on and off. Further, each of the plurality of lamps 391 can be lit in a plurality of colors including, for example, white, yellow, green, red, or a mixed color thereof. In this way, each lamp 391 can be turned on and off individually, and can be turned on in a plurality of colors. Therefore, for example, when the movable accessory member 39 is operated, the lighting pattern and lighting color of each lamp 391 can be changed. Depending on the number of lights, it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the variable game, or to clearly indicate the lottery result. For example, with regard to the lighting color, the jackpot expectation can be increased in the order of white, yellow, green, and red, and by appropriately setting the lighting pattern and the lighting color, a rainbow lamp effect is executed. Therefore, it is also possible to execute a definite effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit. Further, in the present embodiment, the movable accessory member 39 is exposed from the opening 31A at the standby position, but the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit by using the lamp 391 of the portion exposed from the opening 31A. It is also conceivable to execute an effect that suggests the degree of expectation. For example, in the present embodiment, since the four lamps 391 located on the lower side are exposed from the opening 31A (see FIG. 4), a jackpot expectation is made depending on which of these lamps 391 is lit. It is possible to suggest the degree. Further, in addition to the four lamps 391 located on the lower side, it is also conceivable to suggest the jackpot expectation degree by the image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see FIG. 26 (C) described later).

The movable accessory member 39 may be entirely hidden without being exposed from the opening 31A at the standby position. Further, the gaming machine 10 may include a plurality of movable accessory members 39. Further, the movable accessory member 39 may be a combination of a plurality of separated movable members, a member that can be deformed into two or more forms, and a member that includes a display such as a liquid crystal display device. Of course, the movable accessory member 39 is not limited to covering a part of the display screen of the symbol display unit 341, and may cover the entire display screen. Further, the central portion of the movable accessory member 39 may be configured as an illumination portion that can be turned on and off. In this case, by turning on or blinking the illumination unit, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit or to execute an effect of clearly indicating the big hit (see FIG. 26 (D) described later).

Such a movable accessory member 39 is controlled to operate in an effect for showing a lottery result in a big hit lottery in a variable game. In particular, the movable accessory member 39 is operated as a definite effect indicating that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, and is also operated as a chance-up effect for improving the expectation that the lottery result is a big hit. Often. Further, in the jackpot game, the movable accessory member 39 is used for the jackpot game, in addition to the promotion effect that clearly indicates that the actual lottery result is more advantageous to the player than the lottery result suggested by the variable game effect. It is also possible to operate as a hold consecutive villa confirmation effect for notifying that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is included in the hold games for which the execution of the variable game is held.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game machine 10 has a motor 39a that supplies a driving force to the movable accessory member 39, and a return detection unit 39b for detecting that the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby position. Has. The motor 39a is a stepping motor, a DC motor, or the like, and the return detection unit 39b is an optical sensor, a contact type sensor, or the like. The movable accessory member 39 and the motor 39a are connected via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear (not shown), and the movable accessory member 39 is directed from the standby position to the operating position according to the rotation direction of the motor 39a. Move downward or upward from the operating position toward the standby position. For example, the movable accessory member 39 is moved from the standby position to the operating position by rotating the motor 39a in the forward direction, and conversely, the movable accessory member 39 stands by by rotating the motor 39a in the opposite direction. Moved to position.

Further, the gaming machine 10 includes a motor driver 39c to which the motor 39a and the return detection unit 39b are connected. The motor driver 39c is connected to the input / output I / F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5. Then, the motor driver 39c controls the motor 39a according to the control instruction from the voice lamp control device 5. Further, the motor driver 39c can acquire the detection result by the return detection unit 39b and transmit it to the voice lamp control device 5. The motor 39a and the return detection unit 39b may be directly connected to the input / output I / F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5 and controlled by the voice lamp control device 5.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a payout mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 for storing the ball game balls supplied from the island equipment (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 for paying out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23. When the game balls on the upper plate 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower plate 24.

As shown in FIG. 7, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 in response to the operation of the launch handle 22. The power control device 9 converts the electric power supplied from the island equipment (not shown) to which the game machine 10 is connected into a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the electric power to the control device and the driving means provided in the game machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 7.

[Main control unit 331]
The main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of the game in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for transition to a preset jackpot gaming state. The main control device 4 is equipped with an MPU 41, an input / output I / F 42, and the like. The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and is an example of the main control means of the present invention. Further, the MPU 41 has a built-in ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, a part or all of the processing executed by the main control device 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input / output I / F 42 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the main control device 4 and outputs a control signal from the main control device 4. Further, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the magnet sensor 35, the radio wave sensor 36, the main display unit 37, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 has or does not enter the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the through gate 317 based on the detection signals from the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a. To judge. Further, the MPU 41 determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity using the magnet or the radio wave based on the detection signals from the magnet sensor 35 and the radio wave sensor 36. Further, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, the power supply control device 9, and the like.

Then, the MPU 41 outputs commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command to the voice lamp control device 5.

The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the variation display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and includes information on the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The variation pattern command is the step S1605 in the variation start process of FIG. 16 based on the information stored in the hold storage area 412b described later when the symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 and the main display unit 37 is started. Is set in. The fluctuation pattern command may be a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of only the fluctuation display time. In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type is set as a command different from the variation pattern command.

The first hold command and the second hold command are the lottery result, the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern in the jackpot lottery for the increased hold when the hold number N or the hold number M stored in the hold storage area 412b described later increases. This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the number of holds N or the number of holds M. The first hold command and the second hold command are set based on the information stored in the hold storage area 412b, which will be described later, when the hold number N or the hold number M increases (the first hold command in FIG. 12). Step S1207 or step S1209 of the hold command setting process.

The shift command indicates the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 or the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 when the hold number N or the hold number M decreases. This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the pass / fail information has been shifted. The shift command is set in step S1512 in the data setting process of FIG.

Although commands other than the above-mentioned commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, their description will be omitted.

Further, the main control device 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillating circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillating circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of the main timer interrupt process, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

In the present embodiment, the clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 is assigned to the main timer described later every time a rising edge (or falling edge) of the clock signal occurs. It is assumed that the built-in process is started and executed. The oscillation circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are also mounted on the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as needed, and supply the operation clock of the control main body in the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

The ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 and the like. The RAM 412 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 8, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a big hit lottery or the like will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 executes the jackpot lottery and the setting of the variable display time by using the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the hold storage area 412b, and the electric service hold area 412c of the RAM 412.

The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used for determining the loss type. included. Further, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation display time in the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341. Is done. Further, the lottery counter 412a is set to the normal hit random number counter C4 used for lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 315b of the second operating port 315 is in the electric service open state, and the initial value setting of the normal hit random number counter C4. The normal hit initial value counter CIN2 used for is included. Hereinafter, when these multiple types of counters are collectively described, they are simply abbreviated as counters.

Then, the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value at short intervals by the MPU 41, and after reaching a preset maximum value, the counter returns to 0. The updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 when the jackpot lottery and the variable display time are set.

The hold storage area 412b includes a first hold storage area REA, a second hold storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first hold storage area REA includes a first hold area REA1, a second hold area REA2, a third hold area REA3, a fourth hold area REA4, and a hold number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, the type of the variable game in which the jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first reserved storage area REA and the 7-segment display 372 displays the variable display and the stop display is referred to as the first special symbol game. is there. The second hold storage area REB includes a first hold area REB1, a second hold area REB2, a third hold area REB3, a fourth hold area REB4, and a hold number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, the type of the variable game in which the jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second reserved storage area REB and the 7-segment display 373 displays the variable display and the stop display is referred to as the second special symbol game. is there.

Then, when the game ball enters the first operating port 314, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as the winning / failing information used in the lottery, and is stored in one of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 of the first holding storage area REA. When a game ball enters the second operating port 315, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as the winning / failing information used in the lottery, and is stored in one of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the second holding storage area REB. The pass / fail information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 41 that functions as the determination means of the present invention by executing the process according to the control program. The lottery counters 412a (big hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, variable type counter CS1, etc.) are individually corresponding to the first hold storage area REA and the second hold storage area REB. It may be provided in.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variable type counter CS1 is the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area of the first hold storage area REA. It is stored in one of the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the REA4 and the second reserved storage area REB.

Therefore, it is executed based on the pass / fail information stored in the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the first hold storage area REA, the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4, and the second hold storage area REB. In addition to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game to be performed, it is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first operating port 314, the hit / fail information is vacant in the priority order of the first holding area REA1, the second holding area REA2, the third holding area REA3, and the fourth holding area REA4. It is stored in the area where it is. In the hold number storage area NAA, the number of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 in which the hit / fail information is stored is stored as the hold number N.

Further, when the game ball enters the second operating port 315, the hit / fail information is vacant in the priority order of the first holding area REB1, the second holding area REB2, the third holding area REB3, and the fourth holding area REB4. Stored in the area. In the hold number storage area NAB, the number of the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 in which the hit / fail information is stored is stored as the hold number M.

That is, in the game machine 10, the first operating port 314 has a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of holdings of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 and the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4. And, it is possible to hold up to four winning / failing information as a winning history of the game ball to the second operating port 315.

In addition, it is considered as another embodiment that the first operating port 314 and the second operating port 315 are provided with a holding area having a maximum holding number of eight, and even in this case, a maximum of eight can be held in total. It is possible to withhold the winning / failing information as the winning history. The storage process of the pass / fail information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing the process according to the control program.

The execution area AE is the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA or the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB when the symbol variation display on the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341 is started. It is a storage area used for moving the pass / fail information stored in. Specifically, the pass / fail information of the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and the pass / fail information does not exist in the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB. When the hold number storage area NAB is 0, the pass / fail information of the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

The difference between the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA and the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAB of the second hold storage area REB is 2 or more. In the case of, it is considered as another embodiment that the value of the holding area having the larger number is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. Further, it is also considered as another embodiment that the pass / fail information of the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA and the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB is alternately moved to the execution area AE.

Then, at the start of one variable game, the MPU 41 performs a big hit lottery or the like based on the numerical information stored as the hit / miss information in the execution area AE. At this time, when the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the pass / fail information stored in the second hold area REA2 is shifted to the first hold area REA1 and the third hold area REA1 is moved. The pass / fail information stored in the hold area REA3 shifts to the second hold area REA2, and the pass / fail information stored in the fourth hold area REA4 shifts to the third hold area REA3.

Similarly, when the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the pass / fail information stored in the second hold area REB2 shifts to the first hold area REB1 and is held third. The winning / failing information stored in the area REB3 shifts to the second holding area REB2, and the winning / failing information stored in the fourth holding area REB4 shifts to the third holding area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 637, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot depends on the winning / failing table stored in the winning / failing table storage area in the ROM 411, which is the low probability mode (first notification game state) which is the normal game state and the high probability mode (second) which is the probability variation game state. Two types are set according to the notification game state). Here, FIG. 9A is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability mode hit / fail table corresponding to a low-probability mode, and FIG. 9B is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability mode hit / miss table corresponding to a high-probability mode. In the examples shown in FIGS. 9 (A) and 9 (B), the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit in the low probability mode is 2 out of the random numbers 0 to 637 (0,1). In the high probability mode, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 20 (0 to 19) out of the random numbers 0 to 637. That is, the jackpot probability is 1/319 (2/638) in the low probability mode, and the jackpot probability is 1 / 31.9 (20/638) in the high probability mode, which is 10 times that of the low probability mode.

Here, in the low-probability mode winning / failing table and the high-probability mode winning / failing table, two random numbers (0, 1) in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot are common, but it is possible that they are not common. Further, the random numbers that win the jackpot may not be continuous values but may be partially or wholly discrete values. If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than the random number values for winning the jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be missed.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two types of jackpots, the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot, is set by the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area in the ROM 411. Here, FIG. 9C is a diagram showing an example of a distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 9C, when the type of the variable game is the first special symbol game, the number of random numbers for the 5R probability variation jackpot is 10 from 0 to 9, and the number of random numbers for the 16R probability variation jackpot is 10. Is 5 from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that is usually a big hit for 5R is 5 from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of the variable game is the second special symbol game, the number of random numbers for the 5R probability variation jackpot is 5 from 0 to 4, and the number of random numbers for the 16R probability variation jackpot is 10 from 5 to 14. Yes, the number of random numbers that are usually 5R jackpots is 5 from 15 to 19. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop probabilistic machine in which the probability of the probabilistic jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is the same. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of 16R probability variation jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than that in the first special symbol game. That is, in the probabilistic time-saving game state, the expected value of the game ball when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is set higher than the normal game state such as the normal time-saving game state or the normal non-time-saving game state. ing.

In the present embodiment, the first operating port 314 that triggers the execution of the first special symbol game by winning the game ball, and the second operating port that triggers the execution of the second special symbol game by winning the game ball. An individual distribution table is set for each 315, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the game ball wins the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315, but the first special symbol It is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same between the game and the second special symbol game. Further, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to the loop probabilistic machine, but may be configured as a so-called ST machine, a V-ST machine, a type-two type mixer, or the like.

Then, in the MPU 41, the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot", and "5R normal" based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. Determine whether it is a "big hit" or a "missing".

Here, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an open / close execution mode is executed in which the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is repeated five times in the jackpot game. Further, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the open / close execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times in the jackpot game is executed.

In the case of a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, after the jackpot game is completed, the mode shifts to the probability variation time saving mode, which is a high probability mode in which the jackpot winning probability is high and a high frequency support mode in which the opening probability of the electric accessory 315b is high. Then, the probability variation time saving mode is continued until the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is determined by the MPU 41 to be "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot", or "5R normal jackpot".

On the other hand, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, it is executed in the normal time saving mode, which is a low probability mode in which the jackpot winning probability is low and a high frequency support mode in which the opening probability of the electric accessory 315b is high after the jackpot game is completed. Then, the high frequency support mode in the normal time saving mode continues until the lottery of the jackpot of a preset number of times such as 50 times and 100 times is completed.

By the way, when the game machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of a loop probability change machine, a preset number of times (for example, 50 times, 100 times) of big hit lottery is performed after the end of the big hit game at the time of the probability change big hit. Is executed in the probability variation time saving mode (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), then shifts to the low probability mode, and the high frequency support mode ends. Further, in the variable game, it is also conceivable to perform a fall lottery from the probability variation time reduction mode to the normal time reduction mode or the low probability mode as another embodiment. If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is not correct, the jackpot game state and the high frequency support mode will not be entered. In the present embodiment, the case where the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpots, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot, will be described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, 2 round probability variation jackpot, 2 It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types such as round regular jackpot and 16R regular jackpot.

Further, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315.

In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of order. Specifically, due to the deviation type table stored in the deviation type table storage area in the ROM 411, the front-rear detachment reach, in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and the reach also occurs. The value of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to each of the three types of outliers, that is, the reach other than the front-back deviation in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol, and the complete deviation in which reach does not occur, is set. Here, FIG. 9D is a diagram showing an example of an outlier type table. In the example shown in FIG. 9 (D), the value of the random number that is out of front and back is 0 to 8, the value of the random number that is reach other than front and back is 9 to 38, and the value of the random number that is completely out of line is 39. ~ 238. The MPU 41 determines that reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the variable game in which the 5R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot, or the 5R normal jackpot is won, that is, the variable game that shifts to the open / close execution mode.

Here, the reach indicates a state in which the symbol combination of the main symbols indicating that the jackpot has been won is likely to occur between the start of the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display unit 341 and the stop display of the symbol. It is a fluctuating state. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the effective line on the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position fluctuates. Further, while the reach of the symbol display unit 341 is in a fluctuating state, a story effect process in which a moving image such as a predetermined character is displayed to suggest an expectation level, an operation by a player on an operation button 20, or a specific area of a panel 25 A player-participation-type operation effect process in which the touch operation is reflected in the effect is executed. It is conceivable that the variable display on the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden, reduced or enlarged, and displayed during the execution of these effect processing.

The electric accessory opening counter C4 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric service holding area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not the electric accessory 315b is opened for a predetermined time according to the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 412c. For example, it is considered that the winning is won when the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 0 to 199, and the loss is considered when the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 200 to 250.

The variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 199, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. By determining the variation pattern type in this way, the voice lamp control device 5 has a high-speed variation effect (basic effect, non-reach effect), a normal reach effect (first development effect), and a super reach effect (second development effect). ), Special reach effect (second development effect), and other rough variable game effect types are determined according to the variable pattern type (variable display time). The variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process described later is executed by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Further, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315.

Then, the MPU 41 determines a fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the preset fluctuation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 specifies the type of fluctuation pattern with reference to the normal jackpot fluctuation table, the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table, or the deviation fluctuation table stored in advance in the fluctuation table storage area of ROM 411. Note that these fluctuation tables may be provided individually for each of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. Further, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

Here, FIGS. 9 (E), 9 (F), and 9 (G) are diagrams showing an example of a normal jackpot fluctuation table, a probabilistic jackpot fluctuation table, and a deviation fluctuation table. As shown in FIGS. 9 (E), 9 (F), and 9 (G), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table, the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table, and the deviation fluctuation table, the fluctuation pattern is preliminarily set according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. It is associated. Then, the MPU 41 is a normal jackpot fluctuation table when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is "5R normal jackpot", a probability variation jackpot fluctuation table when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" or "16R probability variation jackpot", and a lottery. If the result is "off", refer to the out-of-variation table and specify the type of fluctuation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9 (E) and 9 (F), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table and the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table, the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" are obtained according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Is selected. When the fluctuation pattern "01" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a normal reach effect pattern in which the variation display time is 30 s as the variation type (effect pattern type) (see FIG. 24 (B)). The normal reach effect pattern is executed on the symbol display unit 341. The normal reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the normal reach effect (see FIG. 27). When the fluctuation pattern "02" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a super reach effect pattern in which the variation display time is 60 s as the variation type (effect pattern type) (see FIG. 24 (B)). The super reach effect pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341. The super reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the super reach effect (see FIG. 27). Further, when the variation pattern "03" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a special reach effect pattern having the longest variation display time of 90 s as the variation type (effect pattern type) (see FIG. 24 (B)). ), The special reach effect pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341. The special reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the special reach effect (see FIG. 27).

As shown in FIG. 9 (G), in the deviation variation table, the variation type counter CS1 is used for each stop type (reach before and after deviation, reach other than front and rear deviation, complete deviation) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. The correspondence between and the fluctuation pattern is defined. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of disconnection is front / rear deviation reach or non-front / rear deviation reach, one of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. .. On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of disengagement is completely deviated, either the fluctuation pattern "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the variation pattern "04" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) in which the variation display time is 7 s as the variation type (effect pattern type) (FIG. 24). (See (B)), the non-reach effect pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341 (see FIG. 27). When the variation pattern "05" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) in which the variation display time is 10 s as the variation type (effect pattern type) (FIG. 24). (See (B)), the non-reach effect pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341 (see FIG. 27).

For example, in the game machine 10, as the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern "04", the variation display of the deviation pattern is stopped at the deviation pattern without accompanying the advance notice effect such as displaying a character, a message, or the like. Is executed. Further, in the game machine 10, as the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern "05", the variation display of the deviation pattern that stops at the deviation pattern is displayed with a notice effect of displaying a character, a message, or the like. Will be executed. In addition, in the case of the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern "05", the player participation type operation effect that reflects the operation of the touch operation on the specific area of the operation button 20 or the panel 25 by the player is announced. It may be executed as a production.

The type of fluctuation pattern is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 9 (E) to 9 (G). Further, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of normal reach effects having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as normal reach effects executed in the normal reach effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “01”, and any of the two types of normal reach effects selected from the normal reach effects is prepared. The normal reach production is executed.

Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of super reach effects having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as super reach effects executed in the super reach effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "02", and a selection is made from among them. One of the super reach productions that have been done is performed. The super reach production is a reach production with a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach production, and the probability (expectation) that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is higher than the normal reach production, and the big hit is won more than the special reach production. It is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) is low.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, as a special reach effect executed in the special reach effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "03", a plurality of types of special reach effects having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared, and a selection is made from among them. One of the special reach productions that have been made is performed. The special reach effect is a reach effect having a longer variation time than the normal reach effect, and is an effect developed from, for example, a normal reach effect or a super reach effect. The special reach effect is executed when it is suggested to the player that the probability (expectation degree) of winning a big hit is higher than that of the normal reach effect or the special reach effect.

It should be noted that the effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern includes an operation effect in which the operation status for the touch operation on the specific area of the operation button 20 or the panel 25 by the player is reflected in the effect, for example, a single operation in which the single operation is reflected in the effect. Player-participation-type operation production such as production, continuous stroke operation production in which the continuous hitting operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the production, and long press operation production in which the long press operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the production. May be included.

Then, when the MPU 41 specifies a fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time by the 7-segment display 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 41 issues a fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Input to the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the MPU41 has a fluctuation pattern command "A" in front of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 5R normal jackpot. Output any one of "A01" to "A03". Further, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the MPU41 is a variation pattern command "B01" in which "B" indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot is added before the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". ~ Outputs any of "B03". Further, the MPU 41 is a variation pattern command "C01" in which, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", "C" indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot is added before the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". ~ Outputs any of "C03". Further, in the MPU 41, when the lottery result is "off", the fluctuation pattern commands "D01" to "D05" in which "D" indicating that the lottery is out are added before the fluctuation patterns "01" to "05". Output any of. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the fluctuation pattern command, and the symbol display unit 341 is based on the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result. Determine the details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed in. Then, the voice lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the fluctuation display based on the details of the determined fluctuation mode, reproduces the voice from the speaker 26 in accordance with the fluctuation display, and lights and blinks the illumination unit 27. , Turn off the lights.

Therefore, in the game machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 executes a simple process of determining the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation table for the fluctuation display in the symbol display unit 341. It will be. Therefore, even when the MPU 41 of the game machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the jackpot lottery can be stably executed by the MPU 41. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the voice lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of variation modes as the variation mode.

[Sub control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 7, the sub control unit 332 includes a voice lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and a symbol variation display and a symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331. Execute the effect display.

[Voice lamp control device 5]
The voice lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input / output I / F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 51 has a built-in ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

The ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. In addition, the ROM 511 also stores information such as voices used in the variable game effect, the jackpot game effect, and the lamp blinking pattern. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. The RAM 512 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

The voice lamp control device 5 commands the display control device 6 based on the command (control signal) input from the main control device 4 by executing the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51. (Control signal) is input to control the display of the symbol display unit 341. Further, the voice lamp control device 5 also controls the reproduced voice output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the reproduced voice output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 when executing the variable game effect and the jackpot game effect described later.

The input / output I / F 52 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the voice lamp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command are input from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5. Further, the voice lamp control device 5 outputs a display fluctuation pattern command or the like to the display control device 6. Another embodiment is also conceivable in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the voice lamp control device 5. Further, another embodiment is also conceivable in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having both the functions of the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

Further, a speaker 26, an illumination unit 27, and a motor driver 39c are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the voice output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27, and the like based on the command input from the main control device 4. Further, the MPU 51 can control the motor 39a via the motor driver 39c to operate the movable accessory member 39 (see FIGS. 4 and 5), and obtains the detection result by the return detection unit 39b. It is possible to determine whether or not the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby position. Further, an operation switch 20a, an upper left detection sensor 38a, a lower left detection sensor 38b, an upper right detection sensor 38c, and a lower right detection sensor 38d are connected to the input / output I / F 52. As a result, the MPU 51 detects that the operation button 20 has been operated and that the touch operation has been performed on the specific area of the panel 25, and the symbol display unit is based on the detection result. It is also possible to control the image game effect executed in 341, the operation effect of the movable accessory member 39, the sound output effect in which the sound is output from the speaker 26, the lamp effect by the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27, and the like.

The MPU 51 executes predetermined arithmetic processing based on commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command input from the main control device 4.

Specifically, when the variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 has a variation pattern (combination of stop symbols of the main symbol, variation display time, variation type (see FIG. 24 (B))) and variation pattern based on the variation pattern command. The effect type (see FIGS. 25 (A) to 25 (C)) is determined, and the display fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the display control device 6 (steps S2203 to in the command determination process of FIG. 23). (See S2207), the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 is started. At this time, in the symbol display unit 341, when the variation pattern command indicates an deviation, the combination of the main symbols corresponding to the deviation is displayed. On the other hand, when the variable pattern command indicates a 5R normal jackpot, the combination of the main symbols corresponding to the 5R normal jackpot is displayed, and when the variable pattern command indicates a 5R probability variation jackpot, the combination of the main symbols corresponding to the 5R normal jackpot or the 5R probability variation jackpot is displayed. Is displayed, and if 16R probability variation jackpot is shown, 5R normal jackpot,

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on a command (control signal) input from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the voice lamp control device 5.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input / output I / F 62, and the like, and the voice lamp control device 5 and the symbol display unit 341 are connected to the input / output I / F 62. Bidirectional communication may be possible between the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and the MPU 61 has a ROM 611 and a RAM 612 built-in. Further, the display control device 6 also has a built-in other circuit such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, a part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

In addition to the control program, the ROM 611 includes variable symbols such as the main symbol used in the symbol variable display of the symbol display unit 341, a notice effect image, a reach effect image, a jackpot effect image, an off effect image, a touch operation reception effect image, and a touch. Multiple types of images such as operation effect images are stored. The image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 includes a still image and a moving image. Further, the ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes not only the type and display timing of the image to be used, but also the variable display time of the variable symbol. Then, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays the image on the symbol display unit 341 according to the display schedule corresponding to the variation display pattern command, thereby realizing the symbol variation display and the effect display.

The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 61. The RAM 612 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input / output I / F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 71 has a built-in ROM 711 and RAM 712.

The ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. Further, the RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 71. The RAM 712 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

The input / output I / F 72 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input / output I / F 72.

As described above, the payout device 132 pays out the game ball from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23, and has a drive unit 132a such as a motor for driving a ball stop member for switching whether or not the game ball is paid out. It is provided with a payout sensor 132b that individually detects the game balls to be paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result by the payout sensor 132b. Further, the payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error such as a ball clogging of the payout device 132 occurs.

The ball lending device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the gaming machine 10. Then, the ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 in response to the operation of the ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the game machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the set amount and lend them to the player. Specifically, when a control signal for paying out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 to generate a predetermined number of game balls. It will be paid out. The recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium having an IC chip built-in. Further, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending a predetermined number of game balls according to the cash by inserting cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the drive of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feed device 322 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated to launch the game ball stored in the upper plate 23 on the launch rail 321. Supply on. Then, the launch control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the launch handle 22, and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation to direct the game ball on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31. And fire. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal for which ON / OFF is switched at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, one gaming ball is launched toward the gaming area every 0.6 sec.

Further, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 22. As a result, the launch control IC 81 increases the firing intensity of the game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 32 as the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 22 increases, based on the voltage value input according to the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 22. The voltage applied to the solenoid 323 is adjusted so that it becomes stronger.

Further, the launch handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for the player to arbitrarily stop the launch of the game ball. Is provided. The launch control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 by the touch sensor 21a, or the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism 32 is stopped. As a result, for example, the launch handle 22 is fixed in a rotationally operated state, and the game is prevented in a situation where the player is not touching the launch handle 22. Further, the player can stop the firing of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b at an arbitrary timing with his thumb or the like while rotating the firing handle 22.

[Power control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a + 12V voltage for driving various sensors, a drive unit, and the like, a + 5V voltage for logic used in the control device, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated + 12V or + 5V voltage to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, and the like.

The power control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on / off the power of the game machine 10 and a RAM erase switch 91 operated when the game machine 10 is returned to the initial state. The game machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 91 is ON.

Further, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means for being charged by the electric power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the game machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information of the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the game machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

Further, when it is determined that the power supply is cut off, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24 V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, the power supply control device 9 is in a power failure state when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22 V. Judge. When the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like receive the power failure signal from the power control device 9, the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like interrupt the ongoing control and execute a predetermined NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, the process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. Specifically, in the game machine 10, the MPU 41 is executed at the time of power-on, a start-up process, a main process executed after the start-up process, a main timer interrupt process that is periodically started, and a power failure. Execute NMI interrupt processing and so on. In the present embodiment, the start-up process, the NMI interrupt process, and the like will be omitted, and the main timer interrupt process and the main process will be described.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec.

<Step S1001>
First, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process for determining the detection state of the sensor or switch connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection states of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the magnet sensor 35, the radio wave sensor 36, and the like are determined. At this time, when the entry of the game ball into any of the entry sensors 313a to 317a is detected, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as the winning detection information.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 added 1 to each of the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4, and the counter values reached the maximum value. If so, the counter value is cleared to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes the start winning process (step S1004) accompanying the winning of the game ball to the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315, and executes the launch control process (step S1005). The details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the launch control process, the game ball is on the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to enable the firing of. Further, the launch control process invalidates the launch of the game ball when it is detected by the touch sensor 21a that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. It is a process to do. The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch the game ball when the launch of the game ball is effective.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 draws a lottery as to whether or not to set the electric accessory 315b of the second operating port 315 to the electric service open state based on the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 412c. Execute the process. Specifically, in the through-gate process, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the current game mode is the high-frequency support mode based on the high-frequency mode flag. Then, the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is won when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 0 to 29 when it is not in the high frequency support mode, and disengages when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 30 to 249. Judge that. Further, in the case of the high frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is won when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and disengages when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 200 to 249. Judge that. Then, when the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is won in the through gate processing, the electric accessory 315b is opened for a predetermined time. As a result, the game ball can be won in the second operating port 315 on the upper right side of the game board 31 in which the electric accessory 315b is arranged side by side.

[Starting prize processing]
Here, with reference to FIG. 11, the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 of FIG. 10 will be described.

<Step S1101>
First, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first operating port 314. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the first operating port 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has not won the first operating port 314. Then (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of holds N is the maximum number of holds (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1106. On the other hand, in the MPU 41, if the hold number N is not the maximum hold number (step S1102: No), 1 is added to the hold number N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. 10, and a variable type counter CS1 updated in the main process described later (step S1302 of FIG. 13). And S1310), and the counter value is stored in the first free hold area of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 of the first hold storage area REA of the hold storage area 412b in the RAM 412. ..

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 sets the content of the hit / miss information before the hit / miss information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 becomes the target of determining the hit / miss of the jackpot in the fluctuation start process (S1408 in FIG. 14 and FIG. 16) described later. After confirming, the first hold command setting process for setting the first hold command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the confirmation result. The details of the first hold command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second operating port 315. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the second operating port 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has not won the second operating port 315. Then (step S1106: No), the start winning process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of holds M is the maximum number of holds (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and shifts the process to step S1005 of FIG. On the other hand, in the MPU 41, if the hold number M is not the maximum hold number (step S1107: No), 1 is added to the hold number M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. 10, and a variable type counter CS1 updated in the main process described later (step S1302 of FIG. 13). And S1310), and the counter value is stored in the first free hold area of the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the second hold storage area REB of the hold storage area 412b in the RAM 412. ..

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 receives the hit / fail information before the hit / miss information for the second hold acquired in step S1109 becomes a hit / miss determination target in the variable start processing (S1408 in FIG. 14 and FIG. 16) described later. The contents are confirmed, and the second hold command setting process for setting the second hold command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the confirmation result. Here, since the second hold command setting process is the same as the first hold command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 12, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the second hold command setting process, in the first hold command setting process of FIG. 12, if the "first hold command" is read as the "second hold command" and the "hold number N" is read as the "hold number M". Good.

[1st hold command setting process]
Here, the first hold command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG. The first hold command includes information indicating that the command is the first hold command, and information such as the type (big hit type or miss) of the first hold command, the fluctuation pattern, and the number of holds N. ..

<Step S1201>
In step S1201, the MPU 41 reads the hold number N from the hold number storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first hold from the RAM 412.

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is in the high probability mode, and if it is in the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process shifts to step S1203, and if it is not in the high probability mode (step S1202). : No), the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 is set to turn on whether or not it is in the high probability mode at the time of transition to the high probability mode in the game state transition process (step S1306 in FIG. 13) in the main process described later, and the jackpot game from the high probability mode. Judgment is based on the high probability mode flag that is set to off when transitioning to another gaming state such as a state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning based on the high probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 9B). Executes the pass / fail judgment of. On the other hand, in step S1204, in the MPU 41, is the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 a value corresponding to the jackpot winning based on the low probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 9A)? Executes the pass / fail judgment of whether or not.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process shifts to step S1206, and the jackpot random number counter C1 If it is determined that the counter value read from is not the value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the hit / fail information is stored in the third hold area RE3 in step S1104 of FIG. 11, the counters of the jackpot type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1 included in the hit / miss information stored in the third hold area RE3. The value is read. Of the first hold area RE1 to the fourth hold area RE4, the hold area in which the pass / fail information is stored in step S1104 of FIG. 11 can be determined by the value of the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NA. is there.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1 and the hold number N in the first hold command. As described above, since the first hold command includes the hold number N read in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 that receives the first hold command is the hold number included in the first hold command. By referring to N, it is possible to recognize which of the first hold area RE1 to the fourth hold area RE4 the first hold command corresponds to the pass / fail information stored.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets the information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out, the variable type counter CS1 and the hold number N in the first hold command (step S1209).

The first hold command set to be turned on in the first hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and is executed in the main process step S1301 of FIG. 13 described later, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. It is erased after being transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 together with the command of. Further, the content of the first hold command described here is only an example, and if the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command, it is not limited to the content described here. For example, it is conceivable that some or all of the information of the first hold command is included in another command.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the main process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described. In the main process, the main control process for the progress of the variable game and the jackpot game is executed. In the main process, the processes of steps S1301 to S1307 are executed as periodic processes of, for example, a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update processes of steps S1308 to S1310 are executed in the remaining time from the end of the processes of steps S1301 to S1307 to the next cycle. To.

<Step S1301>
First, in step S1301, the MPU 41 transmits output data such as a command set in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 10 or the previous main process to a control device such as a sub control unit 332 or a peripheral control unit 140. Execute the process. For example, when a command such as a fluctuation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, or a shift command is set in the RAM 412, the command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5. Further, when the prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process in step S1303 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variable type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the variable type counter CS1 and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets the prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a prize has been generated in the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316, or the like, based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412. Then, when a prize has been won, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a variable game control process for controlling the game in the variable game. Although the details of the variable game control process will be described later, in the variable game control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed, and the variable pattern command required for the symbol variable display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 has a jackpot random number counter C1 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 10, a jackpot type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, and a variation updated in steps S1302 and S1310 of this process. Based on each value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variation display time is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, the MPU 41 controls the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 316b in the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened, and as a result, the result of the jackpot lottery (big hit) that triggered the transition to the jackpot game. Execute as many times as the number according to the type). For example, the MPU 41 executes a round game 5 times when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot and a 5R probability variation jackpot, and executes a round game 16 times when the jackpot type is a 16R probability variation jackpot.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for shifting the game state based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in steps S1602 and S1603 in the fluctuation start process of FIG. In the game state transition process, the MPU 41 sets the game state when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a jackpot game state having an open / close execution mode, a probabilistic time-short game state which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a low probability mode and a high frequency. It shifts to the normal non-time saving game state which is the support mode, and the normal non-time saving game state which is not the high frequency support mode in the low probability mode.

For example, when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to the big hit game state after the end of the variable game that notifies the lottery result. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. Further, when the jackpot game is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to a predetermined gaming state according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the execution of the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts to the probability variation time shortening game state after the end of the jackpot game, and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R normal jackpot. If, the game shifts to the normal time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends.

Further, when the transition of the gaming state is shifted, the MPU 41 sets the flag for the gaming state before the transition to off, and sets the flag for the gaming state after the transition to on. For example, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game flag off and the high probability mode flag on when there is a transition of the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to the probabilistic time-shortening gaming state. On the other hand, when the game state shifts from the probability change time short game state to the jackpot game state, the high probability mode flag is set to off, while the jackpot game flag is set to on.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes the display control process of the main display unit 37. By this display control processing, the 7-segment display 372 and 373 in the main display unit 37 executes the symbol variation display only during the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the symbol variation display is a symbol indicating the lottery result. It will be displayed as a stop. Further, by the display control process, each LED lamp is blinked by the LED pair 371 in the main display unit 37 only during the predetermined normal symbol fluctuation display time, and the pair of LED lamps are turned on and off depending on whether or not the normal symbol is won. It will be indicated by the lighting pattern which is a combination of. In the case of winning a normal symbol, the electric accessory 315b attached to the second operating port 315 is opened for a predetermined time.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1308: Yes), the process shifts to step S1301 and executes each process after S1301 described above. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1308: No), the execution timing of the next main process is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process arrives. During the remaining time until it is reached, step S1308, step S1309 and step S1310 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1308: Yes).

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value of the variable type counter CS1, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, after updating the variation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1308.

[Variable game control processing]
Here, with reference to FIG. 14, the variable game control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. 13 will be described.

<Step S1401>
In step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in the jackpot game, and if it is in the jackpot game (step S1401: Yes), the variable game control process is terminated and the gaming machine 10 is not in the jackpot game. In the case (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. Whether or not the jackpot game is executed is set to on when transitioning to the jackpot game state, and is set to off when transitioning from the jackpot game state to another gaming state, for example, in the game state transition process in the main process of FIG. Judgment is based on the jackpot game flag.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation is being displayed, and if the symbol variation is being displayed (step S1402: Yes), the process is shifted to step S1403, and if the symbol variation is not being displayed, the process is shifted to step S1403. (Step S1402: No), the process shifts to step S1406. For example, whether or not the symbol variation is being displayed is set to ON in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 16 described later, and when the variation display time elapses (step S1403: Yes), the variation game control is performed. The determination is made based on the variable display flag set to off in step S1405 of the process.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variation display time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation display, and if it determines that the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1404. If it is determined that the variation display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the variation game control process is terminated.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
When the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 stops and displays the symbols corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable game on the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37 (step S1403: Yes). Step S1404), the variable display flag is set to off (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
When the symbol variation is not displayed (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 has a hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the hold storage area 412b and a hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAB. It is determined whether or not both are 0 (step S1406). Here, when both the number of holds N and the number of holds M are 0 (step S1406: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the variable game control process. On the other hand, when either one of the number of holds N and the number of holds M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes a data setting process for the data of the hit / miss information stored in the hold storage area 412b. When the MPU 41 finishes the process of step S1407, the process shifts to step S1408. The details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a variation start process for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute a variation display based on the hit / miss information stored in the execution area AE, and ends the variation game control process. The details of the fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, an example of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of FIG. 14 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
In step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0, and if the hold number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1502. To do. On the other hand, when the number of holds M is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
When the hold number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAA (step S1502), and shifts from the first hold area REA1 to the execution area AE. The pass / fail information is moved (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the pass / fail information of the second reserved area REA2 to the fourth reserved area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the pass / fail information of the second hold area REA2 is moved to the first hold area REA1, the pass / fail information of the third hold area REA3 is moved to the second hold area REA2, and the fourth hold area REA4. The pass / fail information is moved to the third holding area REA3. When the process of step S1504 is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Steps S1505-S1507>
Step S1505 shifts to the case where the hold number M is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 shifts to the case where both or one of the hold number M and the hold number N is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. (Step S1406: No). Therefore, when the hold number M is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the hold number N is not 0, and therefore executes the processes of steps S1505 to S1507.

Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the hit / fail information from the first hold area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the pass / fail information of the second reserved area REB2 to the fourth reserved area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the pass / fail information of the second hold area REB2 is moved to the first hold area REB1, the pass / fail information of the third hold area REB3 is moved to the second hold area REB2, and the fourth hold area REB4. The pass / fail information is moved to the third holding area REB3. When the process of step S1507 is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 sets a shift command in the RAM 412 indicating that the pass / fail information of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 or the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 has been shifted. Then, the shift command set in step S1508 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 13) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is changed. When the process of step S1508 is completed, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process and shifts the process to step S1408 of FIG.

[Fluctuation start processing]
Here, an example of the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of FIG. 14 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1601>
In step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the high probability mode. Whether or not the high probability mode is set is determined based on, for example, whether or not the high probability mode flag set to be turned on in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 13 is set to on. .. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1602 when the gaming state is in the high probability mode (step S1601: Yes), and when the gaming state is not in the high probability mode (step S1601: No), that is, when the gaming state is in the low probability mode. If there is, the process proceeds to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 is a counter of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the hit / miss information stored in the execution area AE of the hold storage area 412b based on the high probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 9B). Whether or not the value corresponds to the jackpot winning is determined. On the other hand, in step S1604, the MPU 41 has a jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the hit / miss information stored in the execution area AE of the hold storage area 412b based on the low probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 9B). Whether or not the counter value of is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is determined.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the variation display time of the 7-segment display 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation game in the variation display time counter. Specifically, when the result of the hit / fail determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a normal jackpot, the MPU 41 determines a fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 9E). Identify. Further, when the result of the hit / fail determination in step S1602 or S1603 is the probability variation jackpot, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see FIG. 9F). .. Further, when the result of the hit / fail determination in step S1602 or S1603 is wrong, the MPU 41 specifies the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the deviation fluctuation table (see FIG. 9 (G)).

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 sets the RAM 412 with a variation pattern command including the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variation game and the variation pattern identified in step S1604. As a result, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 13) executed by the MPU 41, the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice lamp control device 5 displays the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern command. The symbol variation display by the unit 341 is executed.

As described above, when the lottery result is "normal jackpot", the MPU 41 has "A01" to "A" in which "A" indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot is added to the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". Any one of "A03" is set in RAM412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the MPU 41 is any of "B01" to "B03" in which "B" indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot is added to the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". Is set in RAM412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", the MPU 41 is any of "C01" to "C03" in which "C" indicating that the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot" is added to the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". Is set in RAM412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is "out of place", the MPU 41 changes any of "D01" to "D08" in which "D" indicating that the lottery pattern is out of order is added to the fluctuation patterns "01" to "08". Set to RAM 412 as a command. Further, when the lottery result is "off", the MPU 41 includes information on whether it is a front-back off reach, a reach other than front-back off, or a complete out-of-order in the variation pattern command.

<Step S1606>
In step S1606, the MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display of the main display unit 37 and ends the variation start process. The MPU 41 sets the variable display flag to on when the symbol variation display of the main display unit 37 is started.

[Processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Next, the process executed by the MPU 51 in the voice lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 38.

As another embodiment, it is conceivable that a part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 in the present embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. Further, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing of the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, startup processing at the time of starting up the voice lamp control device 5, NMI interrupt processing at the time of a power failure, and the like. The description of these processes will be omitted.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Here, FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5. The MPU 51 executes, for example, the sub-timer interrupt process as a periodic process having a cycle of 1 msec.

As shown in FIG. 17, the MPU 51 has an operation button operation detection process (step S1701), an operation detection pattern determination process (step S1702), a touch operation detection process (step S1703), and a touch operation detection pattern in the sub-timer interrupt process. The determination process (step S1704), the counter update process (step S1705), the command determination process (step S1706), the variable game effect process (step S1707), and the jackpot game effect process (step S1708) are executed.

[Operation button operation detection process]
Here, FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process (step S1701) in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation button operation detection process, the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times is executed. In the gaming machine 10, the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51, so that the operation button 20 is operated at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in the present embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub-timer interrupt process. It will be judged whether or not there is.

<Steps S1801 to S1803>
As shown in FIG. 18, in step S1801, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second operation detection flag to the first operation detection flag. Further, in step S1802, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third operation detection flag to the second operation detection flag. After that, in step S1803, the MPU 51 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a in the third operation detection flag, and the operation button operation detection process ends.

As described above, in the operation button operation detection process, the processes of steps S1801 to S1803 are executed, so that the operation history of the operation button 20 is the operation state of the most recent three times at 1 msec intervals from the first operation detection flag to the third. It is stored in the RAM 512 as an operation detection flag. Specifically, the latest operation state is stored as the third operation detection flag, the previous operation state is stored as the second operation detection flag, and the previous operation state is stored as the first operation detection flag. ..

[Operation detection pattern judgment processing]
Here, FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process (step S1702) in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation detection pattern determination process, an operation pattern for determining the operation state for the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. Set the flag. The operation pattern flag includes the first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by the combination of turning on and off the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, as shown in FIG. 22A, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation for the operation button 20 is continued. Further, when only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation for the operation button 20 has started. Further, when only the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation for the operation button 20 is completed. Then, when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to off, it can be determined that the operation button 20 has not been operated.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 19, in step S1901, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1902 when the first operation detection flag is on (step S1901: Yes), and performs the process when the first operation detection flag is off (step S1901: No). The process proceeds to step S1905.

<Step S1902>
In step S1902, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to ON. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1903 when the second operation detection flag is on (step S1902: Yes), and performs the process when the second operation detection flag is off (step S1902: No). The process proceeds to step S1908.

<Step S1903>
In step S1903, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is set to ON. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1904 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1903: Yes), and performs the process when the third operation detection flag is off (step S1903: No). The process proceeds to step S1910.

<Step S1904>
In step S1904, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag on, the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 can determine that the operation state of the operation button 20 is continuing when the operation pattern of "on", "on", and "on" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times. , The first operation pattern flag is set to on, and the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 22 (A)). Then, the first operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the operation button 20 is continuing.

<Step S1905>
When the MPU 51 determines in step S1901 that the first operation detection flag is off (step S1901: No), whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on. Is determined (step S1905). Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1906 when the second operation detection flag is on (step S1905: Yes), and performs the process when the second operation detection flag is off (step S1905: No). The process proceeds to step S1910.

<Step S1906>
In step S1906, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1907 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1906: Yes), and performs the process when the third operation detection flag is off (step S1906: No). The process proceeds to step S1910.

<Step S1907>
In step S1907, the MPU 51 sets the second operation pattern flag on, the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, in the MPU 51, when the operation pattern of "off", "on", and "on" occurs as the operation state for three times of the operation button 20, the operation button 20 changes from the non-operation state to the operation state (operation). Is started), so the second operation pattern flag is set to on, and the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 22 (A)). Then, the second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been started). In this way, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state by using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state for three times of the operation button 20 is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the operation start of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S1908>
When the MPU 51 determines in step S1902 that the second operation detection flag is off (step S1902: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the latest operation button 20 is on. (Step S1908). Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1910 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1908: Yes), and performs the process when the second operation detection flag is off (step S1908: No). The process proceeds to step S1909.

<Step S1909>
In step S1909, the MPU 51 sets the third operation pattern flag on, the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, in the MPU 51, when the operation pattern of "on", "off", and "off" occurs as the operation state for three times of the operation button 20, the operation button 20 changes from the operation state to the non-operation state (operation). Is completed), so the third operation pattern flag is set to on, and the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 22 (A)). Then, the third operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 is completed). In this way, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state by using the third operation pattern flag, the operation state for three times of the operation button 20 is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the start of operation of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the end of operation of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S1910>
In step S1910, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 turns off all of the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as "off", "off", and "off" occurs as the operation state for three operation buttons 20. (See FIG. 22 (A)). The MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 is in a non-operation state when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off.

[Touch operation detection processing]
Here, FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation detection process (step S1703) in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. In the touch operation detection process, the touch operation state for a predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is detected based on the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, and the symbol display unit 341 A process for sequentially updating the touch operation history for the past three times for a predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) (for example, the cross-hatched portion in FIG. 6C) on the front side of the sensor is executed. In the game machine 10, the touch operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51, so that the front surface of the symbol display unit 341 is set at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub-timer interrupt process. It is determined whether or not the player touches the predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the side.

<Steps S2001-S2003>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S2001, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second touch operation detection flag to the first touch operation detection flag. Further, in step S2002, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third touch operation detection flag to the second touch operation detection flag. After that, in step S2003, the MPU 51 sets (overwrites) the detection result of the presence of the object detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d in the third touch operation detection flag, and the touch operation detection process ends. For example, in the MPU 51, when the presence of an object is detected by all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, the object exists in a specific area (a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341) on the panel 25 (a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341). It is judged that it is touched by the player). On the contrary, when the presence of an object is not detected by one or more of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, the MPU 51 creates an object in a predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. Is not present (the player has not performed a touch operation).

As described above, in the touch operation detection process, by executing the processes of steps S2001 to S2003, the touch operation history for the predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is the latest at 1 msec intervals. The three touch operation states are stored in the RAM 512 as the first touch operation detection flag to the third touch operation detection flag. Specifically, the latest touch operation state is memorized as the third touch operation detection flag, the previous touch operation state is memorized as the second touch operation detection flag, and the previous touch is memorized as the first touch operation detection flag. The operation status is memorized.

[Touch operation detection pattern judgment processing]
Here, FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation detection pattern determination process (step S1704) in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. In the touch operation detection pattern determination process, a predetermined area (panel) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is determined from the touch operation history determined based on the first touch operation detection flag, the second touch operation detection flag, and the third touch operation detection flag. A touch operation pattern flag for determining the touch operation state for the specific area in 25) is set. The touch operation pattern flag consists of the first to third touch operation pattern flags, and a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (specific area on the panel 25) is determined by combining the first to third touch operation pattern flags on and off. Can determine the touch operation status for. For example, as shown in FIG. 22B, when only the first touch operation pattern flag is set to ON, the touch operation for a predetermined area (specific area in the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is set. Can be determined to be continued. Further, when only the second touch operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the touch operation for the predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 has been started. When only the third touch operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the touch operation for the predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 has been completed. When all of the first to third touch operation pattern flags are set to off, it is determined that no touch operation has been performed on a predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. it can.

<Steps S2101 to S2105>
As shown in FIG. 21, in steps S2101 to S2105, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first touch operation detection flag for the previous touch operation detection process is set to ON, and the previous touch operation detection process. It is determined whether or not the second touch operation detection flag for the latest touch operation detection process is set to ON, and whether or not the third touch operation detection flag for the latest touch operation detection process is set to ON.

<Steps S2107 to S2110>
In steps S2107 to S2110, the MPU 51 sets the first to third touch operation pattern flags based on the determination result of whether or not the first to third touch operation detection flags in steps S2101 to S2105 are on. Set on or off.

Specifically, in step S2107, the MPU 51 sets the second touch operation pattern flag on, the first touch operation pattern flag and the third touch operation pattern flag off, and ends the touch operation detection pattern determination process. .. That is, when the MPU 51 has "off", "on", and "on" touch operation patterns as three touch operation states for a predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. Since it can be determined that the non-touch operation state for the predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 has changed to the touch operation state (touch operation has started), the second touch operation pattern flag is set. It is set to on, and the first touch operation pattern flag and the third touch operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 22B).

Further, in step S2108, the MPU 51 sets the first touch operation pattern flag on, the second touch operation pattern flag and the third touch operation pattern flag off, and ends the touch operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the MPU 51 has "on", "on", and "on" touch operation patterns as three operation states for a predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, Since it can be determined that the touch operation state for the predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is continuing, the first touch operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second touch operation pattern flag and the second touch operation pattern flag are set. The third touch operation pattern flag is set to off (see FIG. 22B).

Further, in step S2109, the MPU 51 sets the third touch operation pattern flag on, the first touch operation pattern flag and the second touch operation pattern flag off, and ends the touch operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the MPU 51 has "on", "off", and "off" touch operation patterns as three touch operation states for a predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. Since it can be determined that the touch operation state for the predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 has changed to the non-touch operation state (touch operation has ended), the third touch operation pattern flag is turned on. Set and set the first touch operation pattern flag and the second touch operation pattern flag to off (see FIG. 22B).

Further, in step S2110, the MPU 51 sets the first touch operation pattern flag, the second touch operation pattern flag, and the third touch operation pattern flag to off, and ends the touch operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 generates touch operation patterns other than the above, such as "off", "off", and "off", as three touch operation states for a predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. If this is the case, all of the first to third touch operation pattern flags are set to off (see FIG. 22B). When all of the first to third touch operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that the predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is in a non-touch state.

[Counter update process]
Here, returning to the description of FIG. 17, in the counter update process (step S1705), the MPU 51 updates the effect pattern type counter, the fluctuation display counter, the first to fourth touch operation effect type counters, the specific effect type counter, and the like. Execute. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, clears the counter value to 0. The effect type counter updated here is used to determine the variation type and the effect type based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation display counter. This fluctuation display counter is for measuring the fluctuation display time of the symbol display unit 341, and the counter value in the fluctuation display counter is set to be 0 when the remaining fluctuation display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining fluctuation display time, that the fluctuation is in progress, that the fluctuation display of the symbol display unit 341 is completed, and the like. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the first to fourth touch operation effect type counters, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The first to fourth touch operation effect type counters updated here are touches to a predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 during the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4. It is used to determine the type of touch operation effect performed by the operation. For example, the first touch operation effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 39, the second touch operation effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 59, and the third touch operation effect type. The counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 79, and the fourth touch operation effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the specific effect type counter, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, clears the counter value to 0. The specific effect type counter updated here is the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 during the second to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R2 to R4 during execution of the super reach effect or the special reach effect. Is used to determine a specific effect type to be executed instead of the touch operation effect when is detected. For example, the specific effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process (step S1706), in the command determination process, a command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. Here, FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S1706 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 23, in step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control device 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives the command (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2202. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received the command (step S2201: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process. The command received from the main control device 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not the command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. The command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined to have received the command in step S2201 and is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when it is targeted for processing. For example, it is stored in the processing work storage area. Be remembered.

<Step S2202>
In step S2202, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a variation pattern command. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2203 when it is a variable pattern command (step S2202: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2206 when the received command is not a variable pattern command (step S2202: No).

<Step S2203>
In step S2203, the MPU 51 determines the stop symbol combination of the main symbol and the variation type (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 stores the variation pattern command, the first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 24 (A)) and the variation type table (see FIG. 24 (B)) stored in the ROM 511 in advance, and the RAM 512. Based on the counter value of the effect pattern type counter, the stop symbol combination of the main symbol and the variation type (effect pattern) are determined. Further, when the variation pattern command includes information on the jackpot type, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot flag according to the jackpot type to on. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag on when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot, and sets the 5R probability variable jackpot flag on when the jackpot type is a 5R probability variable jackpot, and sets the jackpot type to on. Set the 16R probability variation jackpot flag to on when is a 16R probability variation jackpot.

The stop symbol combination of the main symbol includes a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol, and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is the main symbol that is first stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341, the second stop symbol is the second main symbol that is stopped and displayed, and the final stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed. It is a design. In the effect pattern type table, the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the normal reach effect (see FIG. 27), the normal reach effect pattern type table (see FIG. 25 (A)), and the final individual effect type in the variable game effect. Super reach effect pattern type table (see FIG. 25 (B)) which is a super reach effect (see FIG. 27), special reach effect pattern type where the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is a special reach effect (see FIG. 27). A table (see FIG. 25C) is included.

Here, FIG. 24A is a diagram showing an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 24A, in the first stop symbol selection table, the main symbol (first stop symbol) to be first stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is defined. In addition, FIG. 24A shows a symbol combination, "777", indicating that the main symbols are "1" to "9" and "333" is a probability variation jackpot (either 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot). Is a symbol combination indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and that the doublet other than "333" and "777" is a symbol combination indicating that it is either a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variation jackpot, or a 16R probability variation jackpot. It is assumed.

When the lottery result of the jackpot lottery by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 is "5R normal jackpot", there is no distribution of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbol, and from the main symbols other than "3" and "7". The first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability. That is, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the symbol combination of "333" or "777" indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

Further, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", "7" is not sorted as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined from the main symbols other than "7" with a predetermined probability. That is, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the symbol combination of "777" indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot is not stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", doublet symbol combinations other than the symbol combination of "333" indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot may be stopped and displayed. That is, even when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the doublet symbol combination other than the symbol combination of "333" whose stop display result of the main symbol suggests a 5R normal jackpot can be stopped and displayed. Then, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" and a main symbol other than "3" excluding "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, in the jackpot game that shifts after the end of the variable game. A promotion effect is executed to clearly indicate that the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot".

Furthermore, if the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", there is a distribution for all the main symbols "1" to "9", and the first stop is made with a predetermined probability from the main symbols "1" to "9". The design is decided. That is, even when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", doublet symbol combinations other than the symbol combination of "777" indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be stopped and displayed. That is, even when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", the doublet symbol combination other than the symbol combination of "777" which indicates the 5R probability variation jackpot or the 5R normal jackpot is stopped and displayed. Can be. Then, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot" and a main symbol other than "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the lottery result is "16R" in the jackpot game that shifts after the end of the variable game. A promotion effect that clearly indicates that it is a "probability change jackpot" is executed.

Then, when the first stop symbol is determined when the lottery result is a big hit, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same symbols as the previously determined first stop symbol. As a result, the stop symbol combination that is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the symbol display unit 341 is determined in the variable game.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is "missing", there is a distribution for all the main symbols "1" to "9", and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols "1" to "9". Will be done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is "out of place", the information regarding the out-of-order type selected based on the out-of-order type table (see FIG. 9 (D)) and the previously determined out-of-order symbol. The second stop symbol is determined based on the first stop symbol. For example, when the out-of-order type is front-rear out-of-reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. Further, when the detachment type is reach other than the front-rear deviation, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the symbols before and after the first stop symbol and the first stop symbol. It is decided by the design. When the deviation type is completely out, the second stop symbol is determined to be a symbol different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. The stop symbol combination of the main symbol may be determined by the display control device 6, only the first stop symbol is determined by the voice lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined by the display control device 6. You may decide.

Further, FIG. 24B is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table. As shown in FIG. 24 (B), in the variation type table, the contents of the variation display time and the variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern command are defined. For example, the variation pattern command "A01" in which the lottery result is "normal jackpot" and the variation pattern is "01" is associated with the variation display time "30s" and the variation type "normal reach effect pattern". Further, the fluctuation pattern command "B02" whose lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" and whose variation pattern is "02" is associated with the variation display time "60s" and the variation type "super reach effect pattern". , The fluctuation pattern command "C03" whose lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot" and whose variation pattern is "03" is associated with the variation display time "90s" and the variation type "special reach effect pattern". Further, the fluctuation pattern command "D04" in which the lottery result is "off" and the fluctuation pattern is "04" is associated with the fluctuation display time "7s" and the fluctuation type "non-reach effect pattern", and the lottery is performed. The variation pattern command "D05" whose result is "off" and the variation pattern is "05" is associated with the variation display time "10s" and the variation type "non-reach effect pattern".

Further, FIGS. 25 (A) to 25 (C) are diagrams showing an example of the effect pattern type table. The effect pattern type table is set for each variation type (effect pattern). Specifically, FIG. 25 (A) is a normal reach effect pattern type table referred to when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is a normal reach effect (see FIG. 27), and FIG. 25 (B) is a variable game. The super reach effect pattern table is referred to when the final individual effect type in the effect is the super reach effect (see FIG. 27), and FIG. 25 (C) shows the special reach effect as the final individual effect type in the variable game effect. (See FIG. 27), which is a special reach effect pattern table referred to in the case of (see FIG. 27).

In the present embodiment, the case where there are five types of effects corresponding to each of the variable types will be described as an example, but the types of effects may be six or more. Further, in FIG. 25, the effect type table when the variation type is no reach is omitted.

In the normal reach effect pattern type table shown in FIG. 25 (A), the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is set according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and deviation). "Production pattern X1" to "Production pattern X5" are defined. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the normal reach effect pattern, the MPU 51 selects the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter from the normal reach effect pattern type table according to the lottery result. To do. Here, the effect patterns X1 to the effect pattern X3 included in the normal reach effect pattern type table are, for example, an effect in which the normal reach effect in which the main symbol is in the reach state is executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect in which the main symbol fluctuates at high speed. The final individual production type is a normal reach production (see FIG. 27).

Further, in the super reach effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25B, "effect pattern Y1" to "effect pattern Y5" are defined as the effect pattern types corresponding to the counter values of the effect pattern type counters according to the lottery result. There is. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the super reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected from the super reach effect pattern table according to the lottery result. select. Here, in the effect patterns Y1 to Y3 included in the super reach effect pattern table, for example, the normal reach effect is executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect, and the final individual effect type has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect. This is a production that develops into a super reach production that has a longer production execution time than the normal reach production (see FIG. 27). The super reach effect pattern table may include a super reach effect pattern effect that develops into a super reach effect after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect without going through the normal reach effect.

Further, in the special reach effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25 (C), "effect pattern Z1" to "effect pattern Z5" are defined as the effect pattern types corresponding to the counter values of the effect pattern type counters according to the lottery result. There is. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the special reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected from the special reach effect pattern table according to the lottery result. select. Here, for the effect patterns Z1 to Z3 included in the special reach effect pattern table, for example, the normal reach effect and the super reach effect are executed after the high-speed fluctuation effect is completed, and the normal reach effect and the super reach effect are further executed as the final individual effect types. This is a production that develops into a special reach production that has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach production and has a longer production execution time than the normal reach production (see FIG. 27). The special reach effect pattern table may include a special reach effect pattern that develops into a special reach effect after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect or the normal reach effect, without going through at least one of the normal reach effect and the super reach effect. Good.

Then, the MPU 51 transmits the variation pattern command, the variation type table, the effect type table, the stop symbol combination of the main symbol determined based on the effect type counter, and the display variation pattern command indicating the variation type (effect pattern type) to the RAM 512. Set.

<Step S2204>
Returning to the description of FIG. 23, in step S2204, the MPU 51 executes the movable accessory member operation timing determination process for determining the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 (execution period of the movable accessory member operation effect). In the movable accessory member operation timing determination process, the movable accessory member 39 at each of the plurality of operation timings is based on the movable accessory member operation timing selection table selected according to the effect pattern type determined in step S2203. Whether or not to operate (whether or not to execute the movable accessory member operation effect) is determined.

Here, FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of a movable accessory member operation effect. The movable accessory member operation effect is executed as a chance-up effect that suggests the expectation that the lottery result in the big hit lottery will be a big hit, or a final effect (one-shot notification effect) that clearly indicates that the lottery result is a big hit. To. The movable accessory member operation effect is the symbol display shown in FIG. 26 (B) from a standby position in which the movable accessory member 39 does not hinder the visual recognition of the image effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 shown in FIG. 26 (A). This is an effect of moving to the operating position in front of the central portion of the portion 341 and then returning to the standby position shown in FIG. 26 (A).

In the movable accessory member operation effect, the movable accessory member 39 is stopped for a certain period of time at the operation position shown in FIG. 26 (B). At this time, in the movable accessory member 39, the plurality of lamps 391 provided in an annular shape on the peripheral edge indicate the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the big hit lottery will be a big hit, or the lottery result is a big hit. Is specified. For example, the lighting colors of the plurality of lamps 391 indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit with respect to the lottery result in the big hit lottery. Specifically, the lighting colors of the plurality of lamps 391 are set so that the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of white, yellow, green, and red, and the movable accessory member 39 is shown in the movable accessory member operation effect. While stopped at the standby position shown in 26 (B), the plurality of lamps 391 are lit with the lighting color of the jackpot expectation degree determined according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Further, by setting the lighting mode of the plurality of lamps 391 to include all of white, yellow, green and red, it may be clearly shown that the lottery result is a big hit, and the lighting pattern and lighting may be performed. By appropriately setting the color, it may be made clear that the lottery result is a big hit by executing the rainbow lamp effect.

Of course, regardless of the lighting color of the plurality of lamps 391, the jackpot expectation may be indicated by the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the plurality of lamps 391, or it may be clearly indicated that the jackpot is a jackpot. Further, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position shown in FIG. 26 (B), the symbol display unit 341 may execute an effect effect for generating an effect around the movable accessory member 39. In the effect effect in this case, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit by the color and size of the effect, or to clearly indicate that it is a big hit.

Further, in executing the movable accessory member operation effect, it is also conceivable to execute the chance effect suggesting the jackpot expectation degree by using the symbol display unit 341. For example, as shown in FIG. 26C, before moving the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operating position, the four lamps 391 arranged in the portion exposed from the opening 31A in the movable accessory member 39. Correspondingly, it is conceivable that an effect of displaying an image suggesting a jackpot expectation degree and future effect development on the symbol display unit 341 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. In FIG. 26 (C), "?", "Chance" (suggestion of jackpot expectation), "reach" (suggestion of production development) and "super heat" (suggestion of jackpot expectation) are displayed in order from the left side on the symbol display unit 341. Character image is displayed. Then, in the movable accessory unit 39, a roulette effect is executed in which one lamp 391 is turned on after the four lamps 391 are blinked. In FIG. 26C, the lamp 391 corresponding to the "chance" is lit to show the state.

Further, when the roulette effect shown in FIG. 26C is executed, the movable accessory member 39 is moved to the operating position, so that the plurality of lamps 391 of the movable accessory member 39 are used to determine the jackpot expectation. It is also conceivable to execute a production that suggests or a definite production that clearly indicates that it is a big hit. For example, as shown in FIG. 26 (D), the jackpot expectation is suggested according to the number of lamps 391 lit (the larger the number of lamps lit, the higher the jackpot expectation), and all the lamps 391 are lit. In that case, it is possible to make a big hit confirmation production. Hereinafter, a production that clearly indicates that the lottery result is a big hit by the movable character production may be referred to as a "one-shot notification production".

When the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position and an effect suggesting a jackpot expectation is executed by the number of lamps 391 lit (excluding the one-shot notification effect), the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position. When returning, development effects such as super reach effect and special reach effect may be executed. In this case, the number of lamps 391 lit when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position and the jackpot expectation degree suggested by the development effect (for example, the jackpot expectation degree of the development effect displayed at the start of execution of the development effect) It may be linked with the number of stars shown). That is, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position, it is conceivable to suggest the jackpot expectation degree of the development effect to be executed later depending on the number of lamps 391 lit. For example, when the jackpot expectation of the development effect is suggested by the number of stars (for example, the number of stars is 1 to 5) and the development effect of three stars is executed as the development effect, the movable accessory member 39 operates. It is conceivable that the number of lamps 391 lit when they are in the position is three.

Further, when the one-shot notification effect is executed, the central portion of the movable accessory member 39 may be turned on to emphasize that the effect is a definite effect. Then, when the one-shot notification effect is executed, the fluctuation of the main symbol may be stopped by doublet when the movable accessory member 39 returns to the standby position, or the fluctuation of the main symbol is continued. After that, the main symbol may be stopped by doublet. It should be noted that whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol is stopped when the movable accessory member 39 returns after the one-shot notification effect is executed is determined by the relationship between the determined effect pattern and the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39. Will be done.

Further, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position, it is conceivable to execute an effect of displaying an image for generating an effect around the movable accessory member 39 on the symbol display unit 341. In this case, it is conceivable to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by the color and size of the effect, or to clearly indicate that it is a big hit. For example, it can be clearly shown that it is a big hit by generating a rainbow-colored effect around the movable accessory member 39. The "one-shot notification effect" also includes an effect of generating a rainbow-colored effect around the movable accessory member 39 to clearly indicate that it is a big hit. That is, the "one-shot notification effect" is an effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result is a big hit with the operation of the movable accessory member 39, and this "one-shot notification effect" includes the movable accessory member 39. The case where the jackpot confirmation effect is executed by the effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 in conjunction with the operation is also included.

Here, FIG. 27 is a timing chart showing an operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 and an example of the touch operation acceptance period for the touch operation effect together with the effect pattern. First, the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 will be described with reference to FIG. 27. The touch operation acceptance period for the touch operation effect will be referred to when the touch operation effect determination process in step S2205, which will be described later, will be described. Further, in FIG. 27, it means that the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 defined after the end of the final individual effect in each effect pattern is not set in the effect pattern. For example, in FIG. 27, it means that the operation timing G2 is not set in the non-reach effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 27, in the present embodiment, six operation timings G1 to G6 are fixedly defined as timings at which the movable accessory member 39 can operate. The operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 does not have to be fixedly defined in all the effect patterns. For example, the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 may be individually defined for each effect pattern type.

The operation timing G1 is started immediately after the start of the high-speed fluctuation effect (immediately after the start of the change of the main symbol), and ends at the beginning of the high-speed fluctuation effect. That is, the operation timing G1 can be set for the non-reach effect pattern, the normal reach effect pattern, the super reach effect pattern, and the special reach effect pattern.

The operation timing G2 starts immediately after the start of the normal reach effect and ends at the beginning of the normal reach effect. That is, the operation timing G2 can be set for the normal reach effect pattern, the super reach effect pattern, and the special reach effect pattern.

The operation timing G3 starts immediately after the start of the super reach effect and ends at the beginning of the super reach effect. The operation timing G4 is set in the middle of the super reach effect. That is, the operation timings G3 and G4 can be set for the super reach effect pattern and the special reach effect pattern.

The operation timing G5 starts immediately after the start of the special reach effect and ends at the beginning of the special reach effect. The operation timing G6 is set at the end of the special reach production. That is, the operation timings G5 and G6 can be set for the special reach effect pattern.

In other words, the number of operation timings set for each effect pattern type differs depending on the effect pattern type. Specifically, when the effect pattern is a non-reach effect pattern, the operation timing G1 is set in the early stage immediately after the start of the high-speed fluctuation effect. The non-reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which only a high-speed fluctuation effect in which the main symbol fluctuates at high speed immediately after the start of fluctuation is executed.

When the effect pattern is a normal reach effect pattern, the operation timing G2 is set in the early stage immediately after the start of the normal reach effect in addition to the operation timing G1. The normal reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which a normal reach effect that does not develop into a super reach effect or a special reach effect is executed as the final individual effect after the high-speed fluctuation effect is completed.

When the effect pattern is a super reach effect pattern, in addition to the operation timings G1 and G2, the operation timing G3 in the early stage immediately after the start of the super reach effect and the operation timing G4 in the middle stage of the super reach effect are set. ing. The super reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the super reach effect is executed as the final individual effect after the high-speed fluctuation effect and the normal reach effect are completed.

When the effect pattern is a special reach effect pattern, in addition to the operation timings G1 to G4, the operation timing G5 in the early stage immediately after the start of the special reach effect and the operation timing G6 in the final stage of the super reach effect are set. ing. The special reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the special reach effect is executed as the final individual effect after the high-speed fluctuation effect, the normal reach effect, and the super reach effect are completed.

Here, FIGS. 28 to 30 are diagrams showing an example of the movable accessory member operation timing selection tables A to C, and the movable accessory member operation timing selection table A shown in FIG. 28 has an effect pattern type of normal reach effect. In some cases, it is referred to when determining the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39, and the movable accessory member operation timing selection table B shown in FIG. 29 shows the movable accessory member 39 when the effect pattern type is the super reach effect. It is referred to when determining the operation timing, and the movable accessory member operation timing selection table C shown in FIG. 30 is referred to when determining the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 when the effect pattern type is a special reach effect. To.

In FIGS. 28 to 30, "◎" indicates that the movable accessory member 39 is operated as a jackpot confirmation effect (one-shot notification effect), and "○" indicates that the movable accessory member 39 is movable as a chance-up effect (big hit expectation suggestion effect). The accessory member 39 is activated, "x" means that the movable accessory member 39 is not activated, and "-" means that the corresponding operation timing does not exist. Further, in FIGS. 28 to 30, the case where the effect pattern is a non-reach effect pattern is omitted, but it may be appropriately set whether to execute the movable accessory member operation effect.

As shown in FIG. 28, the movable accessory member operation timing selection table A referred to when the effect pattern type is the normal reach effect is for each effect pattern type (effect patterns X1 to X5) of the normal reach effect patterns. Whether or not to operate the movable accessory member 39 at each of the operation timings G1 and G2 of the movable accessory member 39 (whether or not to execute the movable accessory member operation effect) depends on the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. It is stipulated.

For example, when the effect pattern type is the effect pattern X1 and the lottery result is a 5R probability variation jackpot, the movable accessory member 39 is operated at the operation timing G1 and the movable accessory member 39 is not operated at the operation timing G2. That is, when the effect pattern X1 is selected when the lottery result is a 5R probability variation jackpot, the movable accessory member operation effect is executed as a chance-up effect only immediately after the start of the high-speed fluctuation effect in the normal reach effect pattern.

Further, when the effect pattern type is the effect pattern X3 and the lottery result is out of order, the movable accessory member 39 is not operated at either the operation timing G1 or the operation timing G2. That is, when the effect pattern X3 is selected when the lottery result is out of order, the movable accessory member operation effect is not executed at all in the normal reach effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 29, the movable accessory member operation timing selection table B referred to when the effect pattern type is the super reach effect is for each effect pattern type (effect patterns Y1 to Y5) among the super reach effect patterns. In addition, whether or not to operate the movable accessory member 39 at each of the operation timings G1 to G4 of the movable accessory member 39 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery (whether or not to execute the movable accessory member operation effect). ) Is specified.

For example, when the effect pattern type is the effect pattern Y1 and the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, the movable accessory member 39 is operated only at the operation timing G3 among the operation timings G1 to G4, and the remaining operation timings. In G1, G2 and G4, the movable accessory member 39 is not operated. That is, when the effect pattern Y1 is selected when the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, the movable accessory member operation effect is executed as a chance-up effect only immediately after the start of the super reach effect in the super reach effect pattern.

Further, when the effect pattern type is the effect pattern Y3 and the lottery result is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the movable accessory member 39 is operated at the operation timings G2 and G3 of the operation timings G1 to G4, and the remaining operations are performed. At the timings G1 and G4, the movable accessory member 39 is not operated. That is, when the effect pattern Y3 is selected when the lottery result is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the movable accessory member operation effect is performed as a chance-up effect immediately after the start of the normal reach effect in the normal reach effect pattern and immediately after the start of the super reach effect. Will be executed.

Further, when the effect pattern type is the effect pattern Y5 and the lottery result is out of order, the movable accessory member 39 is operated only by the operation timing G1 of the operation timings G1 to G4, and the remaining operation timings G2 and 2 In G4, the movable accessory member 39 is not operated. That is, when the effect pattern Y5 is selected when the lottery result is out of order, the movable accessory member operation effect is executed as a chance-up effect only immediately after the start of the high-speed fluctuation effect in the special reach effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 30, the movable accessory member operation timing selection table C referred to when the effect pattern type is the special reach effect pattern is the effect pattern type (effect patterns Z1 to Z5) of the special reach effect patterns. Whether or not to operate the movable accessory member 39 at each of the operation timings G1 to G6 of the movable accessory member 39 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery (whether or not to execute the movable accessory member operation effect). Or) is stipulated.

For example, when the effect pattern type is the effect pattern Z1 and the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, the movable accessory member 39 is operated only at the operation timing G3 of the operation timings G1 to G6, and the remaining operation timings. In G1, G2, G4 to G6, the movable accessory member 39 is not operated. That is, when the effect pattern Z1 is selected when the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, the movable accessory member operation effect is executed as a chance-up effect only immediately after the start of the super reach effect in the special reach effect pattern.

Further, when the effect pattern type is the effect pattern Z3 and the lottery result is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the movable accessory member 39 is operated at the operation timings G5 and G6 of the operation timings G1 to G6, and the remaining operations are performed. At timings G1 to G4, the movable accessory member 39 is not operated. That is, when the effect pattern Z3 is selected when the lottery result is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the movable accessory member is used as a jackpot confirmation effect (one-shot notification effect) immediately after the start and the end of the special reach effect in the special reach effect pattern. The operation effect is executed.

Further, when the effect pattern type is the effect pattern Z4 and the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, the movable accessory member 39 is operated at the operation timings G2, G3, and G6 of the operation timings G1 to G6, and the rest. At the operation timings G1, G4, and G5 of, the movable accessory member 39 is not operated. That is, when the effect pattern Z4 is selected when the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, the movable accessory member operation effect is executed as a chance-up effect immediately after the start of the normal reach effect in the special reach effect pattern and immediately after the start of the supermarket. Then, at the end of the special reach production, a movable accessory member operation production is executed as a big hit confirmation production (one-shot notification production).

Then, the MPU 51 has a movable combination at each operation timing based on the effect pattern determined in step S2203 and the movable accessory member operation timing selection tables A to C selected according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Whether or not the object member 39 is operated (whether or not the movable accessory member operation effect is executed) is determined. The operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 determined in this way is stored in the RAM 512, and the movable accessory member operation effect is executed during the execution of the variable game effect based on the operation timing stored in the RAM 512.

<Step S2205>
Returning to the description of FIG. 23, in step S2205, the MPU 51 executes the touch operation effect determination process. In the touch operation effect determination process, the acceptance period and contents of the touch operation effect are determined. The details of the touch operation effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 31. Further, the touch operation effect may be determined at the stage when it is determined that the touch operation effect is executed by performing the touch operation within the touch operation acceptance period. In this case, the touch operation effect determination process in the command determination process is omitted, and the touch operation acceptance period may be determined instead of determining the touch operation effect in step S2205.

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 51 sets the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command in the variation display counter. The fluctuation display time is determined according to the fluctuation pattern information included in the fluctuation pattern command. Then, the fluctuation display counter is decremented one by one in the counter update processing of step S1705 in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 17, and the MPU 51 is based on the fluctuation display counter and displays whether or not the symbol fluctuation is being displayed. It is possible to determine the remaining time of the time. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display has ended when the counter value of the variation display counter becomes 0.

<Step S2207>
In step S2207, the MPU 51 displays and controls a display variation pattern command for specifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbol in the symbol display unit 341 and the content of the variation game effect including the variation type (effect pattern) and the touch operation effect. It is transmitted to No. 6 to end the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbol and the content of the variation game effect determined in step S2203. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores a variation image and an effect image of the main symbol corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the variation display and the effect display according to the stop symbol combination of the main symbol corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type, and the variation game effect. Other effect means such as the movable accessory member 39 are made to execute the movable accessory member operation effect, the voice output effect, and the lamp effect.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes the variation display of a plurality of main symbols (three in the present embodiment) until the preset variation display time elapses. Then, the fluctuations of a plurality of main symbols are stopped and displayed in order. Then, when all the main symbols are stopped and displayed and the result of the jackpot lottery is displayed, the symbol variation display of the next variable game or the process corresponding to the jackpot game is executed. Here, during the variation display of the main symbol, the game effect specified by the display variation pattern command is executed.

<Step S2208>
In step S2208, the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process after executing the process based on the other commands received from the main control device 4.

[Touch operation effect determination process]
Here, FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect determination process executed in step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 26. In the touch operation effect determination process, a plurality of touch operations are performed based on the effect pattern determined in step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. 23, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and the value of the touch operation effect type lottery counter. Touch operation for each reception timing The touch operation effect when a touch operation is performed during the reception period is determined.

By the way, in the game machine 10 in which the movable accessory member operation effect and the touch operation effect are executed, it is erroneous that the touch operation is performed by the player by operating the movable accessory member 39 within the touch operation acceptance period. May be detected. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process (step S2202: Yes in FIG. 23), a touch operation is performed after the operation timing determination process (step S2204 in FIG. 23) of the movable accessory member 39. The effect determination process is executed (step S2205 in FIG. 23). Therefore, in order to avoid erroneous detection due to the operation of the movable accessory member 39, the reception period for executing the touch operation effect while avoiding the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 determined in step S2202 of FIG. 23 is set. It is also possible to decide. However, determining the touch operation acceptance period while avoiding the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 determined earlier complicates the control process and is restricted to the touch operation acceptance period (execution period of the touch operation effect). Occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the touch operation effect is determined without considering the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 which is determined in advance.

Here, FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of a touch operation effect. Specifically, FIG. 32 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the touch operation reception effect A in which the touch operation reception effect clearly indicating that the touch operation reception period is in progress is not executed, and FIG. 32 (B) is a diagram showing an example of the touch operation effect A. It is a figure which shows an example of the touch operation effect B in which an operation reception effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 32 (A) (FIGS. 32 (A1) to (A3)), the touch operation effect A in which the touch operation reception effect is not executed is a so-called back button effect, and is internally touched by the game machine 10. When a touch operation is performed on a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 during the operation acceptance period, for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 for a certain period of time. is there. The touch operation effect A may be an effect that suggests or clearly indicates the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, or may be an effect in which a predetermined image is displayed regardless of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Further, the touch operation effect A may be repeatedly executed when a plurality of touch operations are performed during the touch operation acceptance period, or is executed only for the first touch operation and is executed for the second time. It may not be executed by the subsequent touch operation.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32 (B1), the touch operation reception effect B is executed to clearly indicate that the touch operation reception period is in progress. In the present embodiment, as a touch operation reception effect, a touch operation reception image (characters "touch the screen") indicating that the touch operation reception period is in effect is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Further, in the touch operation effect B, when a touch operation is performed on a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 while the touch operation reception image is displayed (touch operation reception period). For example, it is an effect that a predetermined image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 for a certain period of time. The touch operation effect B may be an effect that suggests or clearly indicates the lottery result in the big hit lottery, or may be an effect in which a predetermined image is displayed regardless of the lottery result in the big hit lottery. It is preferable that the effect is to suggest or clearly indicate the lottery result in the lottery. Further, the touch operation effect B may be repeatedly executed when a plurality of touch operations are performed during the touch operation acceptance period, or is executed only for the first touch operation and is executed for the second time. It may not be executed by the subsequent touch operations, but it is preferably executed only for the first touch operation.

When the touch operation effect A or the touch operation effect B is executed as an effect that suggests or clearly indicates the lottery result in the jackpot lottery (an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of the jackpot), for example, a predetermined area (panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. The degree of expectation is suggested by the type of image displayed when a touch operation is performed on (a specific area of), and it is clearly shown that it is a big hit. The touch operation effect may be executed as an audio output effect by the speaker 26 or a lamp effect by the illumination unit 27, and the touch operation may be performed by combining two or more of the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, and the illumination unit 27. You may perform the production. Further, when the touch operation effect is executed in the sound output effect by the speaker 26 or the lamp effect by the illumination unit 27, these effects may be executed as an effect suggesting a jackpot expectation degree.

Here, FIG. 27 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation timing and the touch operation acceptance period of the movable accessory member 39 together with the effect pattern as described above, and the touch operation acceptance period will be described with reference to FIG. 27. .. As shown in FIG. 27, in the present embodiment, the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 are fixedly defined. It should be noted that the touch operation acceptance period does not have to be fixedly specified for all the effect patterns, and for example, the touch operation acceptance period may be individually specified for each effect pattern type.

Further, in FIG. 27, in the effect pattern in which the final individual effect ends in the middle of the first touch operation acceptance period R1 or the second touch operation acceptance period R2, the first touch operation acceptance period R1 or the second touch operation acceptance period R2 Means that is not set. For example, in the non-reach effect pattern of FIG. 27, it is described that the high-speed fluctuation effect, which is the final individual effect, ends in the middle of the first touch operation acceptance period R1, and the first touch operation acceptance period R1 is set. It means that it is not set. Similarly, in the normal reach effect pattern of FIG. 27, it is described that the normal reach effect, which is the final individual effect, ends in the middle of the second touch operation acceptance period R2, and the second touch operation acceptance period R2 is set. It means that it has not been done. Of course, in FIG. 27, it means that the touch operation acceptance period defined after the end of the final individual effect in each effect pattern is not set in the effect pattern.

The first touch operation acceptance period R1 and the second touch operation acceptance period R2 are periods for accepting touch operations for the touch operation effect A (see 32 (A)), and are from the third and fourth touch operation acceptance periods R3 and R4. Is also long and is set for a relatively long time. The first touch operation acceptance period R1 is a period that continues from immediately after the start of the high-speed fluctuation effect to the middle stage of the normal reach effect. The first touch operation acceptance period R1 is set for the normal reach effect pattern (X1 to X3), the super reach effect pattern (Y1 to Y3), and the special reach effect pattern (Z1 to Z3). Further, in the first touch operation acceptance period R1, the operation timings G1 and G2 of the movable accessory member 39 are set. On the other hand, the second touch operation reception period R2 is a period that is continuous with the first touch operation reception period R1 and continues from the middle stage of the normal reach production to the early stage of the super reach production. The second touch operation acceptance period R2 is set for the super reach effect pattern (Y1 to Y3) and the special reach effect pattern (Z1 to Z3). In the second touch operation acceptance period R2, the operation timing G3 of the movable accessory member 39 is set. The second touch operation reception period R2 does not have to be continuous with the first touch operation reception period R1, and may be separated from the first touch operation reception period R1.

The third touch operation acceptance period R3 and the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 are periods for accepting touch operations for the touch operation effect B (see 32 (B)). The third touch operation acceptance period R3 is set in the middle of the super reach effect, and is set for the super reach effect pattern (Y1 to Y3) and the special reach effect pattern (Z1 to Z3). The third touch operation acceptance period R3 partially overlaps with the operation timing G4 of the movable accessory member 39. Specifically, the third touch operation acceptance period R3 starts at the operation timing G4 and ends after a certain time after the end of the operation timing G4. On the other hand, the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 is set immediately after the start of the special reach effect, and is set for the special reach effect patterns (Z1 to Z3). The fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 overlaps with a part of the operation timing G5 of the movable accessory member 39. Specifically, the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 starts at the same time as the operation timing G5 and ends in the middle of the operation timing G5.

Here, FIGS. 33 and 34 are diagrams showing an example of the touch operation effect selection table. The touch operation effect selection table is for selecting a touch operation effect to be executed when a touch operation is performed during the touch operation acceptance period, and is referred to in the touch operation effect determination process of FIG. 31. In addition, in FIGS. 33 and 34, the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation of a big hit) that the lottery result in the big hit lottery will be a big hit is shown at the same time for the touch operation effect.

FIG. 33 (A) shows a touch operation executed when a touch operation is performed during the first touch operation reception period R1 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect A (see FIG. 32 (A)). It is a figure which shows an example of the touch operation effect selection table A1 for determining an effect. In the touch operation effect selection table A, "touch" is set as the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and deviation). "Operation effect A1-1" to "Touch operation effect A1-4" and "No touch operation effect" are set.

"Touch operation effect A1-1" has a jackpot expectation of "extremely low", "touch operation effect A1-2" has a jackpot expectation of "low", and "touch operation effect A1-3" has a jackpot expectation. The degree is "medium", and the jackpot expectation degree of "touch operation effect A1-4" is "high". In "No touch operation effect", the touch operation effect is not executed even if the touch operation is performed during the first touch operation acceptance period R1. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that it is necessary to determine the touch operation effect in the first touch operation acceptance period R1, the lottery result selects the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter. Select according to.

Specifically, when the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot or a miss, and the effect pattern X1 to X3, Y1 to Y3, Z1 to Z3 is selected as the effect pattern type, the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter. If is 0 to 19, it is determined not to execute the touch operation effect, and if the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is 20 to 29, the jackpot expectation is "extremely low". If 1 is determined and the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is 30 to 39, the touch operation effect A1-2 with a “low” jackpot expectation is determined.

Further, when the lottery result is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot and the effect pattern X1 to X3, Y1 to Y3, Z1 to Z3 is selected as the effect pattern type, the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is set. If it is 0 to 19, it is decided not to execute the touch operation effect, and if the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is 20 to 29, the jackpot expectation is "extremely low". Is determined, and if the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is 30 to 37, the touch operation effect A1-2 with a “low” jackpot expectation is determined, and the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is determined. If is 38, the touch operation effect A1-3 with a jackpot expectation of "medium" is determined, and if the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is 39, the touch operation with a jackpot expectation of "high" is determined. Direction A1-4 is decided.

That is, in the first touch operation acceptance period R1, regardless of the lottery result, basically no touch operation or a touch operation effect with a low jackpot expectation is determined, which is "extremely low" or "low". , When the lottery result is a probabilistic jackpot, the touch operation effect with a jackpot expectation of "medium" or "high" is determined with a low probability. In other words, when the touch operation is performed during the first touch operation acceptance period R1 of the high-speed fluctuation effect, the touch operation as the back button effect is performed except when the lottery result is selected with a low probability when it is a big hit. As a production, it is difficult to execute a touch operation production with a high expectation of a big hit. Therefore, in the first touch operation acceptance period R1 in the high-speed fluctuation effect, it is difficult to determine the lottery result by the touch operation.

FIG. 33 (B) shows a touch operation executed when a touch operation is performed during the second touch operation reception period R2 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect A (see FIG. 32 (A)). It is a figure which shows an example of the touch operation effect selection table A2 for determining an effect. In the touch operation effect selection table A2, "touch" is set as the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and deviation). "Operation effect A2-1" to "Touch operation effect A2-4" and "No touch operation effect" are set.

"Touch operation effect A2-1" has a jackpot expectation of "low", "touch operation effect A2-2" has a jackpot expectation of "medium", and "touch operation effect A3-3" has a jackpot expectation. Is "high", and "touch operation effect A2-4" is "big hit confirmed". In "No touch operation effect", the touch operation effect is not executed even if the touch operation is performed during the second touch operation acceptance period R2. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that it is necessary to determine the touch operation effect in the second touch operation acceptance period R2, the lottery result selects the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter. Select according to.

Specifically, when the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot or a miss, and the effect patterns Y1 to Y3 and Z1 to Z3 are selected as the effect pattern type, the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 0 to 29. If so, it is determined not to execute the touch operation effect, and if the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 30 to 49, the touch operation effect A2-1 having a jackpot expectation of "low" is determined. If the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 50 to 59, the touch operation effect A2-2 having a jackpot expectation of "medium" is determined.

When the effect pattern Y1 to Y3 and Z1 to Z3 are selected as the effect pattern type when the lottery result is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 0 to 19. If there is, it is decided not to execute the touch operation effect, and if the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 20 to 39, the touch operation effect A2-1 having a jackpot expectation of "low" is determined, and the second touch operation effect is determined. If the counter value of the 2-touch operation effect type counter is 40 to 54, the touch operation effect A2-2 whose jackpot expectation is "medium" is determined, and the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 55 to 57. If there is, the touch operation effect A2-3 with a jackpot expectation of "high" is determined, and if the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 58,59, the touch operation effect A2-4 is "big hit confirmed". Is determined.

That is, in the second touch operation acceptance period R2, regardless of the lottery result, there is basically no touch operation, or a touch operation effect with a relatively low jackpot expectation is "low" or "medium". When the lottery result is determined and the lottery result is a probabilistic jackpot, the touch operation effect of "high" or "big hit confirmed" is determined with a low probability. In other words, if the touch operation is performed during the second touch operation acceptance period R2 of the normal reach effect and the super reach effect, the back button effect is produced unless the lottery result is selected with a low probability of being a big hit. As a touch operation effect, it is difficult to execute a touch operation effect with a high probability of a big hit including a big hit confirmation. Therefore, even in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 of the normal reach effect and the super reach effect, it is difficult to determine the lottery result by the touch operation except when the touch operation effect of confirming the jackpot is executed.

FIG. 34 (A) shows a touch operation executed when a touch operation is performed during the third touch operation reception period R3 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect B (see FIG. 32 (B)). It is a figure which shows an example of the touch operation effect selection table B1 for determining an effect. In the touch operation effect selection table B1, "touch" is set as the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and deviation). Operation effect B1-1 "to" touch operation effect B1-5 "are set. In the touch operation effect selection table B1, "no touch operation effect" is not set, and by performing the touch operation in the third touch operation reception period R3, "touch operation effect B1-1" to "touch" are always performed. Any one of the touch operation effects of "operation effect B1-5" is executed.

"Touch operation effect B1-1" has a jackpot expectation of "low", "touch operation effect B1-2" has a jackpot expectation of "medium", and "touch operation effect B1-3" has a jackpot expectation. Is "high", "touch operation effect B1-4" has a jackpot expectation of "extremely high", and "touch operation effect B1-5" is "big hit confirmed". Then, when the MPU 51 determines that it is necessary to determine the touch operation effect in the third touch operation acceptance period R3, the lottery result selects the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter. Select according to.

Specifically, when the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot or a miss, and the effect patterns Y1 to Y3 and Z1 to Z3 are selected as the effect pattern type, the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 0 to 39. If so, the touch operation effect B1-1 with a jackpot expectation of "low" is determined, and if the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 40 to 69, the touch operation with a jackpot expectation of "medium" is determined. If the effect B1-2 is determined and the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 70 to 79, the touch operation effect B1-3 with a high hit expectation is determined.

When the effect pattern Y1 to Y3 and Z1 to Z3 are selected as the effect pattern type when the lottery result is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 0 to 19. If there is, the touch operation effect B1-1 with a jackpot expectation of "low" is determined, and if the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 20 to 39, the touch operation effect with a jackpot expectation of "medium" is determined. If B1-2 is determined and the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 40 to 69, the touch operation effect B1-3 with a high hit expectation is determined, and the third touch operation effect type counter is determined. If the counter value of is 70 to 77, the touch operation effect B1-4 whose jackpot expectation is "extremely high" is determined, and if the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 78,79, the jackpot is confirmed. The touch operation effect B1-5 is determined.

That is, in the third touch operation acceptance period R3, it is relatively easy to select a touch operation effect having a jackpot expectation of "high" or higher, and especially when the lottery result is a probabilistic jackpot, the jackpot expectation is "high". The above touch operation effect is easy to select. In other words, when a touch operation is performed during the third touch operation acceptance period R3 of the super reach effect, the touch operation effect with a jackpot expectation of "high" or higher is relatively easy to be executed, and the lottery result is particularly probable. In the case of a big hit, it is easy to execute a touch operation effect in which the big hit expectation is “high” or higher. Therefore, in the third touch operation reception period R3 of the super reach effect, the lottery result can be easily predicted by the touch operation as compared with the first touch operation reception period R1 and the second touch operation reception period R2 for the touch operation effect A.

FIG. 34 (B) shows a touch operation executed when a touch operation is performed during the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect B (see FIG. 32 (B)). It is a figure which shows an example of the touch operation effect selection table B2 for determining an effect. In the touch operation effect selection table B2, "touch" is set as the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and deviation). "Operation effect B2-1" to "Touch operation effect B2-5" are set. In the touch operation effect selection table B2, "no touch operation effect" is not set, and by performing the touch operation in the fourth touch operation reception period R4, "touch operation effect B2-1" to "touch" are always performed. Any one of the touch operation effects of "operation effect B2-5" is executed.

"Touch operation effect B2-1" has a jackpot expectation of "low", "touch operation effect B2-2" has a jackpot expectation of "medium", and "touch operation effect B2-3" has a jackpot expectation. Is "high", "touch operation effect B2-4" has a jackpot expectation of "extremely high", and "touch operation effect B2-5" is "big hit confirmed". Then, when the MPU 51 determines that it is necessary to determine the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4, the lottery result selects the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter. Select according to.

Specifically, when the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot or a miss, when the effect patterns Z1 to Z3 are selected as the effect pattern type, and the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is 0 to 59, the jackpot If the touch operation effect B2-1 having the expectation level of "low" is determined and the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is 60 to 89, the touch operation effect B2-2 having the jackpot expectation degree of "medium" is determined. Is determined, and if the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is 90 to 99, the touch operation effect B1-3 with the jackpot expectation degree of "high" is determined.

Further, when the lottery result is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, when the effect patterns Z1 to Z3 are selected as the effect pattern type, if the counter value of the 4th touch operation effect type counter is 0 to 19, a big hit is expected. If the touch operation effect B2-1 having a degree of "low" is determined and the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is 20 to 59, the touch operation effect B2-2 having a jackpot expectation degree of "medium" is determined. If it is determined and the counter value of the 4th touch operation effect type counter is 60 to 84, the touch operation effect B2-3 with the jackpot expectation degree of "high" is determined, and the counter value of the 4th touch operation effect type counter is determined. If it is 85 to 94, the touch operation effect B2-4 whose jackpot expectation is "extremely high" is determined, and if the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is 95 to 99, the touch is "big hit confirmed". The operation effect B2-5 is determined.

That is, in the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4, it is easy to select a touch operation effect having a jackpot expectation of "high" or higher, and especially when the lottery result is a probability variation jackpot, the jackpot expectation is "high" or higher. Touch operation effect is easy to select. In other words, when the touch operation is performed during the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 of the special reach effect, the touch operation effect having a jackpot expectation degree of "high" or higher is likely to be executed, and the lottery result is particularly a probabilistic jackpot. In that case, the touch operation effect in which the jackpot expectation is “high” or higher is likely to be executed. Therefore, in the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 of the special reach effect, the lottery result is most easily predicted by the touch operation among all the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4.

<Step S2301>
Returning to the description of FIG. 31, in step S2301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect pattern determined in step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. 23 is a non-reach effect pattern. Here, when the effect pattern is a non-reach effect pattern (step S2301: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect determination process. That is, in the MPU 51, when the effect pattern is a non-reach effect pattern (step S2301: Yes), the touch operation effect is not executed. Of course, the touch operation effect may be executed when the effect pattern is a non-reach effect pattern. On the other hand, when the effect pattern is not a non-reach effect pattern (step S2301: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2302.

<Step S2302>
In step S2302, the MPU 51 determines the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect A. That is, in the MPU 51, when the effect pattern is not a non-reach effect pattern, the effect pattern is any of a normal reach effect pattern, a super reach effect pattern, and a special reach effect pattern, and it can be determined that the first touch operation acceptance period R1 exists. Therefore, the touch operation effect in the first touch operation acceptance period R1 is determined.

Specifically, the MPU 51 has a touch operation effect according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter based on the touch operation effect selection table A1 (see FIG. 33 (A)). To determine. Then, the MPU 51 sets the determined touch operation effect type in the RAM 512 as a display variation pattern command together with information indicating that the touch operation effect is for the first touch operation acceptance period R1. If it is decided not to execute the touch operation effect when the touch operation is performed in the first touch operation acceptance period R1, the display variation pattern command is set to "No touch operation effect" as the touch operation effect type. It may be set as, or the information regarding the touch operation effect for the first touch operation acceptance period R1 may not be included.

<Step S2303>
In step S2303, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect pattern determined in step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. 23 is a normal reach effect pattern. Here, when the effect pattern is a normal reach effect pattern (step S2303: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect determination process. That is, when the effect pattern is the normal reach effect pattern (step S2303: Yes), the MPU 51 does not determine the touch operation effect for the second to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R2 to R4, and the first touch operation acceptance period R1 Only the touch operation effect for is determined. On the other hand, when the effect pattern is not the normal reach effect pattern (step S2303: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2304.

<Steps S2304 and S2305>
When the effect pattern is not a non-reach effect pattern or a normal reach effect pattern (step S2303: No), the MPU 51 performs a touch operation effect in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect A. It is determined (step S2304), and further, the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect B is determined (step S2305). That is, in the MPU 51, when the effect pattern is neither a non-reach effect pattern nor a normal reach effect pattern, the effect pattern is either a super reach effect pattern or a special reach effect pattern, and the second touch operation acceptance period R2 and the third touch Since it can be determined that the operation reception period R3 exists, the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2 and the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3 are determined.

Specifically, the MPU 51 has a second touch operation effect selection table A2 (see FIG. 33 (B)) according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter. Touch operation acceptance period The touch operation effect for R2 is determined. Then, the MPU 51 sets the determined touch operation effect type in the RAM 512 as a display variation pattern command together with information indicating that the touch operation effect is for the second touch operation acceptance period R2. If it is decided not to execute the touch operation effect when the touch operation is performed in the second touch operation acceptance period R2, the display variation pattern command is set to "No touch operation effect" as the touch operation effect type. It may be set as, or the information regarding the touch operation effect for the second touch operation acceptance period R2 may not be included.

Further, the MPU 51 accepts the third touch operation based on the touch operation effect selection table B1 (see FIG. 34 (A)) according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter. The touch operation effect for the period R3 is determined. Then, the MPU 51 sets the determined touch operation effect type in the RAM 512 as a display variation pattern command together with information indicating that the touch operation effect is for the third touch operation acceptance period R3.

<Step S2306>
In step S2306, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect pattern determined in step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. 23 is a super reach effect pattern. Here, when the effect pattern is a super reach effect pattern (step S2306: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect determination process. That is, when the effect pattern is the super reach effect pattern (step S2306: Yes), the MPU 51 does not determine the touch operation effect for the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4, and the first to third touch operation acceptance periods R1 to The touch operation reception effect for R3 is determined. On the other hand, when the effect pattern is not the super reach effect pattern (step S2306: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2307.

<Step S2307>
When the effect pattern is not any of the non-reach effect pattern, the normal reach effect pattern, and the super reach effect pattern (step S2307: No), the MPU 51 has a fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect B. ) Is determined (step S2307). That is, in the MPU 51, when the effect pattern is not any of the non-reach effect pattern, the normal reach effect pattern, and the super reach effect pattern, the effect pattern is the special reach effect pattern, and it can be determined that the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 exists. , 4th touch operation acceptance period The touch operation effect in R4 is determined.

Specifically, the MPU 51 has a fourth touch operation effect selection table B2 (see FIG. 34 (B)) according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter. Touch operation acceptance period The touch operation effect for R4 is determined. Then, the MPU 51 sets the determined touch operation effect type in the RAM 512 as a display variation pattern command together with information indicating that the touch operation effect is for the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4.

The touch operation effect type for the first to fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 may be set in the RAM 512 as a command different from the display variation pattern command.

[Variable game production processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 17, in the variable game effect processing (step S1707), in the variable game for notifying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, the movable accessory member 39 determined when the variable pattern command is received in the command determination process. The touch operation effect (step S2205 in FIG. 23) determined when the movable accessory member 39 is operated at the operation timing (step S2204 in FIG. 23) and a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. , The speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like. Here, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game effect processing executed in step S1707 in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG.

<Steps S2401 and S2402>
As shown in FIG. 35, the MPU 51 confirms the counter value of the fluctuation counter (step S2401) and determines whether or not the counter value of the fluctuation counter is 0 (step S2402). Here, when the counter value of the fluctuation counter is 0 (step S2402: Yes), the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol is not changing, so that the fluctuation game control process is terminated and the counter value of the fluctuation counter is not 0. (Step S2402: No), the process proceeds to step S2403.

<Step S2403>
In step S2403, the MPU 51 executes the movable accessory member operation process. In the movable accessory member operation process, the movable accessory member 39 is operated at the operation timings G1 to G6 (see FIGS. 27 to 30) of the movable accessory member 39, which is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Member 39 is activated. The details of the movable accessory member operation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

<Step S2404>
In step S2404, the MPU 51 executes the touch operation effect execution process. In the touch operation effect execution process, when a touch operation is performed on a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 during the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 (see FIG. 27). In addition, the touch operation effect is executed unless the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted. The details of the touch operation effect execution process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

[Movable accessory member operation processing]
Here, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the movable accessory member operation process executed in the variable game effect process of FIG. 35. In the movable accessory member operation process, the movable accessory member 39 is moved from the standby position (first position) to the operation position at the operation timing determined in the movable accessory member operation timing determination process (step S2204 of the command determination process in FIG. 23). Move to (second position), and move from the operating position to the standby position.

<Step S2501>
As shown in FIG. 36, in step S2501, the MPU 51 operates timings G1 to G6 of the movable accessory member 39 determined in the movable accessory member operation timing determination process (step S2204 of the command determination process in FIG. 23) (FIG. It is determined whether or not the value corresponding to the start time of 27 to 30) has been reached. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2502 when it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2501: Yes), and when it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2501: No). , The process proceeds to step S2504.

<Steps S2502 and S2503>
When it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 51 outputs an operation start signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force to the movable accessory member 39. (Step S2502). As a result, the motor driver 39c moves the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operating position by controlling the motor 39a. Then, the MPU 51 sets the movable accessory member operating flag to ON (step S2503), and ends the movable accessory member operation process.

<Step S2504>
When it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2501: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2504). That is, the MPU 51 is at the end of the operation timings G1 to G6 (see FIGS. 27 to 30) of the movable accessory member 39 determined in the movable accessory member operation timing determination process (step S2204 of the command determination process in FIG. 23). Judge whether or not the value corresponding to is reached. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2505 when it is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2504: Yes), and when it is not the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2504: No), the process To step S2506.

<Step S2505>
When it is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2504: Yes), the MPU 51 outputs a return signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force to the movable accessory member 39 (step). S2505), the operation process of the movable accessory member is completed. As a result, the motor driver 39c moves the movable accessory member 39 from the operating position to the standby position by controlling the motor 39a.

<Steps S2506 and S2507>
If it is not the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2504: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby position based on the detection signal from the return detection unit 39b (step S2504: No). Step S2506). Here, when the movable accessory member 39 returns to the standby position (step S2506: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the movable accessory member operating flag to off (step S2507), and performs the movable accessory member operation process. finish. Further, when the movable accessory member 39 has not returned to the standby position (step S2506: No), the MPU 51 ends the movable accessory member operation process.

[Touch operation effect execution process]
Here, FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed in the variable game effect process of FIG. 35.

<Step S2601>
As shown in FIG. 37, whether or not the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d based on the first to third touch operation pattern flags (predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (panel 25). Whether or not an object exists in a specific area) is determined. Specifically, the MPU 51 touches when the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21 is "off", "on", and "off". If it is determined that the operation state corresponds to the start of touch operation, and the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags is "on", "off", and "off", the touch operation state corresponds to continuation of touch operation. Judgment (see FIG. 22B). It should be noted that the existence of an object in the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 in this step S2601 does not mean whether or not the touch operation is actually performed by the player, but in all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. It means that the existence of an object is detected. Therefore, even when the movable accessory member 39 is operated, it is determined that an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, and the detection of the object by the movable accessory member 39 is erroneously detected as a touch operation. There is.

Here, when it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2602, and the touch operation is performed by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. If it is not determined that the sensor has been detected (step S2601: No), the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Step S2602>
In step S2602, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member operating flag set to be on in step S2503 in the movable accessory member operation process of FIG. 36 is set to on. Here, the MPU 51 is one of the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 (see FIG. 27) when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to off (step S2602: No). On condition of this, the display control device 6 is provided with a touch operation effect execution command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23). It is transmitted (steps S2603 to S2610 described later) to execute a touch operation effect.

On the other hand, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S2602: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process. That is, in the present embodiment, when the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, even if the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to Even if it is R4, the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored by ending the touch operation effect execution process when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON.

Here, the movable accessory member operating flag is turned on when the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 is reached and the operation start signal for operating the movable accessory member 39 is output to the motor driver 39c. Since it is set (steps S2501 to S2503 in FIG. 36), the movable accessory member 39 is not operating and is in the standby position at the stage when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. On the other hand, since the movable accessory member operating flag is set to off when the return to the standby position is detected by the return detection unit 39b (steps S2506 and S2507 in FIG. 36), the movable accessory member operating flag is set. At the stage when it is set to off, the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position. That is, from the stage where it is decided to operate the movable accessory member 39 (the stage where the main movable accessory member 39A is in the standby position immediately before the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is started), the movable accessory member 39 The moving accessory member operating flag is set to ON until the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position after the return of the moving accessory member 39 is confirmed, and the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored. Therefore, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, even if the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, it is detected. Regardless of whether is a touch operation by the player or based on the operation of the movable accessory member 39, the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored, and even if the first to fourth touches are made. Even if the operation acceptance period is R1 to R4, the touch operation effect is not executed.

<Steps S2603 and S2604>
In step S2603, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first touch operation acceptance period R1 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the first touch operation acceptance period R1 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, and for determining whether or not it is the first touch operation acceptance period R1. It may be judged by operating the counter.

Here, when the MPU 51 is in the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S2603: Yes), the first touch operation effect for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1. An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2604), and the touch operation effect execution process is completed. As a result, the symbol display unit 341 executes the touch operation effect during the first touch operation reception period R1. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 is not in the first touch operation acceptance period R1 (step S2603: No), the process shifts to step S2605.

<Steps S2605 and S2606>
In step S2605, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not the second touch operation acceptance period is R2 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, and for determining whether or not the second touch operation acceptance period is R2. It may be judged by operating the counter.

Here, when the MPU 51 is in the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S2605: Yes), the second touch operation effect for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2. An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2606), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. As a result, the symbol display unit 341 executes the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 is not in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (step S2605: No), the process shifts to step S2607.

<Steps S2607 and S2608>
In step S2607, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the third touch operation acceptance period R3 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not the third touch operation acceptance period is R3 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, and for determining whether or not the third touch operation acceptance period is R3. It may be judged by operating the counter.

Here, when the MPU 51 is in the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S2607: Yes), the MPU 51 is a third touch operation effect for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3. An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2608), and the touch operation effect execution process is completed. As a result, the symbol display unit 341 executes the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 is not in the third touch operation acceptance period R3 (step S2607: No), the process shifts to step S2609.

<Steps S2609 and S2610>
In step S2609, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not the fourth touch operation acceptance period is R4 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, and for determining whether or not the fourth touch operation acceptance period is R4. It may be judged by operating the counter.

Here, when the MPU 51 is in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S2609: Yes), the MPU 51 is a fourth touch operation effect for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4. An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2610), and the touch operation effect execution process is completed. As a result, the symbol display unit 341 executes the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 is not in the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 (step S2609: No), it can be determined that it does not correspond to any of the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, so that the touch operation effect is executed. Without doing so, the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

[Big hit game production processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 17, in the jackpot game effect processing (step S1708), in the jackpot game, for example, the jackpot game effect (opening effect, opening / closing execution mode effect, and ending) determined when a variable pattern command is received in the command determination process. The effect) is executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like.

By the way, as a conventional game machine, as in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as a variable game effect, a movable accessory member operation effect for operating a movable accessory member and a symbol display unit within a touch operation acceptance period In some cases, a touch operation effect is executed by a player performing a touch operation on the front side of the game. In this type of gaming machine, due to the operation of the movable accessory member within the touch operation acceptance period, the touch operation effect may be unexpectedly executed as if the touch operation was performed. That is, the touch operation effect may be executed by erroneously detecting that the operation of the movable accessory member is performed by the player.

Further, in the touch operation reception period, the touch operation reception effect that clearly indicates that it is the touch operation reception period may or may not be executed, and the touch operation reception period when the touch operation reception effect is not executed is touched. The touch operation effect when the operation is performed is generally not a big hit expectation. On the other hand, the movable accessory member operation effect is often executed as a chance-up effect or a jackpot confirmation effect. Therefore, the expectation for a big hit is raised by the operation of the movable accessory member, or the touch operation effect with a low expectation of a big hit is executed due to the operation of the movable accessory member in a state where it is clearly stated that the jackpot is a big hit. Being done can also be a cause of diminished interest.

On the other hand, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, that is, the stage where it is determined to operate the movable accessory member 39 (movable accessory member). From the stage where the movable accessory member is in the standby position immediately before the operation of 39 is started) to the stage where the return of the movable accessory member 39 is confirmed and the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position By ignoring the detection results of the detection sensors 38a to 38d, the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted. Therefore, even if the movable accessory member 39 starts operating after the movable accessory member operating flag is set to on, it is possible to limit the execution of the touch operation effect, and of course the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position. It is also possible to limit the execution of the touch operation effect before returning to. As a result, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the touch operation effect is executed because the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is erroneously detected as that the touch operation has been performed by the player. Can be prevented. Therefore, the expectation for the big hit is raised by the operation of the movable accessory member 39, or the touch operation effect with the low expectation for the big hit is not executed in the state where it is clearly stated that the big hit is a big hit. The decline can be suppressed.

[Other Embodiments]
Hereinafter, other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described. Further, in the following other embodiments, the description of the same configuration as that of the game machine 10 described in the first embodiment described above and the same steps as the processing procedure will be omitted. It is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function of the above-mentioned first embodiment and the following other embodiments.

[Second Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, when the presence of an object is detected by a plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, the movable accessory member 39 is set while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to on, that is, the movable accessory member 39 is pressed. From the stage where it is decided to operate (the stage where the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position immediately before the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is started), the return of the movable accessory member 39 is confirmed and the movable accessory member 39 is activated. The case where the detection result of the object by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d is ignored and the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted until the stage where the member 39 is in the standby position has been described.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to on, that is, at the stage where it is determined to operate the movable accessory member (immediately before the operation of the movable accessory member is started). This is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the process of determining whether or not the presence of an object is detected by a plurality of detection sensors is not executed until the return of the movable accessory member is confirmed. ..

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 38, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 38, in the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, unlike the touch operation effect execution process of the first embodiment described above, whether or not the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. (Step S2701), and on the condition that the movable accessory member operating flag is set to off (step S2701: No), the determination is made in the touch operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. Based on the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22B), it is determined whether or not the touch operation is detected (step S2702). Then, when it is determined that the touch operation is detected (step S2702: Yes), the MPU 51 is in any of the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, as in the first embodiment described above. In a certain case (Yes in any of steps S2603, S2605, S2607 and S2609), the touch operation effect execution command in the corresponding touch operation acceptance period R1 to R4 is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2604, S2606, S2608 or S2610).

As described above, in the present embodiment, while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, that is, the stage where it is determined to operate the movable accessory member 39 (the operation of the movable accessory member 39 starts). From (immediately before) until the return of the movable accessory member 39 is confirmed (step S2701: Yes), regardless of whether the player has performed a touch operation or the movable accessory member 39 has been activated. , The process of determining whether or not an object exists on the front side of the predetermined area of the symbol display unit 341 (step S2702) is not executed. As a result, the touch operation effect is not executed while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. Therefore, as in the first embodiment described above, the touch operation effect is executed due to the erroneous detection that the operation of the movable accessory member has been performed by the player. Can be prevented. As a result, the expectation for the jackpot is raised by the operation of the movable accessory member 39, or the touch operation effect with the low jackpot expectation is not executed in the state where it is clearly stated that the jackpot is a jackpot. Can be suppressed.

[Third Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to on (the stage at which it is determined to operate the movable accessory member 39 (the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is started). From (immediately before) until the return of the movable accessory member 39 is confirmed), the case where the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored and the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted has been described.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the one-shot notification effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result is a big hit is executed with the operation of the movable accessory member, the execution timing of the one-shot notification effect (touch operation by the detection sensor is performed). It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted according to the situation (situation determined to have existed). Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the execution timing of the one-shot notification effect is during the execution of the super reach effect or the special reach effect, the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted. Further, in the present embodiment, when the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted, an effect different from the touch operation effect (specific effect) is executed instead of the touch operation effect, which is also the same as the first embodiment described above. Is different. The specific effect may be an effect showing the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result, or may be an effect unrelated to the jackpot lottery result.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the present embodiment. 40 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect determination table referred to in the touch operation effect execution process of FIG. 39, and FIG. 40 (B) is set in the specific effect determination table of FIG. 40 (A). It is a figure which shows the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation of a big hit) that a lottery result in a big hit lottery for a specific production is a big hit.

<Step S2801>
As shown in FIG. 39, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2801). This effect execution command is a command for executing a touch operation effect or a specific effect on the symbol display unit 341, and is transmitted to the display control device 6 in steps S2810 or S2811, which will be described later. Whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 is set so that the transmitted flag is set to on when the touch effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S2810 or S2811, which will be described later. It can be determined by checking whether or not the transmitted flag is set to ON. By determining whether or not the effect execution flag has been transmitted in this step S2801, it is possible to prevent the touch operation effect and the specific effect from being repeatedly started. However, if it is determined that the touch operation is detected after the touch operation effect or the specific effect is completed (when it is determined that an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341), the touch operation acceptance period is applied. On condition that there is, the touch operation effect or the specific effect may be executed again.

Here, when the MPU 51 has already transmitted the effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S2801: Yes), the MPU 51 has finished the touch operation effect execution process and has not yet transmitted the effect execution command to the display control device 6. (Step S2801: No), the process proceeds to step S2802.

<Step S2802>
When the effect execution command has not been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2801: No), the MPU 51 is a combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21 (FIG. 22). Based on (see (B)), it is determined whether or not the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (step S2802). Here, when it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (step S2802: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2803, and the touch operation is performed by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. If it is not determined that the sensor has been detected (step S2802: No), the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Step S2803>
In step S2803, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first touch operation acceptance period R1 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not the first touch operation acceptance period R1 is set is determined based on, for example, the value of the fluctuation counter and the fluctuation type (effect pattern) determined in step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. 23. In the following, similarly, when determining whether or not the second touch operation acceptance period R2 to the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4, the value of the fluctuation counter and step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. 23 are performed. Judgment is made based on the determined variation type (effect pattern).

Here, when the MPU 51 is in the first touch operation acceptance period R1 (step S2803: Yes), the process shifts to step S2811, and when it is not the first touch operation acceptance period R1 (step S2803: No), the process is stepped. Move to S2804.

<Step S2804>
If it is not the first touch operation acceptance period R1 (step S2803: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (see FIG. 27) (step S2804). Here, when the MPU 51 is in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (step S2804: Yes), the process shifts to step S2805, and when it is not in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (step S2804: No), the process is stepped. Move to S2806.

<Step S2805>
When the second touch operation acceptance period R2 is reached (step S2804: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the super reach effect is being executed (step S2805). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the second touch operation reception period R2 is the reception period when the normal reach effect is being executed or the reception period when the super reach effect is being executed. Whether or not the super reach effect is being executed is determined based on, for example, the value of the variation counter and the variation type (effect pattern) determined in step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. 23. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2807 when the super reach effect is being executed (step S2805: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2811 when the super reach effect is not being executed (step S2805: No). Transition.

<Step S2806>
If it is not the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (step S2804: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the third touch operation acceptance period R3 or the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 (step S2806). Here, when the MPU 51 is in the third touch operation acceptance period R3 or the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 (step S2806: Yes), the process shifts to step S2807, and the third touch operation acceptance period R3 or the fourth touch If the operation acceptance period is not R4 (step S2807: No), the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Step S2807>
When the second touch operation acceptance period R2 is executing the super reach effect (step S2807: Yes), or when it is either the third touch operation acceptance period R3 or the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 (step S2806:). Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member operating flag set to be on in step S2503 in the movable accessory member operation process of FIG. 36 is set to on. Here, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to on (step S2807: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2808, and the movable accessory member operating flag is set to off. In the case (step S2807: No), the process proceeds to step S2811.

<Step S2808>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to on (step S2807: Yes), the MPU 51 clearly indicates that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot due to the operation of the movable accessory member 39. It is determined whether or not the effect is executed (step S2808). Here, when the one-shot notification effect is executed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2808: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2809, and the operation of the movable accessory member 39 causes the one-shot notification effect. Is not executed (step S2809: No), the process proceeds to step S2811.

<Step S2809>
When the one-shot notification effect is executed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2809: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the specific effect determination process (step S2810). That is, when it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d during the execution of the super reach effect or the special reach effect, the MPU 51 determines the touch operation effect determination process (in the command determination process of FIG. 23). In order to execute the specific effect instead of executing the touch operation effect determined in step S2205), a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is determined in the specific effect determination process of this step S2809. The specific effect may be an effect indicating the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result (big hit expectation) or an effect unrelated to the jackpot lottery result, but in the present embodiment, the effect showing the jackpot expectation. Is executed as.

Here, FIG. 40 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect determination table referred to in the specific effect determination process executed in step S2809 in the touch operation effect execution process of FIG. 39, and FIG. 40 (B) is a diagram. It is a figure which shows the jackpot expectation degree of the specific effect set in the specific effect determination table of 40 (A).

As shown in FIG. 40 (A), in the specific effect determination table, the specific effect pattern type counter value corresponding to the counter value of the specific effect pattern type counter is specified according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and deviation). As the effect pattern types, "specific effect A1" to "specific effect A3", "confirmed effect A", "confirmed effect B", and "premier effect" are defined. As shown in FIG. 40 (B), "specific production A1" is a production with a jackpot expectation of "medium", and "specific production A2" is a production with a jackpot expectation of "high", and is "specific". "Direction A3" is a production with a "super high" expectation for big hits.

The "confirmed effect A" is an image effect of "big hit confirmation" executed by the symbol display unit 341. The image effect as the final effect A is an effect that is executed at a position that is invisible or difficult to see when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position, for example. In this case, the final effect A can be visually recognized by returning the movable accessory member to the standby position. Therefore, by including the final effect A as the specific effect, not only whether or not the movable accessory member 39 operates, but also the final effect is given to the player by the symbol display unit 341 after the movable accessory member 39 is returned. It is possible to pay attention to whether or not it is executed. As a result, the player can continue to be interested in the production even after the production of the movable accessory member is completed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

"Confirmed effect B" is an effect other than the image effect of "big hit confirmed". A lamp effect for lighting the illumination unit 27 and a movable accessory member operation effect for operating the movable accessory member 39 can be considered. If it is determined in step S2802 that the touch operation is detected by the operation of the movable accessory member 39, the movable accessory member 39 is immediately operated again after the movable accessory member 39 is returned to the standby position. Can be considered. In this case, since the final effect B is executed as the second movable accessory member operation effect of the movable accessory member operation effect that is continuously executed, the final effect B is executed as an unexpected effect. In addition, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the movable accessory member 39 is operated again after the movable accessory member 39 is returned. As a result, the player can continue to be interested in the production even after the production of the movable accessory member is completed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

"Premier production" is a production of "probability change jackpot confirmation". Further, the "premier production" is a production having an extremely low selection rate as compared with other productions, and in the present embodiment, it is selected only when the lottery result is a probabilistic jackpot, and the selection rate is 1%. For example, as the "premier effect", an image effect in which an image of a rare character whose appearance rate is extremely low as compared with other characters is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 can be considered.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 40 (A), when the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, one of the specific effects A1 to A3, the final effect A, and the final effect B is selected according to the counter value of the specific effect type counter. However, the premier production is not selected. Further, when the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, the final effect A and the final effect B can be selected, but the selection rate is low.

When the lottery result is a 5R probability variation jackpot, one of the specific effects A1 to A3, the final effect A, and the final effect B is selected according to the counter value of the specific effect type counter, but the premier effect is selected. There is no. Further, when the lottery result is a 5R probability variation jackpot, the finalized effect A and the finalized effect are easier to be selected than the 5R normal jackpot.

When the lottery result is a 16R probability variation jackpot, one of the specific effects A1 to A3, the final effects A, the final effects B, and the premier effects is selected according to the counter value of the specific effect type counter. In addition, when the lottery result is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the production in which the jackpot including the premier production is confirmed is easier to select than the 5R normal jackpot, but the selection rate is the same as the 5R probability variation jackpot, and the premiere production with a low probability Is selected.

If the lottery result is out of order, one of the specific effects A1 to A3 is selected according to the counter value of the specific effect type counter, and the final effects A, the final effects B, and the premier effects are not selected. Further, when the lottery result is out of order, it is easy to select the specific effect A having the jackpot expectation of "medium", and the specific effect B having the jackpot expectation of "high" and the specific effect C having the jackpot expectation of "extremely high". The selectivity is low.

<Step S2810>
Returning to the description of FIG. 39, in step S2810, the MPU 51 sets a specific effect execution command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the specific effect determined in step S2809, and transmits the specific effect to the display control device 6. As a result, the specific effect is executed on the symbol display unit 341.

<Step S2811>
In step S2811, when it is determined that the touch operation has been detected (when an object exists in a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341), the MPU 51 determines the touch operation effect (FIG. A touch operation effect execution command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in step S2205) in the command determination process of 23 is transmitted to the display control device 6. As a result, the display control device 6 determines that the touch operation has been detected (based on the detection of the presence of an object in the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341) (step S2802 :: Yes. ), The design display unit 341 is made to execute the touch operation effect.

Specifically, in the display control device 6, an object is placed in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 during the first touch operation reception period R1 or the second touch operation reception period R2 during the execution of the normal reach effect by the MPU 51. When it is determined whether or not it exists, a predetermined touch operation effect is executed. That is, in the normal reach effect, the touch operation effect is executed, and the specific effect is not executed. Further, in the first touch operation acceptance period R1, a predetermined touch operation effect is always executed.

On the other hand, the display control device 6 has a second touch operation acceptance period R2 and a third touch operation during the execution of the super reach effect by the MPU 51, provided that the one-shot notification effect is executed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39. When it is determined that the touch operation state corresponds to the start of the touch operation in the reception period R3 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4, the specific effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect determined in advance. That is, in the super reach effect and the special reach effect, when the one-shot notification effect is executed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39, the specific effect is executed, and the touch operation effect is not executed. In other words, when the one-shot notification effect is executed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39 in the super reach effect or the special reach effect, the touch operation during the period in which the touch operation can be executed is accepted. The execution of the production is restricted. Further, in the third touch operation reception period R3 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4 in which the touch operation reception effect is executed, the specific effect is always executed instead of the touch operation effect.

As described above, in the conventional game machine in which the movable accessory member operation effect and the touch operation effect are executed, the operation of the movable accessory member is erroneously detected as the touch operation performed by the player. Touch operation effects may be executed. Here, the movable accessory member operation effect may be executed as a one-shot notification effect that clearly indicates that it is a big hit. In particular, in super reach production and special reach production, it is often executed as a jackpot confirmation production as compared with normal reach production. On the other hand, the touch operation effect often includes an effect in which the lottery result can hardly be expected to be a big hit. Therefore, when it is erroneously detected that the player has touched a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display due to the operation of the movable accessory member, the operation of the movable accessory member gives a single notification. If a production that can hardly be expected to be a big hit is executed immediately after the production is performed, there is a concern that the player's interest in the game will drop at once.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when a one-shot notification effect is executed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39 in the super reach effect or the special reach effect, it can hardly be expected to be a big hit. A specific effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect that may be executed as the effect. Here, as shown in FIGS. 40 (A) and 40 (B), even in the specific effect A1 having the lowest expectation of big hit, the expectation of big hit is "medium", and most of the specific effects are big hits. It does not include unexpected productions. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent an effect that can hardly be expected to be a big hit is executed immediately after the one-shot notification effect is performed in the super reach effect or the special reach effect.

By the way, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the touch operation effect is not executed even if the touch operation is confirmed while the movable accessory member 39 is operating. Further, in the second embodiment described above, while the movable accessory member 39 is operating, the touch operation effect is not executed without confirming the presence or absence of the touch operation. That is, in both of the above-mentioned first embodiment and the second embodiment, the touch operation effect is not executed while the movable accessory member 39 is operating, regardless of the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39. .. However, since it is difficult to execute an effect with a high expectation of a big hit in the early stage of the effect pattern, for example, in a normal reach effect, it is less necessary to limit the execution of the touch operation effect in a high-speed fluctuation effect or a normal reach effect. In particular, there is little need to limit the execution of the touch operation effect by the touch operation in the first touch operation reception period R1.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the execution of the touch operation effect is not restricted in the high-speed fluctuation effect and the normal reach effect. Further, in the first touch operation acceptance period R1, the execution of the touch operation effect is not restricted. That is, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the execution of the touch operation effect may or may not be restricted depending on the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39. As a result, through the entire effect from the start of the variable display of the main symbol to the stop of the variable display, the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted at the timing when the interest in the game is likely to decrease, and at other timings. Since the touch operation effect is executed as scheduled, it is possible to prevent the touch operation effect from becoming meaningless.

In the present embodiment, in the special reach effect pattern, the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted in both the super reach effect and the special reach effect, but in the special reach effect pattern, the touch operation effect is performed only in the special reach effect. Execution may be restricted.

Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the touch operation has been performed, the touch operation effect or the specific effect is immediately executed, but when it is determined that the touch operation has been completed after it is determined that the touch operation has been performed, the touch operation effect is executed. A touch operation effect or a specific effect may be executed. For example. When it is determined that the touch operation has been performed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39, the touch operation effect or the specific effect may be executed after the movable accessory member 39 is restored.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, when the game machine 10 includes one movable accessory member 39 and the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, the detection results by the four detection sensors 38a to 38d. Was ignored and the execution of the touch operation effect was restricted.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game machine includes two movable accessory members, the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted while one of the movable accessory members is operating, and the touch operation is restricted while the other movable accessory member is operating. It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the execution of the effect is not restricted. Further, the present embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that it is determined whether or not the touch operation is performed by the two detection sensors.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 49, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 41 is a front view showing an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the game machine shown in FIG. 41. As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a main movable accessory member 39A, a sub movable accessory member 39B, a first main detection sensor 38A, a second main detection sensor 38B, and a first. It includes a sub-detection sensor 38C and a second sub-detection sensor 38D.

The main movable accessory member 39A is a member similar to the movable accessory member 39 of the game machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, and is a predetermined first standby position located above the symbol display unit 341. Along the surface of the symbol display unit 341 by the driving force from the first motor 39a1 between (see FIG. 4) and the second operating position (see FIG. 5) set below the first standby position. It can move up and down. The first motor 39a1 is controlled by the motor driver 39c based on the control signals (operation start signal and return signal) from the MPU 51. In the present embodiment, the main movable accessory member 39A can be operated at the operation timings G2, G4, and G6 of the operation timings G1 to G6 shown in FIG. 27. Further, the coverage on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 when the main movable accessory member 39A is in the first operating position is the cover ratio of the symbol display unit 341 when the sub movable accessory member 39B is in the second operating position. Higher than the coverage on the front side. Further, the operating frequency of the main movable accessory member 39A is higher than the operating frequency of the sub movable accessory member 39B.

The sub-movable accessory member 39B is a second motor in the left region of the symbol display unit 341 between the second standby position and the second operating position from the center of the symbol display unit 341 on the right side of the second standby position. It can be moved in the left-right direction along the surface of the symbol display unit 341 by the driving force from 39a2. The second motor 39a2 is controlled by the motor driver 39c based on the control signals (operation start signal and return signal) from the MPU 51. In the present embodiment, the sub-movable accessory member 39B can be operated at the operation timings G1, G3, G5 of the operation timings G1 to G6 shown in FIG. 27.

The sub-movable accessory member 39B includes a display unit 391B composed of a liquid crystal display, a dot matrix display, and the like. That is, the sub-movable accessory member 39 also has a function as a sub-display. In the display unit 391B, for example, an effect linked to the variable game effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 is executed. Further, on the display unit 391B, the touch operation reception effect and the touch operation effect are executed. The display content on the display unit 391B is controlled by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 based on a variable display command or the like transmitted from the MPU 51.

Of the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 shown in FIG. 27, the first touch operation acceptance period R1 and the third touch operation acceptance period R3 are touch operations on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. It is a period in which the display unit 391B accepts the touch operation for executing the effect, and the second touch operation reception period R2 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4 perform the touch operation for executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341. This is the period accepted by the symbol display unit 341. Further, in the third touch operation reception period R3 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4, a touch operation reception effect that clearly indicates that the touch operation reception period is executed is executed.

The first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B detect the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, and are optical sensors such as a diffuse reflection type sensor. The first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B detect the presence of an object based on, for example, a change in the amount of reflected light received. The first main detection sensor 38A is arranged at the upper part on the right side of the symbol display unit 341, and the second main detection sensor 38B is arranged at a portion from the left side of the central portion of the symbol display unit 341. The range in which the existence can be detected is different.

Here, FIG. 43 is a front view schematically showing the detection range of the main detection sensors 38A and 38D with respect to the symbol display unit 341 of the game machine 10 shown in FIG. 41. Specifically, FIG. 43 (A) shows the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A (the portion subjected to cross-hatching in the figure), and FIG. 43 (B) shows the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B ( Cross-hatched portion in the figure), and FIG. 43 (C) shows an overlapping range (cross-hatched in the figure) between the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B. The part that was done).

As shown in FIG. 43 (A), the first main detection sensor 38A detects the presence of an object in a region other than the lower portion and the upper right portion of the symbol display unit 341 based on the change in the amount of reflected light received. ..

As shown in FIG. 43B, the second main detection sensor 38B has the left portion (operating region of the sub movable accessory member 39B) and the right portion of the symbol display unit 341 based on the change in the amount of reflected light received. Detects the presence of an object in the area other than the lower part.

As shown in FIG. 43 (C), the overlapping range between the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A (see FIG. 42 (A)) and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B (see FIG. 42 (B)) is , The left portion of the symbol display portion 341 (the operating region of the sub-movable accessory member 39B), the lower portion, the upper right portion, and the lower right portion. In this overlapping region, the left portion (operating region of the sub-movable accessory member 39B) and the lower portion of the symbol display unit 341 are not within the detection range, so that it is erroneously assumed that the player has performed a touch operation by, for example, a game ball that has passed through the warp. It becomes possible to prevent detection. Further, in the overlapping area, since the left part of the symbol display unit 341 (the operating area of the sub-movable accessory member 39B) is not within the detection range, for example, a touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B is performed. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection that a touch operation on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 has been performed in the case of a break. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the object in the overlapping range of the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A (see FIG. 42 (A)) and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B (see FIG. 42 (B)). By detecting the existence, it is determined whether or not a touch operation has been performed on a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. That is, when the presence of an object is detected by both the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B, the MPU 51 touches a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. Judge that the operation has been performed.

Of course, when an object is detected by one of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B, it may be determined that the object exists on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. Further, the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B may be arranged not only around the symbol display unit 341 but also around the peripheral portion of the symbol display unit 341. Further, the number of main detection sensors may be one or more, and the number is not limited to two and may be another number.

The first sub-detection sensor 38C and the second sub-detection sensor 38D detect the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B, and are optical such as a diffuse reflection type sensor. It is an optical sensor. The first sub-detection sensor 38C and the second sub-detection sensor 38D detect the presence of an object based on, for example, a change in the amount of reflected light received. The first sub-detection sensor 38C is arranged in the upper center of the display unit 391B, and the second sub-detection sensor 38D is arranged in the lower center of the display unit 391B, and the ranges in which the presence of an object can be detected are different.

Here, FIG. 44 is a front view schematically showing the detection ranges of the first and second sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D with respect to the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. Specifically, FIG. 44 (A) shows the detection range of the first sub-detection sensor 38C (the portion subjected to cross-hatching in the figure), and FIG. 44 (B) shows the detection range of the second sub-detection sensor 38D (the portion subjected to cross-hatching). Cross-hatched portion in the figure), and FIG. 44 (C) shows an overlapping range (cross-hatched in the figure) between the detection range of the first sub-detection sensor 38C and the detection range of the second sub-detection sensor 38D. The part that was done).

As shown in FIG. 44 (A), the first sub-detection sensor 38C excludes the upper left corner and the upper right corner of the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B based on the change in the amount of reflected light received. Detects the presence of an object in the area.

As shown in FIG. 44 (B), the second sub-detection sensor 38D excludes the lower left corner portion and the lower right corner portion of the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B based on the change in the amount of reflected light received. Detects the presence of an object in the area.

As shown in FIG. 44 (C), the overlapping range between the detection range of the first sub-detection sensor 38C (see FIG. 44 (A)) and the detection range of the second sub-detection sensor 38D (see FIG. 44 (B)) is , Except for the four corners of the display unit 391B. That is, the detection ranges are set to be different between the main detection sensors 38A and 38B and the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D.

By the way, each of the first sub-detection sensor 38C and the second sub-detection sensor 38D may detect an object other than the front side of the display unit 391B (left or right side of the display unit 391B). For example, a game ball passing through the warp and passing through the left side of the display unit 391B, a main movable accessory member 39A moving on the right side of the display unit 391B, and a player's movement on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 are detected. May be done. On the other hand, whether or not a touch operation is performed on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B with respect to the overlapping range between the detection range of the first sub-detection sensor 38C and the detection range of the second sub-detection sensor 38D. If the detection range is set to determine whether or not, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection that a touch operation has been performed by an object existing around the display unit 391B. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a touch operation is performed on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B so that the overlapping range of the detection range of the first sub-detection sensor 38C and the detection range of the second sub-detection sensor 38D is overlapped. It is a detection range for determining whether or not it is present. That is, the MPU 51 determines that when the presence of an object is detected by both the first sub-detection sensor 38C and the second sub-detection sensor 38D, a touch operation is performed on the front side of the display unit 341. Of course, when an object is detected by one of the first sub-detection sensor 38C and the second sub-detection sensor 38D, it may be determined that the object exists on the front side of the display unit 391B. Further, the number of sub-detection sensors may be one or more, and the number is not limited to two and may be another number.

As described above, the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes two movable accessory members 39A and 39B and two display units 341 and 391B, and a detection sensor 38A for detecting a touch operation on the respective display units 341 and 391B. It is equipped with ~ 38D. That is, in the present embodiment, the main detection sensors 38A and 38B and the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D having different detection ranges are provided. Therefore, in the present embodiment, while preventing erroneous detection due to the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A, the main movable is a touch operation effect based on a touch operation on the front side of the sub movable accessory member 39B different from the symbol display unit 341. It becomes possible to make the display unit 391B of the accessory member 39A execute. As a result, even when the main movable accessory member 39A is operating, it is possible to accept the touch operation and execute the touch operation effect. In such an embodiment, processing such as touch operation detection processing, movable accessory member operation processing, and touch operation effect execution processing is different from the above-described first embodiment. Hereinafter, the above-mentioned processing different from the above-mentioned first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49.

[Touch operation detection processing]
Here, FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation detection process (step S1703) executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the game machine according to the present embodiment.

In the touch operation detection process of the present embodiment, a predetermined area (panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is used based on the detection results of the main detection sensors 38A and 38B by the same procedure as that of the first embodiment described above. The touch operation state for the specific area) is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the touch operation history for the past three times for the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is executed (steps S2901 to S2908). As a result, in the game machine 10, the touch operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51, so that the symbol display unit has a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in the present embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub-timer interrupt process. It is determined whether or not the player touches the predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the 341.

Further, in the touch operation detection process of the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, based on the detection results of the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D, the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B is provided. The touch operation state is detected, and processing for sequentially updating the touch operation history for the past three times with respect to the front side of the display unit 391B is executed (steps S2909 to S2916). As a result, in the game machine 10, the touch operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51, so that the display unit 391B is set at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in the present embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub-timer interrupt process. Whether or not there is a touch operation by the player on the front side of the player is determined.

<Steps S2901 and S2902>
As shown in FIG. 45, in steps S2901 and S2902, the MPU 51 executes a process of shifting the touch operation history two or one before in the touch operation history for the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. To do. Specifically, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second main touch operation detection flag to the first main touch operation detection flag (step S2901), and sets the third main touch operation detection flag to the second main touch. The operation detection flag is shifted (overwritten) (step S2902).

<Steps S2903 and S2904>
In step S2903, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the presence of the touch-operated object is detected by the first main detection sensor 38A, and when the presence of the object is detected by the first main detection sensor 38A (step S2903: Yes). ), The first main detection sensor detection flag is set to on (step S2904), and the process proceeds to step S2905. On the other hand, when the presence of the object is not detected by the first main detection sensor 38A (step S2903: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2905 without setting the first main detection sensor detection flag to ON.

<Steps S2905 and S2906>
In step S2905, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the presence of the object is detected by the second main detection sensor 38B, and when the presence of the object is detected by the second main detection sensor 38B (step S2905: Yes). The second main detection sensor detection flag is set to on (step S2906), and the process proceeds to step S2907. On the other hand, when the presence of the object is not detected by the second main detection sensor 38B (step S2905: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2907 without setting the second main detection sensor detection flag to ON.

<Steps S2907 and S2908>
In step S2907, the MPU 51 sets the latest touch operation state to the third main touch operation detection flag based on the first main detection sensor detection flag and the second main detection sensor detection flag. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the third main touch operation detection flag to on when both the first main detection sensor detection flag and the second main detection sensor detection flag are set to on. That is, when the presence of the object is detected by both the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B, the MPU 51 determines that the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, and the third Set the main touch operation detection flag to on. On the other hand, in the MPU 51, when at least one of the first main detection sensor detection flag and the second main detection sensor detection flag is set to off, an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. It is judged not to be performed, and the third main touch operation detection flag is set to off. Further, when the setting of the third main touch operation detection flag is completed, the MPU 51 sets the first main detection sensor detection flag and the second main detection sensor detection flag to off, and shifts the process to step S2909.

<Steps S2909 and S2910>
In steps S2909 and S2910, the MPU 51 executes a process of shifting the touch operation history of the two previous and one previous touch operation histories with respect to the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. Specifically, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second sub-touch operation detection flag to the first sub-touch operation detection flag (step S2909), and changes the setting of the third sub-touch operation detection flag to the second sub-touch operation detection flag. Shift (overwrite) (step S2910).

<Steps S2911 and S2912>
In step S2911, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the presence of the object is detected by the first sub-detection sensor 38C, and when the presence of the object is detected by the first sub-detection sensor 38C (step S2911: Yes), The first sub-detection sensor detection flag is set to on (step S2912), and the process proceeds to step S2913. On the other hand, when the presence of the object is not detected by the first sub-detection sensor 38C (step S2911: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2913 without setting the first sub-detection sensor detection flag to ON.

<Steps S2913 and S2914>
In step S2913, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the presence of the object is detected by the second sub-detection sensor 38D, and when the presence of the object is detected by the second sub-detection sensor 38D (step S2911: Yes), The second sub-detection sensor detection flag is set to on (step S2914), and the process proceeds to step S2915. On the other hand, when the presence of the object is not detected by the second sub-detection sensor 38D (step S2913: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2915 without setting the second sub-detection sensor detection flag to ON.

<Steps S2915 and S2916>
In step S2915, the MPU 51 sets the latest touch operation state to the third sub-touch operation detection flag based on the first sub-detection sensor detection flag and the second sub-detection sensor detection flag. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the third sub-touch operation detection flag to on when both the first sub-detection sensor detection flag and the second sub-detection sensor detection flag are set to on. That is, in the MPU 51, when the existence of an object is detected by both the first sub-detection sensor 38C and the second sub-detection sensor 38D, the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. Then, it is determined that the third sub-touch operation detection flag is set to on. On the other hand, in the MPU 51, when at least one of the first sub-detection sensor detection flag and the second sub-detection sensor detection flag is set to off, no object exists in the predetermined area on the front side of the display unit 391B. And set the third sub-touch operation detection flag to off. Further, when the setting of the third sub-touch operation detection flag is completed, the MPU 51 sets the first sub-detection sensor detection flag and the second sub-detection sensor detection flag to off, and ends the touch operation detection process.

As described above, in the touch operation detection process, by executing the processes of steps S2901 to S2908, the touch operation state for the most recent three times at 1 msec intervals is used as the main touch operation history for the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. Is stored in the RAM 512 as the first main touch operation detection flag to the third main touch operation detection flag. Specifically, the latest touch operation state is memorized as the third main touch operation detection flag, the previous touch operation state is memorized as the second main touch operation detection flag, and two as the first main touch operation detection flag. The previous operation state is memorized. Then, based on the main touch operation history for the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 consisting of the first main touch operation detection flag to the third main touch operation detection flag, the touch on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is performed. The operation detection pattern is determined.

Here, FIG. 46A is a diagram showing an example of a main touch operation data table showing the relationship between the main touch operation detection pattern and the main touch operation status.

As shown in FIG. 46 (A), when the main touch operation history is "on", "on", "on", the MPU 51 continues the touch operation on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. The first main touch operation pattern flag is set to "on", the second main touch operation pattern flag is set to "off", and the third main touch operation pattern flag is set to "off".

Further, the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation for the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 has been started when the main touch operation history is "off", "on", or "on", and the first main touch. Set the operation pattern flag to "off", the second main touch operation pattern flag to "on", and the third main touch operation pattern flag to "off".

Further, the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation for the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is completed when the main touch operation history is "on", "off", or "off", and the first main touch Set the operation pattern flag to "off", the second main touch operation pattern flag to "off", and the third main touch operation pattern flag to "on".

Further, the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation has not been performed on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 when the main touch operation history is neither the continuation of the touch operation, the start of the touch operation, nor the end of the touch operation. Then, the first main touch operation pattern flag is set to "off", the second main touch operation pattern flag is set to "off", and the third main touch operation pattern flag is set to "off".

In the touch operation detection process, the processes of steps S2909 to S2916 are further executed, so that the sub-touch operation history for the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B can be changed to the latest three touch operation states at 1 msec intervals. It is stored in the RAM 512 as the first sub-touch operation detection flag to the third sub-touch operation detection flag. Specifically, the latest touch operation state is memorized as the third sub-touch operation detection flag, the previous touch operation state is memorized as the second sub-touch operation detection flag, and the previous operation is memorized as the first sub-touch operation detection flag. The state is memorized. Then, based on the main touch operation history for the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B including the first sub-touch operation detection flag to the third sub-touch operation detection flag, the touch operation detection pattern for the front side of the display unit 391B Is determined.

Here, FIG. 46B is a diagram showing an example of a sub-touch operation data table showing the relationship between the sub-touch operation detection pattern and the sub-touch operation status.

As shown in FIG. 46 (B), when the sub-touch operation history is "on", "on", and "on", the MPU 51 can perform a touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. It is determined that the continuation is continued, and the first sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to "on", the second sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to "off", and the third sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to "off".

Further, the MPU 51 determines that when the sub-touch operation history is "off", "on", or "on", the touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B has been started, and the first Set the sub-touch operation pattern flag to "off", the second sub-touch operation pattern flag to "on", and the third sub-touch operation pattern flag to "off".

Further, the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B has been completed when the sub-touch operation history is "on", "off", or "off", and the first Set the sub-touch operation pattern flag to "off", the second sub-touch operation pattern flag to "off", and the third sub-touch operation pattern flag to "on".

Further, in the MPU 51, when the sub-touch operation history is neither the continuation of the touch operation, the start of the touch operation, nor the end of the touch operation, the touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B is not performed. The first sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to "off", the second sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to "off", and the third sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to "off".

[Movable accessory member operation processing]
Here, FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the movable accessory member operation process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the game machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

In the movable accessory member operation process of the present embodiment, the process of operating the main movable accessory member 39A is executed in the same procedure as the process of operating the movable accessory member 39 of the first embodiment described above (the process of operating the main movable accessory member 39A). Steps S3001 to S3007). Further, in the movable accessory member operation process of the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, a process of operating the sub-movable accessory member 39B is executed (steps S3008 to S3011).

<Step S3001>
As shown in FIG. 47, in step S3001, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3001). That is, in the MPU 51, the counter value of the fluctuation display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Judge whether or not the value corresponding to the start time of is reached. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3002 when it is the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3001: Yes), and when it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3001: No). ), The process proceeds to step S3004.

<Steps S3002 and S3003>
When it is the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the operation of the motor driver 39c for driving the first motor 39a1 that applies a driving force to the main movable accessory member 39A. A signal is output (step S3002). As a result, the motor driver 39c moves the main movable accessory member 39A from the standby position to the operating position by controlling the first motor 39a1. Then, the MPU 51 sets the main movable accessory member operating flag to on (step S3003), and ends the movable accessory member operation process.

<Step S3004>
When it is not the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39 (step S3001: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3004). That is, in the MPU 51, the counter value of the fluctuation display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Judge whether or not the value corresponding to the end point of is reached. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3005 when it is the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3004: Yes), and when it is not the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3004: No). , The process proceeds to step S3006.

<Step S3006>
When it is the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3004: Yes), the MPU 51 sends a return signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the first motor 39a1 that applies a driving force to the main movable accessory member 39A. Output (step S3005), and the operation process of the movable accessory member is completed. As a result, the motor driver 39c moves the main movable accessory member 39A from the operating position to the standby position by controlling the first motor 39a1.

<Steps S3006 and S3007>
When it is not the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3004: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main movable accessory member 39A has returned to the standby position based on the detection signal from the return detection unit 39b. (Step S3006). Here, when the main movable accessory member 39A returns to the standby position (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the main movable accessory member operating flag to off (step S3007), and the movable accessory member operates. End the process. Further, when the main movable accessory member 39A has not returned to the standby position (step S3006: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3008.

<Step S3008>
When it is not the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3006: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the operation start timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B (step S3008). That is, in the MPU 51, the counter value of the fluctuation display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Judge whether or not the value corresponding to the start time of is reached. Here, when the MPU 51 is the operation start timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B (step S3008: Yes), the process shifts to step S3009, and when it is not the operation start timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B (step S30008: Yes) No), the process proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3009>
When it is the operation start timing of the sub-movable accessory member 39B (step S3009: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the operation of the motor driver 39c that drives the second motor 39a2 that applies the driving force to the sub-movable accessory member 39B. A signal is output (step S3009), and the movable accessory member operation process is completed. As a result, the motor driver 39c moves the sub-movable accessory member 39B from the standby position to the operating position by controlling the second motor 39a2.

<Step S3010>
When it is not the operation start timing of the sub-movable accessory member 39B (step S3008: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the return timing of the sub-movable accessory member 39B (step S3010). That is, in the MPU 51, the operation timings G1, G3, and G5 of the movable accessory member 39 whose counter value of the fluctuation display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery (see FIGS. 27 to 30). Judge whether or not the value corresponding to the end point of is reached. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3011 when it is the return timing of the sub-movable accessory member 39B (step S3010: Yes), and when it is not the return timing of the sub-movable accessory member 39B (step S3010: No). , The operation process of the movable accessory member is completed.

<Step S3011>
When it is the return timing of the sub-movable accessory member 39B (step S3010: Yes), the MPU 51 sends a return signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the second motor 39a2 that applies a driving force to the sub-movable accessory member 39B. Output (step S3011), and the movable accessory member operation process is completed. As a result, the motor driver 39c moves the sub-movable accessory member 39B from the operating position to the standby position by controlling the second motor 39a2.

[Touch operation effect execution process]
Here, FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the game machine according to the present embodiment.

In the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, when a touch operation is performed on a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 during a predetermined touch operation acceptance period in the same procedure as in the first embodiment described above. A process for executing the touch operation effect or a process for restricting the execution of the touch operation effect is performed (steps S3101 to S3106). However, in the present embodiment, in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 and the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4, when a touch operation is performed on a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, the symbol display unit 341 is used. Although the touch operation effect is executed or restricted, the touch operation effect is not executed or restricted on the symbol display unit 341 during the first touch operation acceptance period R1 and the third touch operation acceptance period R3.

Further, in the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, in the first touch operation reception period R1 and the third touch operation reception period R3, the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B When a touch operation is performed on the front side, the touch operation effect is executed (steps S3107 to S3111). In this embodiment, even while the main movable accessory member 39A or the sub movable accessory member 39B is in operation, the execution of the touch operation effect is not restricted.

<Step S3100>
As shown in FIG. 48, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3100). This effect execution command is a command for executing a touch operation effect on the display unit 391B of the symbol display unit 341 or the sub-movable accessory member 39B, and the display control device 6 is in step S3104, S3106, S3109 or S3111 described later. Will be sent. Whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 is determined by, for example, when the touch effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in steps S3104, S3106, S3109 or S3111 described later, the transmitted flag is turned on. It can be determined by setting it and checking whether the transmitted flag is set to ON. By determining whether or not the effect execution flag has been transmitted in this step S3100, it is possible to prevent the touch operation effect from being repeatedly started. However, if it is determined that the main touch operation in the main touch operation state has started after the touch operation effect is completed (when it is determined that an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341), the touch operation is performed. The touch operation effect may be executed again on condition that the reception period is reached.

Here, the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process when the effect execution command has been transmitted (step S3100: Yes), and steps the process when the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3100: No). It shifts to S3101.

<Step S3101>
When the effect execution command has been transmitted (step S3100: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B based on the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags. (Whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341) is determined (step S3101). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the state (main touch operation state) of the touch operation (main touch operation) with respect to the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 corresponds to the start of the main touch operation or the continuation of the main touch operation. .. Specifically, the MPU 51 performs a main touch operation when the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process is "off", "on", and "off". When it is judged that the state corresponds to the start of the main touch operation and the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags is "on", "off", and "off", the main touch operation state continues the main touch operation. (See FIG. 46 (A)). The main touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B in this step S3101, not whether or not the main touch operation is actually performed by the player, but the presence of an object is detected by both the main detection sensors 38A and 38B. It means to be detected. Therefore, it is determined that the main touch operation is performed on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 even by the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A, and the detection of the object by the main movable accessory member 39A is the main touch operation. May be falsely detected.

Here, when the MPU 51 determines that the main touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3101: Yes), the process shifts to step S3102, and the main touch operation is performed by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B. If it is not determined that the detection has been detected (step S3101: No), the process proceeds to step S3107.

<Step S3102>
In step S3102, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main movable accessory member operating flag set to be on in step S3003 in the movable accessory member operation process of FIG. 47 is set to on. Here, in the MPU 51, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to off (step S3102: No), the second touch operation acceptance period R2 or the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 (see FIG. 27). On condition that there is, a touch operation effect execution command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process of step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23 is sent to the display control device 6. It is transmitted (steps S3103 to S3106 described later).

On the other hand, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3102: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process. That is, in the present embodiment, the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is detected by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B, so that the main touch operation state is the main touch operation. When it is determined that the start is applicable, even if the second touch operation acceptance period R2 or the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 is set, the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. By terminating the touch operation effect execution process, the detection results of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B are ignored.

Here, the main movable accessory member operating flag is at the stage where the operation start timing for operating the main movable accessory member 39A is reached and the operation start signal for operating the main movable accessory member 39A is output to the motor driver 39c. Since it is set to ON (steps S3001 to S3003 in FIG. 47), the main movable accessory member 39A is not operating and is in the standby position at the stage when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. On the other hand, since the flag during operation of the main movable accessory member is set to off when the return to the standby position is detected by the return detection unit 39b (steps S3006 and S3007 in FIG. 47), the main movable accessory member is activated. When the middle flag is set to off or off, the main movable accessory member 39A is not operating and is in the standby position. That is, from the stage where it is decided to operate the main movable accessory member 39A (the stage where the main movable accessory member 39A is in the standby position immediately before the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is started), the main movable accessory member 39A is in the standby position. The main movable accessory member operating flag is set to on until the return of the object member 39A is confirmed and the main movable accessory member 39A is in the standby position, and the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection are detected. The detection result by the sensor 38B is ignored. Therefore, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is caused by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B. Even if it is detected, the detection result by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B regardless of whether it is a touch operation by the player or based on the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A. Is ignored, so that the touch operation effect is not executed even if the second touch operation acceptance period R2 or the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 is reached.

<Steps S3103 and S3104>
In step S3103, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not the second touch operation acceptance period is R2 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, and for determining whether or not the second touch operation acceptance period is R2. It may be judged by operating the counter.

Here, when the MPU 51 is in the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3103: Yes), the second touch operation effect for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2. An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3104), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. As a result, the symbol display unit 341 executes the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 is not in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (step S3103: No), the process shifts to step S3105.

<Steps S3105 and S3106>
In step S3105, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not the fourth touch operation acceptance period is R4 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, and for determining whether or not the fourth touch operation acceptance period is R4. It may be judged by operating the counter.

Here, when the MPU 51 is in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3105: Yes), the MPU 51 is a fourth touch operation effect for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4. An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3106), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. As a result, the symbol display unit 341 executes the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 is not in the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 (step S3105: No), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process without executing the touch operation effect.

<Step S3107>
When it is not determined that the touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3101: No), the MPU 51 performs the sub-touch operation by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D based on the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags. It is determined whether or not it has been detected (whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B) (step S3107). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the state (sub-touch operation state) of the touch operation (sub-touch operation) with respect to the predetermined area on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B corresponds to the start of the sub-touch operation or the continuation of the sub-touch operation. to decide. Specifically, the MPU 51 sub-touches when the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21 is "off", "on", and "off". When it is determined that the operation state corresponds to the start of the sub-touch operation, and the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags is "on", "off", and "off", the sub-touch operation state corresponds to the continuation of the sub-touch operation. Judgment (see FIG. 46 (B)).

Here, when it is determined that the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3107: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3108, and the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D do not detect the sub-touch operation. If it is determined (step S3107: No), the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Steps S3108 and S3109>
When it is determined that the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3107: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first touch operation acceptance period R1 (see FIG. 27) (step S3108). ). Whether or not it is the first touch operation acceptance period R1 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, and for determining whether or not it is the first touch operation acceptance period R1. It may be judged by operating the counter.

Here, in the case of the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B to execute the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1. The first touch operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3109), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. As a result, the display unit 391B executes the touch operation effect during the first touch operation reception period R1. In the first touch operation reception period R1, the touch operation reception effect is not executed, and the touch operation effect A is executed when the touch operation is started (see FIG. 49 (A)). On the other hand, when the MPU 51 is not the first touch operation acceptance period R1 (step S3108: No), the process shifts to step S3110.

<Steps S3110 and S3111>
In step S3110, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the third touch operation acceptance period R3 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not the third touch operation acceptance period is R3 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, and for determining whether or not the third touch operation acceptance period is R3. It may be judged by operating the counter.

Here, in the case of the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B to execute the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3. The third touch operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3111), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. As a result, the display unit 391B executes the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3. In the third touch operation reception period R3, the touch operation reception effect is executed, and the touch operation effect B is executed when the touch operation is started (see FIG. 49B). On the other hand, if the MPU 51 is not in the third touch operation acceptance period R3 (step S3110: No), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process.

As described above, when detecting the presence of an object in the overlapping range (see FIG. 43C) between the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B, the main movable accessory When the member 39A is operated, the presence of an object is detected by both the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B. That is, when the overlapping range between the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B is set as the detection range of the existence of an object, the main touch operation state is changed by the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A. Since it is judged that it corresponds to the start of the main touch operation, if the main movable accessory member 39A is activated during the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4, the touch operation effect is caused by the false detection. Will be executed.

On the other hand, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, while the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, that is, the stage where it is determined to operate the main movable accessory member 39A (main). The return of the main movable accessory member 39A is confirmed from the stage where the main movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position immediately before the operation of the movable accessory member 39A is started), and the main movable accessory member 39A is placed in the standby position. Until a certain stage, the detection of the object by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B is ignored, and the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted. Therefore, even if the main movable accessory member 39A starts operating after the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, it is possible to limit the execution of the touch operation effect, and of course, the main movable accessory member 39A. It is also possible to limit the execution of the touch operation effect until the flag returns to the standby position. As a result, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the touch operation effect is executed because the operation of the main movable accessory member is erroneously detected as that the touch operation has been performed by the player. Can be prevented.

Further, in the present embodiment, the touch operation effect is executed not only on the symbol display unit 341 but also on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. Therefore, the touch operation effect can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Then, in the present embodiment, the touch operation effect executed by the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B is executed regardless of whether or not the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. As a result, by the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A, the touch operation executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B is executed at a position that can be visually recognized even if the main movable accessory member 39A is in the operating position. It is possible to prevent the execution from being unnecessarily restricted until the production.

In the present embodiment, the case where the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit 391B by the touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B has been described. The touch operation effect is executed on the symbol display unit 341 on the condition that the main movable accessory member 39A is not operated by the touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B in the 1st or 3rd touch operation acceptance period R1 and R3. You may do so. On the contrary, as shown in FIG. 51, the main movable accessory member 39A is not operated by the touch operation on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 in the second or fourth touch operation acceptance period R2 or R4. The touch operation effect may be executed on the display unit 391B on the condition of. Further, in FIGS. 50 and 51, a case where the touch operation reception effect is executed during the touch operation reception period is illustrated, but even if the touch operation reception effect is not executed during the touch operation reception period, the touch operation is performed. The touch operation effect may be executed on a display unit different from the display unit on which the above is performed. Further, the touch operation effect may be executed on a display unit different from the display unit on which the touch operation is performed on the condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and the lottery result is a probabilistic jackpot. On the condition that the touch operation is performed, the touch operation effect may be executed on a display unit different from the display unit on which the touch operation is performed.

In this way, when the touch operation effect is executed on a display unit different from the display unit on which the touch operation is performed, what kind of type (the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit unexpected by the player) It is possible to pay attention not only to whether the touch operation effect of (expected degree) is executed, but also to which display unit the touch operation effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from diminishing, and thus the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, if the touch operation effect is executed on a display unit different from the display unit on which the touch operation is performed on the condition that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, the interest of the game is effectively improved. On the condition that the lottery result is a probabilistic jackpot, it is possible to more effectively improve the interest of the game.

Further, a touch operation on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 and a touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B are simultaneously accepted, and when any of the touch operations is performed, the symbol display unit 341 It is also conceivable to execute the touch operation effect on at least one of the display units 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B.

Further, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the detection results of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B during the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A are ignored. By limiting the execution of the touch operation effect, erroneous detection of the touch operation by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B is supported, but it is movable as in the second embodiment described above. While the accessory member operating flag is set to ON, false detection occurs by not executing the process of determining whether or not the presence of an object is detected by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B. It may correspond.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sub-movable accessory member 39B is provided with the display unit 391B, but the sub-movable accessory member 39B may not be provided with the display unit 391B, and the position is fixed and immovable. It may be configured to include a sub-display.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment described above, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to on (the stage where it is determined to operate the main movable accessory member 39A (operation of the main movable accessory member 39A). (Immediately before the start of) until the return of the main movable accessory member 39A is confirmed), the detection results of the objects by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B are ignored, and the touch operation effect is produced. The case where the execution of is restricted is explained.

On the other hand, the present embodiment is different from the touch effect in the display unit of the sub movable accessory member when the main movable accessory member is operating during the touch operation acceptance period for executing the touch operation on the symbol display unit. It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a specific effect is executed.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect executed by the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 52, in the present embodiment, when the main movable accessory member 39A is operated during the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4, or during the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A. When the second touch operation acceptance period R2 is started, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed not by the symbol display unit 341 but by the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B.

In the second touch operation reception period R2, the touch operation reception effect clearly indicating that the touch operation reception period is not executed in the symbol display unit 341, while in the fourth touch operation reception period R4, the touch operation reception effect is performed in the symbol display unit 341. Will be executed. Further, in the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4, if the main movable accessory member operating flag is not set to ON, the touch operation effect is executed on the symbol display unit 341.

The specific effect may be an effect indicating the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result (big hit expectation) or an effect unrelated to the jackpot lottery result, but in the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation is determined. It is executed as an effect to show (see FIG. 40).

[Touch operation effect execution process]
Here, FIGS. 53 and 54 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the game machine according to the present embodiment.

In the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment described above, the front surface of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B during the first touch operation reception period R1 and the third touch operation reception period R3. When a touch operation is performed on the side, the touch operation effect is executed (S3108 to S3111 in FIG. 54).

Further, in the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, unlike the fourth embodiment described above, the main movable accessory member operating flag is turned on in the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4. When set to, a specific effect different from the touch effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B (steps S3202 to S3205 and steps S3208 to S3211 in FIG. 53). The specific effect may be an effect indicating the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result (big hit expectation) or an effect unrelated to the jackpot lottery result, but in the present embodiment, the effect showing the jackpot expectation. (See FIG. 40). The display content on the display unit 391B is controlled by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 based on a variable display command or the like transmitted from the MPU 51.

<Step S3200>
As shown in FIG. 53, in step S3200, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6. This effect execution command is a command for executing a touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341 or a touch operation effect or a specific effect on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. It is transmitted to the display control device 6 in S3211 or S3213. Whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 is determined by setting the transmitted flag to ON when the effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in steps S3205, S3207, S3211 or S3213 described later, for example. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the transmitted flag is set to ON.

Here, the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process when the effect execution command has been transmitted (step S3200: Yes), and steps the process when the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3200: No). Move to S3201.

<Step S3201>
When the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3200: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D based on the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags (sub-movable). It is determined (whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the display unit 391B of the accessory member 39B) (step S3201). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the state (sub-touch operation state) of the touch operation (sub-touch operation) with respect to the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B corresponds to the start of the sub-touch operation or the continuation of the sub-touch operation. Specifically, the MPU 51 changes the sub-touch operation state when the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags determined in the sub-touch operation detection pattern determination process is "off", "on", and "off". It is judged that it corresponds to the start of the sub-touch operation, and when the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags is "on", "off", and "off", it is judged that the sub-touch operation state corresponds to the continuation of the sub-touch operation ( See FIG. 46 (B)).

Here, when it is determined that the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3108 of FIG. 54. As shown in FIG. 54, the processing after the sub-detection operation is determined to be detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D is the same as that of the fourth embodiment described above, and the first touch operation acceptance period R1 or the third When a sub-touch operation is performed during the touch operation acceptance period R3, a command for executing the touch operation is transmitted to the display control device 6 (steps S3108 to S3111).

On the other hand, when it is not determined that the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3201: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3202 of FIG. 53.

<Step S3202>
When it is not determined that the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3201: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (see FIG. 27) (step S3202). .. Whether or not the second touch operation acceptance period is R2 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, and for determining whether or not the second touch operation acceptance period is R2. It may be judged by operating the counter. Here, when the MPU 51 is in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (step S3202: Yes), the process shifts to step S3203, and when it is not in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (step S3202: No), the process is stepped. Move to S3208.

<Step S3203>
In the case of the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (step S3202: Yes), in the MPU 51, whether or not the main movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the main movable accessory member 39A is operating is set to ON. (Step S3203). Here, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to on (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3204 and sets the main movable accessory member operating flag to off. If so (step S3203: No), the process proceeds to step S3206.

<Steps S3204 and S3205>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to on (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 is executed by the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B (an effect different from the touch operation effect). Is determined (step S3204). Then, the MPU 51 performs the specific effect determined in step S3204 instead of causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process of step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23. A specific effect execution command to be executed by the display unit 391B is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3205), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. As a result, the specific effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to off (step S3203: No), the MPU 51 is mainly touched by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B based on the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags. It is determined whether or not the operation is detected (whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341) (step S3206). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the state (main touch operation state) of the touch operation (main touch operation) with respect to the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 corresponds to the start of the main touch operation or the continuation of the main touch operation. .. Specifically, the MPU 51 performs a main touch operation when the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process is "off", "on", and "off". When it is judged that the state corresponds to the start of the main touch operation and the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags is "on", "off", and "off", the main touch operation state continues the main touch operation. (See FIG. 46 (A)).

Here, when the touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3206: Yes), the MPU 51 is the first to cause the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the second touch operation acceptance period R2. 2 The touch operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3207), and the touch operation effect execution process is completed. As a result, the symbol display unit 341 executes the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2. On the other hand, when it is not determined that the main touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3206: No), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process without executing the touch operation effect.

<Step S3208>
In step S3208, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not the fourth touch operation acceptance period is R4 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, and for determining whether or not the fourth touch operation acceptance period is R4. It may be judged by operating the counter. Here, when the MPU 51 is in the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 (step S3208: Yes), the process shifts to step S3209, and when it is not the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 (step S3208: No), the touch operation is performed. End the production execution process.

<Step S3209>
In the case of the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 (step S3208: Yes), in the MPU 51, whether or not the main movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the main movable accessory member 39A is operating is set to ON. (Step S3209). Here, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to on (step S3209: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3210 and sets the main movable accessory member operating flag to off. If so (step S3209: No), the process proceeds to step S3212.

<Steps S3210 and S3211>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3209: Yes), the MPU 51 is executed by the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B (an effect different from the touch operation effect). Is determined (step S3210). Then, instead of having the symbol display unit 341 execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process of step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23, the MPU 51 performs the specific effect determined in step S3210. A specific effect execution command to be executed by the display unit 391B is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3211), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. As a result, the specific effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B.

<Steps S3212 and S3213>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to off (step S3209: No), the MPU 51 is the main based on the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags as in the previous step S3206. It is determined whether or not the main touch operation is detected by the detection sensors 38A and 38B (whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341) (step S3212). Here, when it is determined that the main touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3212: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 on the symbol display unit 341. A fourth touch operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3213) to end the touch operation effect execution process. As a result, the symbol display unit 341 executes the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2. On the other hand, when it is not determined that the main touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3212: No), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process without executing the touch operation effect.

As described above, when detecting the existence of an object in the overlapping range of the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B, the main movable accessory member 39A is activated. The presence of an object is detected by both the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B. That is, when the overlapping range of the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B is set as the detection range of the existence of an object, the touch operation is performed by the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A. Therefore, if the main movable accessory member 39A operates during the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4, there is a problem that the touch operation effect is executed due to the false detection. Occurs.

On the other hand, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 in which the touch operation effect can be executed on the symbol display unit 341 is set, the main movable combination On condition that the moving object member operating flag is set to ON, that is, when it is decided to operate the main movable accessory member 39A (main movable immediately before the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is started). The symbol display unit is on the condition that the return of the main movable accessory member 39A is confirmed and the main movable accessory member 39A is in the standby position from the stage where the accessory member 39 is in the standby position). Instead of executing the touch operation effect on the 341, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. Therefore, in the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 in which the touch operation effect can be executed on the symbol display unit 341, the touch operation effect is executed even if the main movable accessory member 39A is operated. You can limit that. In addition to that, instead of the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341, the specific effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B whose visibility is not hindered when the main movable accessory member 39A is operated. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game as compared with the case where the execution of the touch operation effect is simply restricted.

In addition, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 or the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 on the condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. , Instead of executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect may be executed on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B, and the lottery result is probablely changed. On the condition that it is a big hit, the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B may execute a specific effect different from the touch operation effect. In this way, when the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B executes a specific effect different from the touch operation effect instead of executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341, the player does not expect it. By executing a specific effect on the display unit, not only what kind (expectation degree) of touch operation effect is executed, but also on which display unit the effect is executed is focused on. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from diminishing, and thus the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, on condition that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, the specific effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B instead of the touch operation effect being executed on the symbol display unit 341. By doing so, the interest of the game can be effectively improved, and the interest of the game can be further effectively improved on condition that the lottery result is a probabilistic jackpot.

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, the game machine 10 includes a movable accessory member 39 that is moved between a standby position and an operating position, and by operating the movable accessory member 39, a chance-up effect and a big hit are confirmed. The case where the production is executed has been described. Further, in the first embodiment described above, while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (the stage where it is determined to operate the movable accessory member 39 (the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is performed). From (immediately before the start) until the return of the movable accessory member 39 is confirmed), the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored, and the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted. ..

On the other hand, although this embodiment is common to the above-described first embodiment in that it includes a movable accessory member, it differs from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that the movable accessory member has a display unit. Further, in the present embodiment, when the movable accessory member is operating during the period for accepting the touch operation for executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit, the display unit of the movable accessory member is different from the touch effect. It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a specific effect is executed.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of a movable accessory member operation effect executed by the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 55, the movable accessory member 39C includes a display unit 392C composed of a liquid crystal display, a dot matrix display, and the like. That is, the movable accessory member 39C also has a function as a sub-display. In C on the display unit 392, for example, when the movable accessory member 39C is in the operating position, the image effect is executed. In the present embodiment, when the execution period of the movable accessory member effect and the touch operation reception period R1 to R4 (see FIG. 7) overlap, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect. Will be done. The specific effect may be an effect indicating the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result (big hit expectation) or an effect unrelated to the jackpot lottery result, but in the present embodiment, the effect showing the jackpot expectation. (See FIG. 40). The display content on the display unit 392C is controlled by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 based on a variable display command or the like transmitted from the MPU 51.

[Touch operation effect execution process]
Here, FIGS. 56 and 57 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the game machine according to the present embodiment.

In the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, a predetermined area (specification of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 during the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4. When a touch operation is performed on the area), the touch operation effect can be executed.

Further, in the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON during the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4. If so, a specific effect different from the touch effect is executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C.

<Step S3300>
As shown in FIG. 56, in step S3300, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6. This effect execution command is a command for executing a touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341 or executing a specific effect on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C, and is described in steps S3305, S3306, and S3210, which will be described later. It is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S3311, S3315, step S3316, step S3305, or S3320. Whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 is determined by, for example, when the effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in steps S3305, S3210, S3320 or S3321 described later, the transmitted flag is set to ON. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the transmitted flag is set to ON.

Here, the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process when the effect execution command has been transmitted (step S3300: Yes), and steps the process when the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3300: No). Move to S3301.

<Step S3301>
When the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3300: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d based on the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags (design). It is determined (step S3301) whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the display unit 341. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the state of the touch operation (touch operation state) with respect to the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 corresponds to the start of the touch operation or the continuation of the touch operation. Specifically, the MPU 51 performs a touch operation when the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21 is "off", "on", and "off". When the state corresponds to the start of touch operation and the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags is "on", "off", and "off", it is determined that the touch operation state corresponds to continuation of touch operation (Fig.). 22 (B)). The touch operation detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d in the step S3301 includes a case where the touch operation is performed by the player and a case where the movable accessory member 39C is operated. That is, the MPU 51 may erroneously detect that the touch operation state is the start of the touch operation or the continuation of the touch operation when the movable accessory member 39C is operated. Here, when it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3302, and the touch operation is performed by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. If it is not detected and determined (step S3301: No), the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Step S3302>
When it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first touch operation acceptance period R1 (see FIG. 27) (step S3301: Yes). S3302). Whether or not it is the first touch operation acceptance period R1 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, and for determining whether or not it is the first touch operation acceptance period R1. It may be judged by operating the counter. Here, when the MPU 51 is in the first touch operation acceptance period R1 (step S3302: Yes), the process shifts to step S3303, and when it is not the first touch operation acceptance period R1 (step S3302: No), the process is stepped. Move to S3307.

<Step S3303>
In the case of the first touch operation acceptance period R1 (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the movable accessory member 39C is operating is set to ON. Determine (step S3303). Here, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to on (step S3303: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3304 and sets the movable accessory member operating flag to off. In the case (step S3303: No), the process shifts to step S3306.

<Steps S3304 and S3305>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to on (step S3303: Yes), the MPU 51 determines a specific effect (an effect different from the touch operation effect) to be executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C. (Step S3304). Then, the MPU 51 instead of causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23), the specific effect determined in step S3304. Is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3305) to execute a specific effect execution command for executing the touch operation effect execution process on the display unit 392C, and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. As a result, the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C executes a specific effect instead of the touch operation effect for the first touch operation acceptance period R1 on the symbol display unit 341.

<Step S3306>
When no object exists in the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (step S3303: No), the MPU 51 is the first for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1. A touch operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3306), and the touch operation effect execution process is completed. As a result, the symbol display unit 341 executes the touch operation effect during the first touch operation reception period R1.

<Step S3307>
If it is not the first touch operation acceptance period R1 (step S3302: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (see FIG. 27) (step S3307). Whether or not the second touch operation acceptance period is R2 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, and for determining whether or not the second touch operation acceptance period is R2. It may be judged by operating the counter. Here, when the MPU 51 is in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (step S3307: Yes), the process shifts to step S3308, and when it is not the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (step S3307: No), the process is illustrated. The process proceeds to step S3312 of 57.

<Step S3308>
In the case of the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (step S3307: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the movable accessory member 39C is operating is set to ON. Determine (step S3308). Here, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to on (step S3308: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3309 and sets the movable accessory member operating flag to off. In the case (step S3308: No), the process shifts to step S3311.

<Steps S3309 and S3310>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3308: Yes), the MPU 51 determines a specific effect (an effect different from the touch operation effect) to be executed by the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C. (Step S3309). Then, the MPU 51 instead of causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23), the specific effect determined in step S3309. Is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3310) to execute a specific effect execution command for executing the touch operation effect execution process on the display unit 392C, and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. As a result, in the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C, a specific effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect for the second reception period R2 in the symbol display unit 341.

<Step S3311>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to off (step S3308: No), the MPU 51 has a second touch for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the second touch operation acceptance period R2. The operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3311), and the touch operation effect execution process is completed. As a result, the symbol display unit 341 executes the touch operation effect during the second touch operation reception period R2.

<Step S3312>
As shown in FIG. 57, when it is not the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (step S3307: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the third touch operation acceptance period R3 (see FIG. 27) (step S3312). .. Whether or not the third touch operation acceptance period is R3 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, and for determining whether or not the third touch operation acceptance period is R3. It may be judged by operating the counter. Here, when the MPU 51 is in the third touch operation acceptance period R3 (step S3312: Yes), the process shifts to step S3313, and when it is not in the third touch operation acceptance period R3 (step S3312: No), the process is stepped. Move to S3317.

<Step S3313>
In the case of the third touch operation acceptance period R3 (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the movable accessory member 39C is operating is set to ON. Determine (step S3313). Here, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to on (step S3313: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3314 and sets the movable accessory member operating flag to off. In the case (step S3313: No), the process shifts to step S3316.

<Steps S3314 and S3315>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3313: Yes), the MPU 51 determines a specific effect (an effect different from the touch operation effect) to be executed by the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C. (Step S3314). Then, the MPU 51 instead of causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23), the specific effect determined in step S3314. Is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3315) to execute a specific effect execution command for executing the touch operation effect execution process on the display unit 392C, and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. As a result, the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C executes a specific effect instead of the touch operation effect for the third touch operation acceptance period R3 on the symbol display unit 341.

<Step S3316>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to off (step S3313: No), the MPU 51 has the third touch for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the third touch operation acceptance period R3. The operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3316), and the touch operation effect execution process is completed. As a result, the symbol display unit 341 executes the touch operation effect during the third touch operation reception period R3.

<Step S3317>
If it is not the third touch operation acceptance period R3 (step S3312: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 (see FIG. 27) (step S3317). Whether or not the fourth touch operation acceptance period is R4 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, and for determining whether or not the fourth touch operation acceptance period is R4. It may be judged by operating the counter. Here, when the MPU 51 is in the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 (step S3317: Yes), the process shifts to step S3318, and when it is not the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 (step S3317: No), the first to first steps. Since it can be determined that the fourth touch operation acceptance period is neither R1 to R4, the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Step S3318>
In the case of the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 (step S3317: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the movable accessory member 39C is operating is set to ON. Determine (step S3318). Here, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to on (step S3318: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3319 and sets the movable accessory member operating flag to off. In the case (step S3318: No), the process shifts to step S3321.

<Steps S3319 and S3320>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3318: Yes), the MPU 51 determines a specific effect (an effect different from the touch operation effect) to be executed by the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C. (Step S3319). Then, the MPU 51 instead of causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23), the specific effect determined in step S3319. Is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3320) to execute a specific effect execution command for executing the touch operation effect execution process on the display unit 392C, and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. As a result, the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C executes a specific effect instead of the touch operation effect for the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 on the symbol display unit 341.

<Step S3321>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to off (step S3318: No), the MPU 51 has a fourth touch for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4. The operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3321), and the touch operation effect execution process is completed. As a result, the symbol display unit 341 executes the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4.

By the way, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, when it is determined that an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, if the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, a plurality of detections are performed. By ignoring the detection results of the sensors 38a to 38d, the touch operation effect is not executed. However, there is a concern that interest in the game may be diminished because the touch operation effect that should be originally executed is not executed.

On the other hand, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the movable accessory member operating flag is turned on during the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 in which the touch operation effect can be executed on the symbol display unit 341. When set, instead of executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341, the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C executes a specific effect different from the touch operation effect. Therefore, in the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 in which the touch operation effect can be executed on the symbol display unit 341, the touch operation effect is executed as long as the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. You can limit what is done. In addition to that, instead of the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341, the specific effect is executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C whose visibility is not hindered when the movable accessory member 39C is operated. Therefore, when the specific effect is executed on the display unit that the player does not expect, not only what kind of touch operation effect is executed, but also on which display unit the effect is executed. You can also pay attention to that. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from diminishing, and thus the interest in the game can be improved.

On the condition that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, the symbol display unit is set to turn on the movable accessory member operating flag during the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4. Instead of executing the touch operation effect at 341, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect may be executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C, and the lottery result is a probabilistic jackpot. As a condition, the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C may execute a specific effect different from the touch operation effect. In this way, on condition that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, the specific effect is executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C instead of the touch operation effect being executed on the symbol display unit 341. By doing so, it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the game, and on condition that the lottery result is a probabilistic jackpot, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON during the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, instead of executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341. Although the specific effect is executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C, the same effect as the touch operation effect may be executed on the display unit 392C. That is, the touch operation effect to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 may be executed by the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C.

Further, in the present embodiment, the specific effect is executed when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to on during all the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, but the specific effect does not necessarily accept all touch operations. It is not necessary to execute it in a period, and it is sufficient that the specific effect is executed in at least one operation acceptance period.

[7th Embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment described above, the game machine 10 including the main movable accessory member 39A and the sub movable accessory member 39B having the display unit 391B has been described. Further, in the fourth embodiment described above, the case where the touch operation effect is executed not only on the symbol display unit 341 but also on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B has been described. Further, in the fourth embodiment described above, while the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (the stage where it is determined to operate the main movable accessory member 39A (main movable accessory member 39A). From the stage where the main movable accessory member 39A is in the standby position immediately before the start of operation) to the stage when the return of the main movable accessory member 39A is confirmed and the main movable accessory member 39A is in the standby position. ), The case where the detection results of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B are ignored and the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted has been described.

In the sixth embodiment described above, the gaming machine 10 including the movable accessory member 39C having the display unit 392C has been described. Further, in the sixth embodiment described above, the movable accessory member operating flag is set during the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 for executing the touch operation effect for the touch operation in the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. When it is set to ON (from the stage when it is decided to operate the movable accessory member 39C (immediately before the operation of the movable accessory member 39C is started) until the return of the movable accessory member 39C is confirmed. (Pauses), a case where a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C has been described.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is common to the above-described fourth embodiment in that it includes a main movable accessory member and a sub-movable accessory member having a display unit, while the above-mentioned sixth embodiment. Unlike the fourth embodiment described above, the main movable accessory member is provided with a display unit, but is common to the sixth embodiment described above.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON during the touch operation acceptance period for executing the touch operation effect for the touch operation on the front side of the display unit of the sub movable accessory member. In that case, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit of the main movable accessory member, provided that the touch operation is performed on the front side of the display unit of the sub movable accessory member. It is different from the fourth embodiment and the sixth embodiment described above.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment and the sixth embodiment described above.

Here, FIGS. 58 and 59 are diagrams showing an example of a specific effect executed by the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A. Note that FIG. 58 shows an example in which a specific effect is executed when the touch operation reception effect clearly indicating that the touch operation reception period is not executed (first touch operation reception period R1), and FIG. 59 shows the touch operation reception effect. Is an example in which a specific effect is executed when is executed (third touch operation acceptance period R3).

As shown in FIG. 58, in the first touch operation reception period R1, the touch operation reception effect that clearly indicates that it is the touch operation reception period is not executed, but in the first touch operation reception period R1, the sub-movable accessory member 39B When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to on when a touch operation is performed on the front side of the display unit 391B, the main movable accessory member is not the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. On the display unit 392A of 39A, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 59, in the third touch operation reception period R3, a touch operation reception effect clearly indicating that the touch operation reception period is executed is executed, and the sub-movable accessory member 39B is displayed in the third touch operation reception period R3. Even when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to on when a touch operation is performed on the front side of the portion 391B, the main movable accessory member is not displayed on the sub movable accessory member 39B, but the main movable accessory member. On the display unit 392A of the member 39A, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed.

In the first touch operation acceptance period R1 or the third touch operation acceptance period R3, when a touch operation is performed on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, the main movable accessory member operating flag is set. When it is not set to ON, the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B as in the fourth embodiment described above (see FIG. 49). Further, the specific effect may be an effect showing the degree of expectation for the big hit lottery result (big hit expectation), or may be an effect unrelated to the big hit lottery result, but in the present embodiment, the big hit expectation is set. It is executed as an effect to show (see FIG. 40).

[Touch operation effect execution process]
Here, FIGS. 60 and 61 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the game machine according to the present embodiment.

In the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, in the second touch operation reception period R2 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4, the main movable accessory member operating flag is turned on as in the fourth embodiment described above. From the time it is set (the stage where it is determined to operate the main movable accessory member 39A (the stage where the main movable accessory member 39A is in the standby position immediately before the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is started). , Until the stage where the return of the main movable accessory member 39A is confirmed and the main movable accessory member 39A is in the standby position), the detection results of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B are ignored. , Execution of the touch operation effect is restricted (steps S3101 to S3106 in FIG. 60).

Further, in the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to off in the first touch operation reception period R1 and the third touch operation reception period R3, the sub movable combination When an object exists on the front side of the display unit 391B of the object member 39B, the touch operation effect is produced by the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A instead of the touch operation effect by the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. Specific effects different from those in the above are executed (steps S3401 to S3105 and steps S3407 to S3110 in FIG. 61).

<Steps S3101 to S3106>
As shown in FIG. 60, in the MPU 51, when an object exists in a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (step S3101: Yes), the main movable accessory member operating flag is turned on. If is set to (step S3102: Yes), the touch operation effect execution process is terminated without executing the touch operation effect. On the other hand, if the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to off (step S3102: No), the condition is that the second touch operation acceptance period R2 or the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 (step S3103 or). Yes) in S3105, a touch operation effect execution command for executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341 is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3104 or S3106).

<Step S3400>
As shown in FIG. 61, in the MPU 51, when it is not determined that the main touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (the object does not exist in the predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341). (Case) (step S3401: No), it is determined whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3400). This effect execution command is a command for executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341 or the sub movable accessory member and executing the specific effect on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A, and is a command for executing the specific effect on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A. Alternatively, it is transmitted to the display control device 6 in S3411. Whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 has been transmitted, for example, when the effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S3104, S3106, or step S3405, S3406, S3410 or S3411 described later. It can be determined by setting the flag to on and checking whether the transmitted flag is set to on.

Here, the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process when the effect execution command has been transmitted (step S3400: Yes), and steps the process when the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3400: No). Move to S3401.

<Step S3401>
When the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3400: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D based on the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags (sub-movable). It is determined (whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the display unit 391B of the accessory member 39B) (step S3401). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the state (sub-touch operation state) of the touch operation (sub-touch operation) with respect to the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B corresponds to the start of the sub-touch operation or the continuation of the sub-touch operation. Specifically, in the MPU 51, when the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags is "off", "on", and "off", the sub-touch operation state corresponds to the start of the sub-touch operation, and the first to first sub-touch operations are started. 3 When the combination of the sub-touch operation pattern flags is “on”, “off”, and “off”, it is determined that the sub-touch operation state corresponds to the continuation of the sub-touch operation (see FIG. 46 (B)).

Here, when it is determined that the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3402, and the sub-detection sensor 38C and 38D detects the sub-touch operation. If it is not determined (step S3401: No), the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Step S3402>
In step S3402, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first touch operation acceptance period R1 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the first touch operation acceptance period R1 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, and for determining whether or not it is the first touch operation acceptance period R1. It may be judged by operating the counter. Here, when the MPU 51 is in the first touch operation acceptance period R1 (step S3402: Yes), the process shifts to step S3403, and when it is not the first touch operation acceptance period R1 (step S3402: No), the process is stepped. Move to S3407.

<Step S3403>
In the case of the first touch operation acceptance period R1 (step S3402: Yes), in the MPU 51, whether or not the main movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the main movable accessory member 39A is operating is set to ON. (Step S3403). Here, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to on (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3404, and the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to off. If so (step S3403: No), the process proceeds to step S3406.

<Steps S3404 and S3405>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to on (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 51 is executed by the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A (an effect different from the touch operation effect). Is determined (step S3404). Then, the MPU 51 instead of causing the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23), step S3404. A specific effect execution command for executing the specific effect determined in step 2 on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3605), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. As a result, instead of executing the touch operation effect for the first touch operation acceptance period R1 on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, the specific effect is executed on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A. To.

<Step S3406>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to off (step S3403: No), the MPU 51 displays the touch operation effect in the first touch operation acceptance period R1 on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. A first touch operation effect execution command to be executed is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3406), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. As a result, the display unit 391B executes the touch operation effect during the first touch operation reception period R1.

<Step S3407>
In step S3407, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the third touch operation acceptance period R3 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not the third touch operation acceptance period is R3 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, and for determining whether or not the third touch operation acceptance period is R3. It may be judged by operating the counter. Here, when the MPU 51 is in the third touch operation acceptance period R3 (step S3407: Yes), the process shifts to step S3408, and when it is not in the third touch operation acceptance period R3 (step S3407: No), the touch operation is performed. End the production execution process.

<Step S3408>
In the case of the third touch operation acceptance period R3 (step S3407: Yes), in the MPU 51, whether or not the main movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the main movable accessory member 39A is operating is set to ON. (Step S3408). Here, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to on (step S3408: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3409 and sets the main movable accessory member operating flag to off. If so (step S3408: No), the process proceeds to step S3411.

<Steps S3409 and S3410>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to on (step S3408: Yes), the MPU 51 is executed by the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A (an effect different from the touch operation effect). Is determined (step S3409). Then, the MPU 51 instead of causing the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23), step S3409. A specific effect execution command for executing the specific effect determined in step 2 on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3410), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. As a result, instead of executing the touch operation effect for the third touch operation acceptance period R3 on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, the specific effect is executed on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A. To.

<Step S3411>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to off (step S3408: No), the MPU 51 displays the touch operation effect in the third touch operation acceptance period R3 on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. A third touch operation effect execution command for execution is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3411), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. As a result, the display unit 391B executes the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3.

By the way, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, when it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (when an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341), the movable combination If the object member operating flag is set to ON, the touch operation effect is not executed by ignoring the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. However, there is a concern that interest in the game may be diminished because the touch operation effect that should be originally executed is not executed.

On the other hand, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the game machine 10 is movable in the first touch operation acceptance period R1 or the third touch operation acceptance period R3 in which the touch operation effect can be executed on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. When the accessory member operating flag is set to on, the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A touches instead of executing the touch operation effect on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. A specific effect different from the operation effect is executed. Therefore, in the first or third touch operation acceptance periods R1 and R3 in which the touch operation effect can be executed on the symbol display unit 341, the touch operation effect is executed when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. You can limit what you do. In addition, in the first or third touch operation acceptance periods R1 and R3, the visual recognition is not hindered when the main movable accessory member 39A is operated instead of the touch operation effect on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. A specific effect is executed on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A. Therefore, when the specific effect is executed on the display unit that the player does not expect, not only what kind of touch operation effect is executed, but also on which display unit the effect is executed. You can also pay attention to that. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from diminishing, and thus the interest in the game can be improved.

If the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, and the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON in the first touch operation acceptance period R1 or the third touch operation acceptance period R3, Instead of executing the touch operation effect on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A may execute a specific effect different from the touch operation effect. Often, the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A may execute a specific effect different from the touch operation effect on the condition that the lottery result is a probabilistic jackpot. In this way, on condition that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, the display unit of the main movable accessory member 39A is replaced with the touch operation effect being executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. If the specific effect is executed at 392A, the interest of the game can be effectively improved, and the interest of the game can be further effectively improved on condition that the lottery result is a probabilistic jackpot. Can be made to.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON in the first touch operation reception period R1 or the third touch operation reception period R3, the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341 is performed. The specific effect is executed on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A instead of the execution of the above, but the same effect as the touch operation effect may be executed on the display unit 392C. That is, the touch operation effect to be executed by the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B may be executed by the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A.

[8th Embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment described above, the game machine 10 including the main movable accessory member 39A and the sub movable accessory member 39B having the display unit 391B has been described. Further, in the fourth embodiment described above, the case where the touch operation effect is executed not only on the symbol display unit 341 but also on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B has been described. Further, in the fourth embodiment described above, while the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (the stage where it is determined to operate the main movable accessory member 39A (main movable accessory member 39A). From the stage where the main movable accessory member 39A is in the standby position immediately before the start of operation) to the stage when the return of the main movable accessory member 39A is confirmed and the main movable accessory member 39A is in the standby position. ), The case where the detection results of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B are ignored and the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted has been described.

On the other hand, the game machine according to the present embodiment is common to the fourth embodiment described above in that it includes a main movable accessory member and a sub movable accessory member having a display unit, but is on the front side of the symbol display unit. In the second touch operation acceptance period or the fourth touch operation acceptance period for executing the touch operation effect for the touch operation in the predetermined area, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to on, the sub movable The touch operation reception effect is executed on the display unit of the accessory member, and a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit of the main movable accessory member by the touch operation on the front side of the display unit of the sub movable accessory member. In that respect, it differs from the fourth embodiment described above.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect executed by the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the present embodiment, when the main movable accessory member 39A is operated during the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4, or during the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A, the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 Is started, the touch operation reception effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B instead of the symbol display unit 341 on which the touch operation effect is executed. Then, while the touch operation reception effect is being executed on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B during the fourth touch operation reception period R4, the presence of an object on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. Is detected (when a touch operation is performed), a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A.

Further, although not shown, when the main movable accessory member 39A is operated during the second touch operation acceptance period R2, or during the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A, the second touch operation acceptance period R2 is started. Also in this case, the touch operation reception effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B instead of the symbol display unit 341 on which the touch operation effect is executed. Then, while the touch operation reception effect is being executed on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B during the second touch operation reception period R2, the presence of an object on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. Is detected (when a touch operation is performed), a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A.

Further, in the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4, if the main movable accessory member operating flag is not set to ON, the touch operation effect is executed on the symbol display unit 341.

The specific effect may be an effect indicating the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result (big hit expectation) or an effect unrelated to the jackpot lottery result, but in the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation is determined. It is executed as an effect to show (see FIG. 40).

[Touch operation effect execution process]
Here, FIGS. 63 and 64 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed in the present embodiment.

In the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, at least a part of the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 and the period in which the movable accessory member operating flag is set to be on overlap. In this case, the execution of the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341 is restricted, and the touch operation reception effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. Then, if the touch operation is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B while the touch operation reception effect is being executed, the display unit 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C is different from the touch operation effect. A specific effect is executed.

<Step S3500>
As shown in FIG. 63, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3500). In this effect execution command, the symbol display unit 341 executes a touch operation effect, the display unit 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C executes a specific effect different from the touch operation effect, and the display unit of the sub movable accessory member 39B. It is a command for executing the touch operation reception effect or the touch operation effect in 391B, and is transmitted to the display control device 6 in steps S3105, S3107, S3511, S3513 and S3109, S3111 or S3516 of FIG. 64, which will be described later. Whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 is determined when the effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in steps S3105, S3107, S3511, S3513 and S3109, S3111 or S3516 of FIG. 64, which will be described later. It can be determined by setting the sent flag to on and checking whether or not the sent flag is set to on.

Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3514 when the effect execution command has been transmitted (step S3500: Yes), and shifts the process to step S3501 when the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3500: No). Transition.

<Step S3501>
When the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3500: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D based on the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags (sub-movable). It is determined (whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the display unit 391B of the accessory member 39B) (step S3501). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the state (sub-touch operation state) of the touch operation (sub-touch operation) with respect to the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B corresponds to the start of the sub-touch operation or the continuation of the sub-touch operation. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines that the sub-touch operation state corresponds to the start of the sub-touch operation when the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags is "off", "on", and "off", and the first -When the combination of the third sub-touch operation pattern flags is "on", "off", and "off", it is determined that the sub-touch operation state corresponds to the continuation of the sub-touch operation (see FIG. 46 (B)).

Here, when it is determined that the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3108 of FIG. 64 and performs the sub-touch operation by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D. If it is not determined that is detected (step S3501: No), the process proceeds to step S3502.

<Step S3502>
When it is not determined that the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3501: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (see FIG. 27) (step S3502). .. Whether or not the second touch operation acceptance period is R2 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, and for determining whether or not the second touch operation acceptance period is R2. It may be judged by operating the counter. Here, when the MPU 51 is in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (step S3502: Yes), the process shifts to step S3503, and when it is not in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (step S3502: No), the process is stepped. Move to S3508.

<Step S3503>
In the case of the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (step S3502: Yes), in the MPU 51, whether or not the main movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the main movable accessory member 39A is operating is set to ON. (Step S3503). Here, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to on (step S3503: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3504 and sets the main movable accessory member operating flag to off. If so (step S3503: No), the process proceeds to step S3506.

<Steps S3504 and S3505>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to on (step S3503: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the specific effect reception flag to on (step S3504). This specific effect reception flag is displayed on the display unit 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON during the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2 and R4. It is a flag indicating that the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B is accepting the touch operation for executing the touch operation effect, and is referred to in step S3514 described later. Then, the MPU 51 transmits a touch operation reception effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S3605), and ends the touch operation effect execution process. As a result, instead of executing the touch operation effect for the second touch operation acceptance period R2 on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B, the main movable combination on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. The touch operation reception effect indicating that the touch operation for executing the touch operation effect is accepted by the display unit 392C of the object member 39C is executed.

<Steps S3506 and S3507>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to off (step S3503: No), the MPU 51 is mainly touched by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B based on the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags. It is determined whether or not the operation is detected (whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341) (step S3506). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the state (main touch operation state) of the touch operation (main touch operation) with respect to the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 corresponds to the start of the touch operation or the continuation of the touch operation. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines that the main touch operation state corresponds to the start of the main touch operation when the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags is "off", "on", and "off". Then, when the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags is "on", "off", and "off", it is determined that the main touch operation state corresponds to the continuation of the main touch operation (FIG. 46 (A). )reference). Then, when it is determined that the main touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3506: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the second touch operation acceptance period R2. A second touch operation effect execution command for the purpose is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3507), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. As a result, the symbol display unit 341 executes the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2. On the other hand, when the object does not exist in the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (step S3506: No), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process without executing the touch operation effect.

<Step S3508>
If it is not the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (step S3502: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 (see FIG. 27) (step S3508). Whether or not the fourth touch operation acceptance period is R4 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, and for determining whether or not the fourth touch operation acceptance period is R4. It may be judged by operating the counter. Here, when the MPU 51 is in the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 (step S3708: Yes), the process shifts to step S3509, and when it is not the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 (step S3708: No), the touch operation is performed. End the production execution process.

<Step S3509>
In the case of the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 (step S3508: Yes), in the MPU 51, whether or not the main movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the main movable accessory member 39A is operating is set to ON. (Step S3509). Here, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to on (step S3509: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3510 and sets the main movable accessory member operating flag to off. If so (step S3509: No), the process proceeds to step S3512.

<Steps S3510 and S3511>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3509: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the reception flag for specific effect to ON (step S3510) in the same manner as in step S3504, and touch operation reception effect. The execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3611), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. As a result, instead of executing the touch operation effect for the second touch operation acceptance period R2 on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B, the main movable combination on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. The touch operation reception effect indicating that the touch operation for executing the touch operation effect is accepted by the display unit 392C of the object member 39C is executed.

<Steps S3512 and S3513>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to off (step S3509: No), the MPU 51 is main based on the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags by the same procedure as in step S3506. It is determined whether or not the main touch operation is detected by the detection sensors 38A and 38B (whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341). Then, when it is determined that the main touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3512: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4. A fourth touch operation effect execution command for the purpose is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3513), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. As a result, the symbol display unit 341 executes the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4. On the other hand, when it is determined that the main touch operation is not detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3512: No), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process without executing the touch operation effect.

<Step S3514>
If the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3500: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the specific effect reception flag set to be on in step S3510 or S3516 is set to on (step S3514). Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3515 of FIG. 64 when the reception flag for specific effect is set to on (step S3501: Yes), and sets the reception flag for specific effect to off. (Step S3501: No), the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Step S3515>
When the reception flag for specific effect is set to ON (step S3514: Yes), as shown in FIG. 64, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second or fourth touch operation reception period is R2 or R4. (Step S3515). Here, when the MPU 51 is in the second or fourth touch operation acceptance period R2, R4 (step S3515: Yes), the process shifts to step S3516, and the process is not in the second or fourth touch operation acceptance period R2, R4. (Step S3515: No), the process proceeds to step S3519.

<Step S3516>
In the case of the second or fourth touch operation acceptance period R2, R4 (step S3515: Yes), the MPU 51 is based on the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags by the same procedure as in step S3501 of FIG. It is determined whether or not the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B) (step S3516). Here, when it is determined that the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3516: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3517, and the sub-detection sensor 38C and 38D detects the sub-touch operation. If it is not determined (step S3516: No), the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Steps S3517 and S3518>
When it is determined that the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3516: Yes), the MPU 51 is executed by the display unit 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C (an effect different from the touch operation effect). ) Is determined (step S3517). Then, the MPU 51 transmits a specific effect execution command for executing the specific effect determined in step S3517 on the display unit 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C to the display control device 6 (step S3618), and the touch operation effect. End the execution process. As a result, instead of executing the touch operation effect for the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2 and R4 on the symbol display unit 341, the specific effect is executed on the display unit 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C. ..

<Step S3519>
When the second or fourth touch operation acceptance period is not R2 or R4 (step S3515: No), or when the specific effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3618), the specific effect reception flag is set to off. , Ends the touch operation effect execution process. That is, when the second or fourth touch operation acceptance period R2 or R4 ends, or when it is determined that the specific effect is executed, the specific effect flag that allows the specific effect to be executed is turned off. Set to and end the reception for executing a specific effect.

<Steps S3108 to S3111>
When an object exists on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B (step S3507: Yes), the MPU 51 is subject to the first touch operation acceptance period R1 or the third touch operation acceptance period R3. (Yes in step S3108 or S3110), the first or third touch operation effect execution command for executing the touch operation effect on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3109 or). S3111). Then, when the MPU 51 transmits the first or third touch operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S3109 or S3111), or when it is not the first touch operation acceptance period R1 or the third touch operation acceptance period R3 (step S3109 or S3111). In step S3108 or S3110, No), the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

By the way, in the above-described first embodiment, if an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 and the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, the plurality of detection sensors 38a to By ignoring the detection result at 38d, the touch operation effect is not executed. However, there is a concern that interest in the game may be diminished because the touch operation effect that should be originally executed is not executed.

On the other hand, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, at least one of the second touch operation acceptance period R2 or the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 and the period in which the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. When the units overlap, the execution of the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341 is restricted, and the touch operation reception effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. If a touch operation is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B while the touch operation reception effect is being executed, the display unit 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C is different from the touch operation effect. A specific effect is executed. Therefore, in the second or fourth touch operation acceptance period R2 and R4 in which the touch operation effect can be executed on the symbol display unit 341, the touch operation is performed even when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. The reception production is executed. In addition to that, in the second or fourth touch operation acceptance period R2, R4, instead of executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341, the sub-movable accessory whose visibility is not hindered when the main movable accessory member 39A is operated The touch operation reception effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the member 39B, and the specific effect is executed by performing the touch operation on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B during the execution of the touch operation reception effect. Therefore, the player executes the touch operation reception effect on the unexpected display unit, and further, the specific effect is executed by performing the touch operation on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B for the unexpected touch operation reception. .. As a result, the player can pay attention not only to what type (expectation degree) of the touch operation effect is executed, but also to which display unit the effect is executed. It is possible to suppress the diminished interest in the game and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 or the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 on the condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Instead of executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341, the touch operation reception effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, and the specific effect is executed on the display unit 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C. The touch operation reception effect or the specific effect may be executed on condition that the lottery result is a probabilistic jackpot. In this way, on condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, instead of executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341, the touch operation reception effect or the specific effect is executed. For example, the interest of the game can be effectively improved, and the interest of the game can be further effectively improved on condition that the lottery result is a probabilistic jackpot.

[9th Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, the movable accessory member operation effect in which the movable accessory member moves between the standby position and the operating position is executed, and the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d execute the front side of the symbol display unit 341. The case of detecting the presence of an object in a predetermined area of the above has been described. Further, in the first embodiment described above, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (the stage where it is determined to operate the movable accessory member 39 (the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is performed). From (immediately before the start) until the return of the movable accessory member 39 is confirmed), the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored, and the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted. ..

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in addition to the movable accessory member operation effect, the fake operation in which the movable accessory member is moved between the standby position and the intermediate position set between the standby position and the operating position. It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the effect is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, one detection sensor 38 is provided, and the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is detected by the detection sensor 38, which is different from the above-described first embodiment. different.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 65 is a movable combination referred to when the effect pattern type is a special reach effect in the movable accessory member operation timing determination process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the game machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the thing member operation timing selection table C. In FIG. 65, “◎” indicates that the movable accessory member 39 is operated as a jackpot confirmation effect (one-shot notification effect), and “○” indicates a movable accessory member as a chance-up effect (big hit expectation suggestion effect). 39 is operated, "Δ" indicates that the movable accessory member 39 is fake operated (the movable accessory member is operated to an intermediate position instead of the standby position), and "x" indicates that the movable accessory member 39 is operated. Is not activated, and "-" means that the corresponding operating period does not exist.

Here, FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of a fake operation effect of a movable accessory member executed by the game machine according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 66, in the fake operation effect, the movable accessory member 39 in the standby position moves to the intermediate position set between the operation position (position indicated by the virtual line) and the standby position, and then the standby position. Return to. Further, a detection sensor 38 for detecting the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is arranged in the central portion on the right side of the symbol display unit 341. In this detection sensor 38, the movable accessory member 39 is not detected when the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position or the intermediate position, and the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position. Detected.

Returning to the description of FIG. 65, the movable accessory member operation timing selection table C referred to when the effect pattern type is the special reach effect pattern is the effect pattern type (effect patterns Z1 to Z5) of the special reach effect patterns. Whether or not to operate the movable accessory member 39 at each of the operation timings G1 to G6 of the movable accessory member 39 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery (whether or not to execute the movable accessory member operation effect). It is stipulated whether or not the movable accessory member 39 is fake-operated.

For example, when the effect pattern type is the effect pattern Z1 and the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, the movable accessory member 39 is fake-operated at the operation timing G2 of the operation timings G1 to G6, and the operation timing G3. The movable accessory member 39 is operated, and the movable accessory member 39 is not operated at the remaining operation timings G1, G4 to G6. That is, when the effect pattern Z1 is selected when the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, the movable accessory member operation effect is executed as a chance-up effect only immediately after the start of the super reach effect in the special reach effect pattern.

Further, when the effect pattern type is the effect pattern Z3 and the lottery result is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the movable accessory member 39 is operated at the operation timings G5 and G6 of the operation timings G1 to G6, and the remaining operations are performed. At timings G1 to G4, the movable accessory member 39 is neither operated nor fake operated. That is, when the effect pattern Z3 is selected when the lottery result is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the movable accessory member is used as a jackpot confirmation effect (one-shot notification effect) immediately after the start and the end of the special reach effect in the special reach effect pattern. The operation effect is executed.

When the effect pattern type is the effect pattern Z4 and the lottery result is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the fake operation effect is executed at the operation timing G2 of the operation timings G1 to G6, and the operation timings G3, G5, and G5. The movable accessory member 39 is operated, and at the remaining operation timings G1 and G4, the movable accessory member 39 is neither operated nor fake. At the operation timings G5 and G6, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is executed as a jackpot confirmation effect (one-shot notification effect). That is, when the effect pattern Z4 is selected when the lottery result is a 16R normal jackpot, the fake operation effect is executed immediately after the start of the normal reach effect in the special reach effect pattern, and it is movable as a chance-up effect immediately after the start of the super effect. The accessory member operation effect is executed, and the movable accessory member operation effect is executed as a jackpot confirmation effect (one-shot notification effect) immediately after the start and the end of the special reach effect.

Note that FIG. 65 shows the movable accessory member operation timing selection table C that is referred to when the effect pattern type is a special reach effect, but when the effect pattern type is a normal reach effect pattern or a super reach effect pattern. Alternatively, the movable accessory member 39 may be fake-operated.

[Movable accessory member operation processing]
Here, FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the movable accessory member operation process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the game machine according to the present embodiment. In the movable accessory member operation process, in addition to the operation up to the operation position of the movable accessory member 39, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 up to the intermediate position is controlled.

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 67, in step S3601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39. That is, in the MPU 51, the start of the operation timings G1 to G6 (see FIGS. 27 and 65) of the movable accessory member 39 whose counter value of the fluctuation display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Determine if the value corresponding to the time point has been reached. Here, when the MPU 51 is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3601: Yes), the process shifts to step S3602, and when it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3601: No). , The process proceeds to step S3606.

<Steps S3602-S3605>
When it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 due to the fake operation (step S3602). When the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 is due to the fake operation (step S3602: Yes), the motor driver 39c for driving the motor 39a that applies the driving force to the movable accessory member 39 is connected to the movable accessory member 39. The first operation start signal for moving from the standby position to the intermediate position is output (step S3603), and the movable accessory member operation process is completed. As a result, the motor driver 39c moves the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the intermediate position by controlling the motor 39a.

On the other hand, when it is not the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 due to the fake operation (step S3602: No), that is, when it is the timing to operate the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operation position, the movable accessory member 39 is A second operation start signal for moving the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operating position is output to the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force (step S3604). Then, the MPU 51 sets the movable accessory member operating flag to ON (step S3605), and ends the movable accessory member operation process. As a result, the motor driver 39c moves the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operating position by controlling the motor 39a.

<Steps S3606 and S3607>
When it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3601: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3606). That is, in the MPU 51, the end of the operation timings G1 to G6 (see FIGS. 27 to 30) of the movable accessory member 39 whose counter value of the fluctuation display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Determine if the value corresponding to the time point has been reached. Here, when the MPU 51 is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3606: Yes), the MPU 51 outputs a return signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force to the movable accessory member 39. (Step S3607), the movable accessory member operation process is completed. As a result, the motor driver 39c moves the movable accessory member 39 from the operating position or the intermediate position to the standby position by controlling the motor 39a.

<Steps S3608 to S3610>
If it is not the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3606: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby position based on the detection signal from the return detection unit 39b (step S3606: No). Step S3608). Here, when the movable accessory member 39 returns to the standby position (step S3608: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member 39 returns from the intermediate position to the standby position based on the fake operation. (Step S3609). When the MPU 51 returns the movable accessory member 39 from the intermediate position to the standby position based on the fake operation (step S3609: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the movable accessory member operation process and ends the movable accessory member operation process based on the fake operation. If it is not the return to the standby position of 39 (step S3609: No), that is, if the movable accessory member 39 is returning from the operating position to the standby position, the movable accessory member operating flag is set to off and the movable accessory member 39 is returned to the standby position. The accessory member operation process is completed.

In the present embodiment, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the intermediate position, the movable accessory member 39 is not detected by the detection sensor 38. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the intermediate position, that is, when the movable accessory member 39 is fake-operated, the touch operation effect is performed on condition that the touch operation is performed during the touch operation acceptance period. Is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of the touch operation effect from being restricted even in the case of the fake operation of the movable accessory member 39, and by preventing the execution of the touch operation effect from being restricted more than necessary, the game can be played. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In this embodiment, while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, the touch operation effect is executed by ignoring the detection signal from the detection sensor 38 as in the first embodiment described above. It may be restricted that the touch operation effect is executed by not performing the detection confirmation process from the detection sensor 38 as in the second embodiment described above. In other words, the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted between the time when the motor 39a is determined to be driven in order to move the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operating position and the time when the driving of the motor 39a is started. Is started, and when it is detected by the return detection unit 39b that the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby position, the restriction on the execution of the touch operation effect may be released.

Further, when the period in which the movable accessory member operating flag is set and the touch operation acceptance period overlap, a specific effect (see FIG. 40) may be executed instead of the touch operation effect. .. In this case, the specific effect may be such that the movable accessory member 39A includes a display unit (see FIG. 54), and the movable accessory member 39A may be executed on the display unit, or the sub-movable having the display unit. As the accessory member is provided (see FIG. 43), it may be executed on the display unit of the sub-movable accessory member.

[10th Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, the movable accessory member operation effect in which the movable accessory member moves between the standby position and the operating position is executed, and the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d execute the front side of the symbol display unit 341. The case of detecting the presence of an object in a predetermined area of the above has been described. Further, in the first embodiment described above, when the movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the movable accessory member 39 is operating is set to ON, detection by a plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d is performed. The case where the result is ignored and the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted has been described.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the operation start timing of the movable accessory member (timing to start the operation of the movable accessory member) during the touch operation acceptance period, the operation of the movable accessory member is started (movable). It is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the execution of the movable accessory member operation effect is restricted by not executing the process of starting the accessory member operation effect).

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 68, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the movable accessory member operation process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

[Movable accessory member operation processing]
In the movable accessory member operating process of the present embodiment, a process of moving the movable accessory member between the standby position and the operating position is executed in the same manner as the movable accessory member operating process of the first embodiment described above. However, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is not started when any of the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, which is different from the movable accessory member operation process of the first embodiment described above. ..

<Step S3701>
As shown in FIG. 68, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3701). Specifically, the MPU 51 has operation timings G1 to G6 of the movable accessory member 39 determined in the movable accessory member operation timing determination process (step S2204 of the command determination process in FIG. 23) (see FIGS. 27 to 30). Judge whether or not the value corresponding to the start time of is reached. Here, when the MPU 51 is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3701: Yes), the process shifts to step S3702, and when it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3701: No). , The process proceeds to step S3705.

<Steps S3702-S3704>
When it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is during the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 (step S3702). Whether or not the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 can be determined can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, and the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4. It may be judged by operating a counter for judging whether or not it is. Here, when the MPU 51 is not in the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 (step S3502: No), the MPU 51 operates on the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force to the movable accessory member 39. Output the start signal. As a result, the motor driver 39c moves the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operating position by controlling the motor 39a. Then, the MPU 51 sets the return timing of the movable accessory member (step S3704), and ends the movable accessory member operation process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 51 is in the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 (step S2702: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the movable accessory member operation process. That is, in the present embodiment, even at the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39, when the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 are met, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is started. The operation process of the movable accessory member is terminated without any notice. As a result, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (execution of the movable accessory member operation effect) during the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 is restricted.

<Step S3705>
If it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3701: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 set in step S3704 (step S3705). Here, when the MPU 51 is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3705: Yes), the MPU 51 outputs a return signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force to the movable accessory member 39. (Step S3706), the movable accessory member operation process is completed. As a result, the motor driver 39c moves the movable accessory member 39 from the operating position to the standby position by controlling the motor 39a. On the other hand, when it is not the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3704: No), the MPU 51 ends the movable accessory member operation process.

As described above, as the conventional game machine, as in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as the variable game effect, the movable accessory member operating effect for operating the movable accessory member and the touch operation acceptance period In some cases, the touch operation effect is executed by the player performing a touch operation on the front side of the symbol display unit. In this type of gaming machine, the touch operation effect may be unexpectedly executed due to the operation of the movable accessory member within the touch operation acceptance period. That is, the touch operation effect may be executed by erroneously detecting that the operation of the movable accessory member is performed by the player.

On the other hand, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 for receiving the touch operation for executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341, the movable accessory member 39 Even at the operation start timing of, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is not started, and the operation of the movable accessory member is not executed. As a result, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the touch operation effect is executed because the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is erroneously detected as that the touch operation has been performed by the player. Can be prevented.

In the present embodiment, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is restricted in all of the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, but at least the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4. The operation of the movable accessory member 39 may be restricted during one touch operation acceptance period. For example, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is restricted during the first and second touch operation acceptance periods R1 and R2, while the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is restricted during the third and fourth touch operation acceptance periods R3 and R4. It is conceivable to execute the movable accessory member operation effect without doing so.

[11th Embodiment]
The tenth embodiment described above is a movable accessory member when it is determined that the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (timing to start the movable accessory member operation effect) in the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4. The case where the execution of the movable accessory member operation effect during the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 is restricted by not executing the process of starting the operation of 39 (starting the movable accessory member operation effect) has been described.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the operation start timing of the movable accessory member (timing to start the operation of the movable accessory member) during the touch operation acceptance period, the operation of the movable accessory member is started (movable). It is common with the tenth embodiment described above in that the process of starting the accessory member operation effect is not executed, but the operation of the movable accessory member is started after the end of the touch operation acceptance period (the movable accessory member operation effect is started). It differs from the tenth embodiment described above in that it is started).

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 69, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the movable accessory member operation process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

[Movable accessory member operation processing]
The movable accessory member operation process of the present embodiment is basically the same as the movable accessory member operation process of the tenth embodiment described above, but the start timing of the movable accessory member 39 is the first to fourth touches. When the operation acceptance period is R1 to R4, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is suspended (step S3801), and the operation of the reserved movable accessory member 39 is the end of the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4. It differs from the movable accessory member operation process of the tenth embodiment described above in that it is performed later (steps S3802, S3803 and S3703).

<Step S3801>
As shown in FIG. 69, when the MPU 51 is at the start time (operation start timing) of the operation timings G1 to G6 (see FIGS. 27 to 30) of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3701: Yes), the first In the case of the fourth touch operation acceptance period R1 to R4 (step S3702: Yes), the accessory operation hold flag is set to on (step S3801). This accessory operation hold flag is a flag that starts the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (starts the movable accessory member operation effect) after the end of the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, and is a step described later. Seen in S3802.

The MPU 51 is the above-mentioned tenth when it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3701: Yes) and when it is not the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 (step S3702: No). The operation start signal is output to the motor driver 39c to start the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3703), and the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 is set.

<Steps S3802 and S3803>
If it is neither the operation start timing nor the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (No in both steps S3701 and S3705), the MPU 51 has whether or not the accessory operation hold flag set to be turned on in step S3801 is set to ON. Determine (step S3802). When the accessory operation hold flag is set to ON (step S3802: Yes), and when the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 are not set (step S3803: No), the process shifts to step S3703. That is, when the accessory operation hold flag is set to ON (step S3802: Yes), the operation start signal is output to the motor driver 39c at the end of the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4. The operation of the movable accessory member 39 (execution of the movable accessory member operation effect) is started (step S3703), and the movable accessory member 39 is moved from the standby position to the operating position. The movable accessory member 39 in the standby position outputs an operation start signal to the motor driver 39c when the return timing is set in step S3704 (step S3705: Yes), as in the tenth embodiment described above. By doing so (step S3706), the device returns to the standby position.

By the way, in the tenth embodiment described above, when it is determined that the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (timing to start the movable accessory member operation effect) in the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, the movable accessory member 39 By not executing the process of starting the operation of the object member 39 (starting the operation of the movable accessory member), it is erroneously detected that the touch operation on the symbol display unit 341 is performed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39. It is preventing that. However, since the movable accessory member operation effect in which the movable accessory member 39 operates is usually executed as a chance-up effect or a jackpot confirmation effect, if such a highly expected effect is not executed, interest in the game There is a concern that the interest will decline.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as in the tenth embodiment described above, the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (timing to start the movable accessory member operation effect) in the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4. Although the process of starting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (starting the operation of the movable accessory member) is not executed when it is determined to be, unlike the tenth embodiment described above, the touch operation acceptance period R1 After the end of ~ R4, the movable accessory member operation effect is executed. That is, by preventing the movable accessory member operation effect from starting during the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, it is erroneously detected that the touch operation on the symbol display unit 341 is performed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39. While preventing this, after the end of the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, the movable accessory member operation effect, which is generally executed as an effect with a high degree of expectation, is executed, so that the decrease in interest and interest in the game can be suppressed. ..

In the present embodiment, the reserved movable accessory member operation effect is started after the end of the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 is confirmed, but the start timing of the reserved movable accessory member operation effect is It may be set regardless of the end of the touch operation acceptance period R1 to R4. For example, when the touch operation effect is executed, it may be after the end of the touch operation effect, or after it is confirmed that the touch operation on the symbol display unit 341 has been performed. Further, the reserved movable accessory member operation effect ends the touch operation acceptance period R1 to R4 on condition that the player does not execute the touch operation on the symbol display unit 341 during the touch operation acceptance period R1 to R4. Execution may start later.

[Twelfth Embodiment]
The tenth embodiment described above is a movable accessory member when it is determined that the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (timing to start the movable accessory member operation effect) in the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4. The case where the execution of the movable accessory member operation effect during the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 is restricted by not executing the process of starting the operation of 39 (starting the movable accessory member operation effect) has been described.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the touch operation acceptance period is R1 to R4, the process of determining whether or not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (timing to start the operation of the movable accessory member) is performed. It is different from the above-described tenth embodiment in that the execution of the movable accessory member operation effect during the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 is restricted by not being executed.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the movable accessory member operation process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

[Movable accessory member operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 70, in the movable accessory member operation process of the present embodiment, unlike the movable accessory member operation process of the tenth embodiment described above, the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 Whether or not there is, is determined first (step S3901), and on condition that the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods are not R1 to R4 (step S3902: No), is it the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39? Whether or not it is determined (step S3902). On the other hand, in the movable accessory member operation process of the present embodiment, when the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 (step S3901: Yes), whether or not it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39. It is determined whether or not it is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 without executing the process of determining (step S3902) (step S3905). When it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3902: Yes) and when it is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3905: Yes), the subsequent processing procedure is described in the tenth step. It is the same as the embodiment.

As described above, as the conventional game machine, as in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as the variable game effect, the movable accessory member operating effect for operating the movable accessory member and the touch operation acceptance period In some cases, the touch operation effect is executed by the player performing a touch operation on the front side of the symbol display unit. In this type of gaming machine, the touch operation effect may be unexpectedly executed due to the operation of the movable accessory member within the touch operation acceptance period. That is, the touch operation effect may be executed by erroneously detecting that the operation of the movable accessory member is performed by the player.

On the other hand, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, is it the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (timing to start the movable accessory member operation effect)? The process of determining whether or not is not executed. That is, in the case of the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is not started, and the execution of the movable accessory member operation effect is restricted. As a result, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the touch operation effect is executed because the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is erroneously detected as that the touch operation has been performed by the player. Can be prevented.

In the present embodiment, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is restricted in all of the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, but at least the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4. The operation of the movable accessory member 39 may be restricted during one touch operation acceptance period. For example, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is restricted during the first and second touch operation acceptance periods R1 and R2, while the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is restricted during the third and fourth touch operation acceptance periods R3 and R4. It is conceivable to execute the movable accessory member operation effect without doing so.

[13th Embodiment]
The tenth embodiment described above is a movable accessory member when it is determined that the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (timing to start the movable accessory member operation effect) in the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4. The case where the execution of the movable accessory member operation effect during the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 is restricted by not executing the process of starting the operation of 39 (starting the movable accessory member operation effect) has been described.

On the other hand, this embodiment is basically determined to be the operation start timing of the movable accessory member (timing to start the movable accessory member operation effect) during the touch operation acceptance period as in the tenth embodiment described above. If this is the case, the process of starting the operation of the movable accessory member (starting the operation of the movable accessory member) is not executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the premier effect is exceptionally determined as the touch operation effect, the movable accessory member is operated when a specific condition is satisfied, which is different from the above-described tenth embodiment. different. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the premier effect is executed as the touch operation effect, the front side of the symbol display unit by the player within a predetermined period from the start of the touch operation acceptance period. When the touch operation for the predetermined area is not performed, the jackpot confirmation effect accompanied by the forced operation of the movable accessory member is executed, and the premier effect as the touch operation effect is performed by utilizing the false detection due to the forced operation of the movable accessory member. Will be executed.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of a continuous effect of the movable accessory member operation effect and the touch operation effect executed by the game machine according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 71, in the present embodiment, when a specific condition is satisfied, a continuous effect of the movable accessory member operation effect and the touch operation effect is executed. For example, when the premier effect is selected as the touch operation effect, the player determines that a predetermined time set shorter than the touch operation acceptance period R1 to R4 elapses from the start of the touch operation acceptance period R1 to R4. When the touch operation is not performed, the jackpot confirmation effect (one-shot notification effect) accompanied by the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is executed, and the movable accessory member 39 is further detected by a plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. Then, the premier production that was decided as the touch operation production is executed.

Here, the jackpot confirmation effect (one-shot notification effect) accompanied by the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is, for example, as shown in FIG. 71, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position, the movable accessory member 39 It is a production that generates a rainbow effect Ef in the surrounding area. Further, as a jackpot confirmation effect (one-shot notification effect) accompanied by the operation of the movable accessory member 39, for example, a rainbow lamp executed by a plurality of lamps 391 arranged in an annular shape on the peripheral edge of the movable accessory member 39. It is conceivable that the effect and the operation mode of the movable accessory member 39 may be a special operation mode different from the usual one. In addition, the premier production is a production in which the selection rate is extremely low as compared with other productions, and at least the production that clearly shows that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit. In the present embodiment, the premier effect is a probability variation jackpot confirmation effect that is selected only when the lottery result is a probability variation jackpot. For example, as shown in FIG. 71, a school of golden fish (goldfish school) is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. It is an image production that moves from right to left. Of course, the premier effect may be another effect such as an image effect in which an image of a rare character whose appearance rate is extremely low as compared with other characters is displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

[Movable accessory member operation processing]
Here, FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the movable accessory member operation process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

The movable accessory member operation process of the present embodiment is performed on the movable accessory member when it is determined that the operation start timing of the movable accessory member (timing to start the operation of the movable accessory member) during the touch operation reception period. It is common with the above-described tenth embodiment in that the process of starting the operation (starting the operation of the movable accessory member) is not executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the premier effect is exceptionally determined as the touch operation effect, the player touches the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit within a predetermined period from the start of the touch operation acceptance period. If no operation is performed, a jackpot confirmation effect accompanied by forced operation of the movable accessory member is executed, and a premier effect as a touch operation effect is executed using false detection due to forced operation of the movable accessory member. It is different from the tenth embodiment described above.

<Steps S4001 to S4006>
As shown in FIG. 72, when the MPU 51 is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S4001: Yes), if the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 are present (step S4002: Yes). , While the operation process of the movable accessory member is completed, if the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods are not R1 to R4 (step S4002: No), an operation start signal is output to the motor driver 39c to output the movable accessory member. The member 39 is moved from the standby position to the operating position (step S4003), the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 is set (step S4004), and the movable accessory member operating process is completed. As a result, as in the tenth embodiment described above, the movable accessory member 39 is not executed during the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 to start the operation of the movable accessory member 39. Operation is restricted.

Further, as in the tenth embodiment described above, the MPU 51 is the motor driver 39c when it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S4001: No) and when it is the return timing (step S4005: Yes). A return signal is output to the movable accessory member 39 to return the movable accessory member 39 from the operating position to the standby position (step S4006), and the movable accessory member operation process is completed.

<Step S4007>
If the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 is not the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (No in both steps S4001 and S4005), the MPU 51 executes a process different from that of the tenth embodiment described above. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods are R1 to R4 (step S4007), and if the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 are present (step S4007: Yes). , The process proceeds to step S4008, and if it is not the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 (step S4007: No), the movable accessory member operation process is terminated.

<Step S4008>
When the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 (step S4007: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4. (Step S4008) If the predetermined time has elapsed (step S4008: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4009, and if the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S4008: No), the movable accessory member operation process is performed. To finish. Here, the predetermined time is a limit for determining that the movable accessory member 39 is forcibly operated, and the first to first steps are taken to execute the touch operation effect by utilizing the malfunction of the movable accessory member 39. The 4-touch operation acceptance period is set to a shorter time than R1 to R4. This predetermined time may be set to the same time in all of the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, or may be set individually for each of the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4. May be good.

<Step S4009>
When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 (step S4008: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the forced operation flag is set to ON (step). S4009). This forced operation flag is displayed when the player does not perform the touch operation by the time when the predetermined time elapses from the start of the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, that is, by the time when the predetermined time elapses. It is a flag for forcibly operating the movable accessory member 39 when the existence of the object in the predetermined area on the front side of the unit 341 is not confirmed, and is the steps S4105 and S4109 of the touch operation effect execution process of FIG. 73, which will be described later. , S4113 or S4117.

Here, when the forced operation flag is set to ON (step S4009: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4010, and when the forced operation flag is not set to ON (step S4009: No), The operation process of the movable accessory member is completed.

<Step S4010>
When the forced operation flag is set to ON (step S4009: Yes), the MPU 51 transmits a final operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S4010). As a result, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 causes the symbol display unit 341 to perform an image effect associated with the forced operation of the movable accessory member 39. In the present embodiment, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 has an image effect of generating a rainbow effect Ef (see FIG. 71) around the movable accessory member 39 at the timing when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position. Let the display unit 341 execute it.

Then, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4003 when the final operation effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6. As a result, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is started, and the movable accessory member 39 is returned from the operating position to the standby position at the return timing set in step S4004 (steps S4004 to S4006). That is, when the touch operation is not performed even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 (Yes in both steps S4007 and S4008), the premier effect is determined as the touch operation effect. By doing so, the movable accessory member 39 is forcibly operated even if the operation start timings G1 to G6 (see FIG. 27) of the movable accessory member 39 are not set based on the forced operation flag set to ON.

[Touch operation effect execution process]
Here, FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the game machine according to the present embodiment.

The touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment is basically the same as that of the tenth embodiment described above, but when the premier effect is determined as the touch operation effect, the movable accessory member 39 is forcibly operated. This is different from the tenth embodiment described above in that the forced operation flag for the purpose is set to on.

<Steps S4101 to S4105>
As shown in FIG. 73, in steps S4101 to S4103, it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the detection sensor 38 based on the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags, as in the tenth embodiment described above. (When an object exists in a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341) (step S4101: Yes), if it is the first touch operation acceptance period R1 (step S4102: Yes). , The first touch operation effect execution command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the first touch operation effect in the first touch operation acceptance period R1 is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4103).

Then, when the MPU 51 transmits the first touch operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S4103), unlike the tenth embodiment described above, the premier effect is determined as the first touch operation effect. If so (step S4104: Yes), the forced operation flag that enables the forced operation of the movable accessory member 39 is set to on (step S4105), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Steps S4106 to S4109>
In steps S4106 and S4107, similarly to the tenth embodiment described above, when the second touch operation acceptance period R2 is set (step S4106: Yes), the second touch operation effect in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 is performed. A second touch operation effect execution command for the symbol display unit 341 to execute is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4107).

Then, when the MPU 51 transmits the second touch operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S4107), unlike the tenth embodiment described above, the premier effect is determined as the second touch operation effect. If so (step S4108: Yes), the forced operation flag that enables the forced operation of the movable accessory member 39 is set to on (step S4109), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Steps S411 to S4113>
In steps S4110 and S4111, as in the tenth embodiment described above, when the third touch operation acceptance period R3 is set (step S4110: Yes), the third touch operation effect in the third touch operation acceptance period R3 is performed. A third touch operation effect execution command for the symbol display unit 341 to execute is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4111).

Then, when the MPU 51 transmits the third touch operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S4111), unlike the tenth embodiment described above, the premier effect is determined as the third touch operation effect. If so (step S4112: Yes), the forced operation flag that enables the forced operation of the movable accessory member 39 is set to on (step S4113), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Steps S4114 to S4117>
In steps S4114 and S4115, in the case of the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S4114: Yes), as in the tenth embodiment described above, the fourth touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 is performed. A fourth touch operation effect execution command for the symbol display unit 341 to execute is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4115).

Then, when the MPU 51 transmits the fourth touch operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S4115), unlike the tenth embodiment described above, the premier effect is determined as the fourth touch operation effect. If so (step S4116: Yes), the forced operation flag that enables the forced operation of the movable accessory member 39 is set to on (step S4117), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, even when the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 comes during the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, the process of starting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is not executed. The operation of the movable accessory member 39 is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the touch operation effect from being executed against the player's will due to an erroneous detection based on the operation of the movable accessory member 39.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the premier effect is determined as the touch operation effect, the movable accessory member is not touched by the player when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4. When the 39 is forcibly operated, the jackpot confirmation effect is executed, and the premier effect determined as the touch operation effect is executed by the false detection based on the operation of the movable accessory member 39. Therefore, even though the touch operation is not executed while the touch operation is being accepted, the player can be surprised by the unexpected forced operation of the movable accessory member 39, which is an interest in the game. And can improve the interest.

Furthermore, by forcibly executing the premier effect as a touch operation effect regardless of the player's intention by utilizing the false detection based on the forced operation of the movable accessory member 39, the selected selection rate is extremely high. It is possible to prevent the execution of a low premier production from being skipped (cancelled). As a result, when a premier effect that is rarely seen is determined as a touch operation effect, the premier effect can be reliably shown to the player.

In addition, by using false positives based on the operation of the movable accessory member 39, "(touch operation effect →) jackpot confirmation effect with forced operation of the movable accessory member 39 → premier effect", which has never been seen before. A shocking and interesting series of productions can be realized. As a result, the interest and interest in the game can be significantly improved.

In the present embodiment, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is restricted by not executing the process of starting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 during the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4. However, the method of limiting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 may be another method. For example, in the case of the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is restricted by not executing the process of determining whether or not it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39. (For example, the twelfth embodiment).

Further, the premier production may be executed as a jackpot confirmation production instead of the probability variation jackpot confirmation production.

Further, in the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, the forced operation flag can be set to be on in all the touch operation acceptance periods of the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, but the first to fourth touches The forced operation flag may be set to be on during the touch operation acceptance period of at least one of the operation acceptance periods R1 to R4. In this case, it is preferable that the forced operation flag can be set to ON in one or both of the third and fourth touch operation reception periods R3 and R4 in which the touch operation reception effect is executed.

[14th Embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment described above, the gaming machine 10 including two movable accessory members, a main movable accessory member 39A and a sub movable accessory member 39B having a display unit 391B, has been described. Further, the sub-movable accessory member 39B of the fourth embodiment described above is moved between the standby position and the operating position within a range not detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B.

Further, in the tenth embodiment described above, in the game machine 10 including one movable accessory member 39, the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (movable accessory member operation effect) during the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4. The case where the process of starting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (starting the operation of the movable accessory member) is not executed when it is determined that it is the timing to start the operation has been described.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes two movable accessory members (a main movable accessory member 39A and a sub movable accessory member 39B having a display unit 391B) similar to those in the fourth embodiment described above. In the touch operation acceptance period, the process of starting the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is not executed, while the process of starting the operation of the sub movable accessory member 39B is executed. Is different.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 74, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment described above.

[Movable accessory member operation processing]
Here, FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the movable accessory member operation process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the game machine according to the present embodiment.

In the movable accessory member operation process of the present embodiment, the process of operating the main movable accessory member 39A is executed in the same procedure as the process of operating the movable accessory member 39 of the tenth embodiment described above (the process of operating the main movable accessory member 39A). Steps S4201 to S4206). Further, in the movable accessory member operation process of the present embodiment, unlike the tenth embodiment described above, a process of operating the sub movable accessory member 39B is executed in the same procedure as the fourth embodiment described above. (Steps S4207 to S4210).

<Step S4201>
As shown in FIG. 74, in step S4201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S4201). That is, in the MPU 51, the counter value of the fluctuation display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Judge whether or not the value corresponding to the start time of is reached. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4202 when it is the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S4201: Yes), and when it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S4201: No). ), The process proceeds to step S4205.

<Steps S4202 to S4204>
When it is the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is during the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 (step S4202). Whether or not the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 can be determined can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, and the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4. It may be judged by operating a counter for judging whether or not it is. Here, the MPU 51 is a motor driver that drives the first motor 39a1 that applies a driving force to the main movable accessory member 39A when the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 are not performed (step S4202: No). An operation start signal is output to 39c (step S4203), and the movable accessory member operation process is completed. As a result, the motor driver 39c moves the main movable accessory member 39A from the standby position to the operating position by controlling the first motor 39a1. Then, the MPU 51 sets the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S4204), and ends the movable accessory member operation process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 51 is in the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 (step S4202: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the movable accessory member operation process. That is, in the present embodiment, even at the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A, when the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 are met, the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is started. The operation process of the movable accessory member is completed without doing so. As a result, the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A during the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 is restricted.

<Steps S4205-S4210>
When it is not the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S4201: No), the MPU 51 is a motor for driving the first motor 39a1 when it is the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S4205: Yes). A second unit that outputs a return signal to the driver 39c (step S4206) and applies a driving force to the sub-movable accessory member 39B when it is the operation start timing of the sub-movable accessory member 39B (step S4207: Yes). An operation start signal is output to the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a2 (step S4208), and when it is the return timing of the sub-movable accessory member 39B (step S4209: Yes), the sub-movable accessory member 39B is driven. A return signal is output to the motor driver 39c that drives the second motor 39a2 that applies force (step S4210).

The MPU 51 can be any of the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A, the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A, the operation start timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B, and the return timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B. If not (No in all of steps S4201, S4205, S4207 and S4209), the movable accessory member operation process is terminated. Further, even when the operation start signal or the return signal is output to the motor driver 39c (steps S4206, S4208 or S4210), the movable accessory member operation process is terminated.

By the way, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the main movable accessory member 39A is not executed when the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 are executed. The operation of member 39A is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection that a touch operation has been performed on a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 based on the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A.

Further, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a process of starting the operation of the sub-movable accessory member 39B is executed when the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 are executed, and the sub-movable accessory member 39B is executed. Operation is not restricted. Here, the sub-movable accessory member 39B of the present embodiment is moved between the standby position and the operating position within a range not detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the sub-movable accessory member 39B is operated, erroneous detection does not occur. Therefore, since the operation of the sub-movable accessory member 39B is not restricted, it is possible to prevent the operation of the sub-movable accessory member 39B from being unnecessarily restricted even with respect to the operation of the sub-movable accessory member 39B, which does not cause a malfunction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous by preventing the execution of the movable accessory member operation effect from being excessively restricted, and to suppress a decrease in interest in and interest in the game.

In the present embodiment, the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is activated by not executing the process of starting the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A during the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4. Although limited, the method of limiting the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A may be another method. For example, when the touch operation acceptance periods are R1 to R4, the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is restricted by not executing the process of determining whether or not it is the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A. (See the twelfth embodiment described above).

Further, in the present embodiment, the sub-movable accessory member 39B is provided with the display unit 391B, but the sub-movable accessory member 39B may not be provided with the display unit 391B.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the execution of the main movable accessory member operation effect is restricted during the reception periods R1 to R4, the execution of the main movable accessory member operation effect is suspended, and the reserved main movable accessory member is suspended. The operation effect may be executed after the end of the reception periods R1 to R4 or after the end of the touch operation effect (see the eleventh embodiment described above).

[Fifteenth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, when the presence of an object is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are set while the moving accessory member operating flag is set to ON. The case where the detection result of the object in the above is ignored and the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted has been described.

Further, the tenth embodiment described above is a movable combination when it is determined that the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (timing to start the operation of the movable accessory member) in the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4. The case where the process of starting the operation of the object member 39 (starting the operation of the movable accessory member) is not executed has been described.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted when the touch operation acceptance period and the execution period of the movable accessory member operation effect overlap, or when the movable accessory member operation effect is started first. , When the touch operation acceptance period is started first, the execution of the movable accessory member operation effect is restricted, which is different from the first and tenth embodiments described above.

For example, when the movable accessory member operation effect is started before the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, the movable accessory member is being operated as in the touch operation effect execution process of the first embodiment described above. While the flag is set to on, the detection results of the objects by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored, and the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted (see FIG. 37). Of course, in the present embodiment, the same configuration as that of the second to ninth embodiments described above is adopted, and the touch operation effect execution processing similar to that of the second to ninth embodiments described above is executed to move the device. The execution of the touch operation effect may be restricted during the operation of the accessory member.

Further, when the touch operation acceptance period R1 to R4 is started before the movable accessory member operation effect, the movable accessory member is in the touch operation acceptance period R1 to R4 as in the tenth embodiment described above. When it is determined that the operation start timing of 39 (timing to start the movable accessory member operation effect), the process of starting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (starting the movable accessory member operation effect) is not executed. Therefore, the execution of the movable accessory member operation effect is restricted (see FIG. 68). Of course, in the present embodiment, the same configuration as that of the above-mentioned 11th to 14th embodiments is adopted, and the same movable accessory member operation processing as that of the above-mentioned 11th to 14th embodiments is executed. It may be restricted that the movable accessory member operation effect is executed during the touch operation acceptance period.

The game machine 10 according to the present embodiment has an advantage when the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted during the operation of the movable accessory member, and a case where the execution of the movable accessory member operation effect is restricted during the touch operation acceptance period. You can enjoy the benefits of. That is, when the touch operation acceptance period and the execution period of the movable accessory member operation effect overlap, the movable accessory member operation effect is started first, or the touch operation acceptance period is started first. Even if there is, it is possible to prevent the touch operation effect from being unnecessarily executed due to erroneous detection based on the operation of the movable accessory member 39.

[16th Embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment described above, the case where the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is detected by the two main detection sensors 38A and 38B has been described. Further, in the fourth embodiment described above, the case where the two main detection sensors 38A and 38B cannot detect the presence of an object in the operating region of the sub-movable accessory member 39B (the left region of the symbol display unit 341) has been described. ..

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment described above, the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit excluding the left side region of the symbol display unit is detected by the two main detection sensors. It differs from the above-described fourth embodiment in that it includes a sub-detection sensor that detects the presence of an object in the front side region of the left side region of the symbol display unit in addition to the two main detection sensors. That is, in the present embodiment, the detection range of the symbol display unit is different between the main detection sensor and the sub detection sensor, and the presence of the object is individually detected by each detection sensor. Then, when the movable accessory member is not activated and is in the standby position, the presence of the object is detected by both the main detection sensor and the sub detection sensor, and when the movable accessory member is activated, the symbol is displayed only by the sub detection sensor. It is also different from the above-described first embodiment in that the presence of an object in the front side region of the left side region of the portion is detected. Further, in the present embodiment, the sub-movable accessory member 39B according to the fourth embodiment is not provided, and the movable accessory member corresponding to the main movable accessory member 39A is provided. Different from the embodiment.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 75 is a front view schematically showing the detection range of the detection sensors 38A, 38B, 38D with respect to the symbol display unit 341 of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 75, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a movable accessory member 39, a first main detection sensor 38A, a second main detection sensor 38B, and a sub detection sensor 38E.

The movable accessory member 39 is a member similar to the movable accessory member 39 of the game machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above and the main movable accessory member 39A of the fourth embodiment described above, and is a symbol display unit. The first motor 39a1 is located between a predetermined first standby position (see FIG. 4) located above the 341 and a second operating position (see FIG. 5) set below the first standby position. It is possible to move in the vertical direction along the surface of the symbol display unit 341 by the driving force from.

The first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B are similar to the first and second main detection sensors 38A and 39B of the fourth embodiment described above, and have a detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A. And the presence of the object in the overlapping range with the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B are detected. The overlap detection range between the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A (see FIG. 42 (A)) and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B (see FIG. 42 (B)) is the front side of the symbol display unit 341. It is a central region excluding the left portion (operating region of the sub-movable accessory member 39B), the lower portion, the upper right portion, and the lower right portion, and a touch operation in the operating region of the movable accessory member 39 can be detected.

The sub-detection sensor 38E is arranged on the left side of the second main detection sensor 38B, and detects the presence of an object in the left side region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. The detection range of the sub-detection sensor 38E does not overlap with the overlap detection range of the first and second main detection sensors 38A and 38B. That is, the sub-detection sensor 38E can detect a touch operation in the left region of the operating region of the movable accessory member 39, which cannot be detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B. That is, the detection range is shared by the first main detection sensor 38A, the second main detection sensor 38B, and the sub detection sensor 38E, and the central region within the operating range of the movable accessory member 39 and the movable accessory member The presence or absence of a touch operation is individually detected in the left side region outside the operating range of 39.

In the present embodiment, the touch operation state is determined based on the three touch operation detection flags by the same method as in the first embodiment described above, and the touch operation state is the first to third touch operation pattern flags. Is stored in the RAM 412 as a combination of on / off (see FIG. 22 (B)).

[Touch operation effect execution process]
Here, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

In the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, the main detection sensors 38A and 38B capable of detecting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 when the movable accessory member 39 is operating during the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 are used. The presence or absence of a touch operation in the left side region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is determined based on the detection result by the sub-detection sensor 38E, which cannot detect the operation of the movable accessory member 39 without confirming the detection result. When the movable accessory member 39 is not operating during the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, the presence or absence of the touch operation is determined based on the detection results of the main detection sensors 38A and 38B, and the main detection sensors 38A and 38B When the touch operation is not confirmed based on the detection result of the sub-detection sensor 38E, the presence or absence of the touch operation is determined based on the detection result of the sub-detection sensor 38E.

<Step S4301>
As shown in FIG. 76, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods are R1 to R4 (step S4301), and is the case where the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods are R1 to R4. (Step S4301: Yes), the process shifts to step S4302, and if the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 are not met (step S4301: No), the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Step S4302>
In the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4302). This effect execution command is a command for executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341, and is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S4306 or S4308 described later. Whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 is determined so that, for example, when the touch effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S4306 or S4308 described later, the transmitted flag is set to ON. It can be determined by checking whether or not the transmitted flag is set to ON. By determining whether or not the effect execution flag has been transmitted in this step S4301, it is possible to prevent the touch operation effect from being repeatedly started. However, if it is determined that the main touch operation in the main touch operation state has started after the touch operation effect is completed (when it is determined that an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341), the touch operation is performed. The touch operation effect may be executed again on condition that the reception period is reached.

Here, the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process when the effect execution command has been transmitted (step S4302: Yes), and steps the process when the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S4302: No). Move to S4303.

<Step S4303>
If the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S4302: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the movable accessory member is operating is set to ON (step S4302: No). Step S4303). Here, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to on (step S4303: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4307, and the movable accessory member operating flag is set to off. In the case (step S4303: No), the process shifts to step S4304.

<Step S4304>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to off (step S4303: No), the MPU 51 is based on the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags for the central region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. It is determined whether or not the touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (whether or not an object exists in the central region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341) (step S4304). Here, when it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S4304: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4306 and the touch operation is not detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B. If it is determined (step S4304: No), the process proceeds to step S4305.

<Step S4305>
When it is determined that the touch operation is not detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S4304: No), the MPU 51 is used to combine the first to third touch operation pattern flags with respect to the left region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensor 38E (whether or not an object exists in the left side region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341) (step S4305). Here, when it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the sub detection sensor 38E (step S4305: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4306 and determines that the touch operation is not detected by the sub detection sensor 38E. In the case (step S4305: No), the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Step S4306>
When it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A, 38B or the sub detection sensor 38E (Yes in steps S4304 or S4305), the MPU 41 determines the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process of the command determination process. Is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4306) to execute the touch operation effect execution command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect execution process, and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Step S4307>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S4303: Yes), the MPU 51 is based on the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags for the left side region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. It is determined whether or not the touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensor 38E (whether or not an object exists in the left region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341) (step S4307). That is, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to on (when the movable accessory member 39 is operating) (step S4303: Yes), the main detection sensors 38A and 38B touch the central region. It is determined whether or not the touch operation on the left side region is detected by the sub-detection sensor 38E without determining whether or not is detected.

Here, when it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the sub detection sensor 38E (step S4307: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4308 and determines that the touch operation is not detected by the sub detection sensor 38E. In the case (step S4307: No), the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Steps S4308 and S4309>
When it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensor 38E (step S4307: Yes), the MPU 41 performs an alternative touch operation effect determination process for determining an alternative touch operation effect to be executed in the left region of the symbol display unit 341. Is executed (step S4308). Then, the MPU 41 sets an alternative touch operation effect execution command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the alternative touch operation effect, and transmits the alternative touch operation effect to the display control device 6 (step S4308). As a result, the alternative touch operation effect is executed in the left side area of the symbol display unit 341. That is, when the movable accessory member 39 is operating during the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, in the left region of the symbol display unit 341 where the visibility is not hindered by the movable accessory member 39 at the operating position. An alternative touch operation effect is executed.

As described above, in the gaming machine in which the touch operation effect and the movable accessory member operation effect are executed, the touch operation effect can be executed by erroneous detection by operating the movable accessory member 39.

On the other hand, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (the stage where it is determined to operate the movable accessory member 39 (movable accessory member). From the stage where the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position immediately before the operation of 39A is started) to the stage when the return of the movable accessory member 39 is confirmed and the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position), The touch operation is not detected by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B. That is, in the present embodiment, the detection ranges are different between the main detection sensors 38A and 38B and the sub detection sensors 38E, and the presence or absence of an object in each detection range is individually detected. Therefore, even if the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is started after the moving accessory member operating flag is set to ON, it is possible to limit the execution of the touch operation effect, and of course, the movable accessory member 39 is on standby. It is also possible to limit the execution of the touch operation effect before returning to the position. As a result, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the touch operation effect is executed because the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is erroneously detected as that the touch operation has been performed by the player. Can be prevented.

By the way, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position, the left side region of the symbol display unit 341 and the like are visible to the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the movable accessory member 39 is operating during the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, when the touch operation is performed on the left side region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. In addition, an alternative touch operation effect is executed in the left area of the symbol display unit 341. As a result, even when the movable accessory member 39 is operated, the (alternative) touch operation effect can be executed by effectively utilizing the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, and the interest of the game is improved. To.

The alternative touch operation effect may be an image to be displayed in the central area of the symbol display unit 341 as a touch operation effect, and may be displayed in the left side area of the symbol display unit 341, which is completely different from the touch operation effect. It may display an image.

Further, the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a sub display in the left area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, the sub display accepts a touch operation, and the sub display performs a touch effect or an alternative touch operation. The production may be executed. In this case, even when the movable accessory member 39 is operating, the execution of the touch effect on the sub display is not restricted. Further, the sub-display may be provided on a movable accessory member that is movable (for example, in the left-right direction) in the left side region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the movable accessory member 39 is operating during the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, the object is generated by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B by not confirming the detection result of the main detection sensors 38A and 38B. Although the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted due to the existence, the object is caused by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B by ignoring the detection result of the main detection sensors 38A and 38B when the movable accessory member 39 is operating. The execution of the touch operation effect due to the existence may be restricted.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the movable accessory member 39 is present in the standby position, the main detection sensors 38A and 38B and the sub detection sensor 38E detect the presence of the object, while the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position. The presence of an object is detected only by the sub-detection sensor 38E when it does not exist, but when other conditions (specific conditions) are satisfied, it is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B and some detection sensors of the sub-detection sensor 38E. It is also possible to detect the presence of an object. For example, if some of the two main detection sensors 38A and 38B and one sub detection sensor 38E are out of order, the presence of the object may be detected by the remaining detection sensors that have not failed. In the operation check of the movable accessory member 39 when the main power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the movable accessory member 39 is individually operated by each of the two main detection sensors 38A and 38B and one sub detection sensor 38E. It is possible to check whether or not each of the detection sensors 38A, 38B, and 38E is out of order by determining whether or not is in the operating position.

[Outline of Invention]
Hereinafter, the outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described. In addition, in order to understand the correspondence between each appendix and each embodiment, the description may be given with reference numerals for convenience, but the invention according to the appendix is limited to the specific configuration with the reference numerals. It's not a thing. Further, it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A0]
The main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game,
An image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variablely displayed, and an image display means (341).
When an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341), the detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting the object and the detection means (38a to 38d).
When it is moved between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) and moved between the first position and the second position, it is detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d). Movable accessory member (39) to be
An effect executing means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute the game effect in the progress of the game.
With
The effect executing means (51) is
A first effect executing means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) during a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period).
A second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position, and
In the overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, the effect limiting means for restricting the execution of one of the first effect and the second effect, and the effect limiting means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A0, the execution of one of the first effect and the second effect is restricted by the effect limiting means during the overlapping period. Therefore, when the detection means detects that an object exists in the predetermined area, there is an inconvenience that the first effect is executed because it is erroneously detected as being based on the movement of the player. It can be prevented from occurring.

[Appendix A1]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A0, wherein the effect limiting means limits the execution of the first effect during the overlapping period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, the execution of the first effect is restricted by the effect limiting means during the overlapping period, so that the operation of the movable accessory member is erroneously detected as a touch operation performed by the player. It is possible to prevent the detection effect from being executed due to this.

[Appendix A2]
The effect limiting means is the detection means (38a) during a specific period from when it is determined to operate the movable accessory member (39) until the movable accessory member (39) returns to the first position. ~ 38d) The gaming machine according to Appendix A1, wherein when the presence of an object is detected, the execution of the first effect is restricted.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A2, even if the presence of an object is detected by the detection means, the execution of the first effect in a specific period is restricted. Therefore, in the overlapping period, the first effect is erroneously detected by a simple process. Can be prevented from being executed.

[Appendix A3]
The effect limiting means is the detection means (38a) during a specific period from when it is determined to operate the movable accessory member (39) until the movable accessory member (39) returns to the first position. ~ 38d) The gaming machine according to Appendix A1, wherein the execution of the process of confirming whether or not the existence of the object is detected is restricted.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A3, the execution of the first effect in the overlapping period can be restricted by not executing the process of confirming whether or not the existence of the object is detected by the detection means in the specific period, which is a simple process. It is possible to prevent the detection effect from being executed due to false detection.

[Appendix A4]
Further provided with a driving means (39a) for applying a driving force for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position.
The effect limiting means starts limiting the execution of the first effect between the time when it is determined to drive the driving means (39a) and the time when the driving of the driving means (39a) is started. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A3.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A4, the execution of the first effect is restricted immediately before the movable accessory member is operated by the driving means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A5]
When the movable accessory member (39) is moved from the first position to the second position, it is detected that the movable accessory member (39) has returned from the second position to the first position. Further equipped with a return detection means (39b),
When the return detecting means (39b) detects that the movable accessory member (39) has returned to the first position, the effect limiting means releases the restriction on the execution of the first effect. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A4.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A5, the restriction on the execution of the first effect is lifted when the return of the movable accessory member is detected. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A6]
Further provided with a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition.
The effect executing means (51) shifts the determination result of the second effect to the special gaming state in the overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap. When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) when the effect is executed as an effect (big hit confirmation effect, one-shot notification effect) that clearly indicates that the object is a thing, the predetermined area is detected. The game machine according to Appendix A0, wherein the game effect of the type according to the situation when the presence of the object is detected in the above-mentioned game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A6, when the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected when performing an effect clearly indicating that the determination result shifts to the special gaming state in the overlapping period, the game machine in the predetermined area A type of game effect is executed according to the situation when the presence of an object is detected. Therefore, it is possible to limit the execution of the first effect in a situation where the awakening of the game is likely to occur throughout the game effect. As a result, the awakening of the game is prevented, and the interest in the game is improved. Further, in a situation where the awakening of the game is unlikely to occur, it is possible to execute the first effect as scheduled, so that it is possible to prevent the first effect from becoming meaningless.

[Appendix A7]
When the presence of the object in the predetermined region is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) in the overlapping period, the effect executing means (51) detects the existence of the object in the predetermined region. The game machine according to Appendix A6, characterized in that an effect corresponding to the type of the game effect being executed is executed.

[Appendix A8]
The game effect includes a notification game effect (variable game effect) executed in a notification game (variable game) that notifies the player of the determination result by the determination means (41).
The notification game effect is a basic effect (high-speed fluctuation effect) executed from the start of the notification game, a first development effect (normal reach effect) that can be executed after the end of the basic effect, and the first development effect. Including the second development effect (super reach effect, special reach effect) that can be executed after execution,
When the presence of the object in the predetermined region is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) in the overlapping period, the effect limiting means is executing the second development effect, the first effect. Limit execution,
The effect executing means (51) is
The gaming machine according to Appendix A7, further comprising a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect different from the first effect when the execution of the first effect is restricted by the effect limiting means.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A7 and the appendix A8, the effect according to the type of the game effect executed when the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means in the overlapping period is executed. For example, when the game effect executed when the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the detection means in the overlapping period is the second development effect, a specific effect different from the first effect is executed. Therefore, as the first effect, even if a low-expectation effect that can hardly be expected to shift the determination result to the special gaming state is determined, the low-expectation effect is executed after the movable accessory member is activated. Since this is prevented, the awakening of the game is prevented, and the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix A9]
When the first effect executing means is executing the basic effect or the first development effect when the presence of an object in the predetermined region is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) during the overlapping period. , The gaming machine according to Appendix A8, characterized in that the first effect is executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A9, even if the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the detection means in the overlapping period, if the basic effect or the first development effect is being executed, the first effect is executed. The first effect is executed by means. Therefore, at a timing when it is difficult to awaken even if the low expectation effect is executed, even if an object is detected during the overlapping period due to the operation of the movable accessory member, the first effect is executed as scheduled, so that the game is played. It is possible to prevent the first production from becoming meaningless while preventing the awakening of the first effect.

[Appendix A10]
The predetermined period includes a first predetermined period (third touch operation acceptance period, fourth touch operation acceptance period) in which an effect (touch operation acceptance effect) for clearly indicating to the player that the predetermined period is executed is executed.
When the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined region during the first predetermined period, the effect executing means (51) executes the first effect by the effect limiting means. A8 or A9, wherein a specific effect different from that of the first effect is executed by the specific effect executing means.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A10, when the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the detection means in the first predetermined period (during reception effect execution), the execution of the first effect is restricted by the effect limiting means and specified. A specific effect different from the first effect is executed depending on the effect execution means. That is, when the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means by the operation of the movable accessory member, the specific effect is executed instead of the first effect in the first predetermined period (during the reception effect). To. Therefore, as the first effect, even if a low-expectation effect that can hardly be expected to shift the determination result to the special gaming state is determined, the low-expectation effect is executed after the movable accessory member is activated. Since this is prevented, the awakening of the game is prevented, and the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix A11]
The predetermined period includes a second predetermined period (first touch operation reception period) in which an effect (touch operation reception effect) that clearly indicates to the player that the predetermined period is not executed is not executed.
The effect executing means (51) is characterized in that when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) in the second predetermined period, the first effect is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A6 to Appendix A10.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A11, even when the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the detection means in the overlapping period, the first effect is executed in the second predetermined period. Therefore, at a timing when it is difficult to awaken even if the low expectation effect is executed, even if an object is detected in the second predetermined period due to the operation of the movable accessory member or the like, the first effect is executed as scheduled. , It is possible to prevent the first production from becoming meaningless while preventing the awakening of the game.

[Appendix A12]
Compared to the first effect, the specific effect has a higher expectation (big hit expectation) that the determination result by the determination means (41) shifts to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A6 to Supplementary A11.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A12, since the specific effect has a relatively higher expectation than the first effect, the movable accessory member is operated after the operation of the movable accessory member as compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. Awakening to the game is effectively prevented, and the interest in the game is effectively improved.

[Appendix A13]
The specific effect is described in any one of Supplementary A6 to Appendix A12, which is a definite effect that clearly indicates that the determination result by the determination means (41) is to shift to the special gaming state. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A13, since the specific effect is a final effect, the awakening of the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix A14]
The finalized effect is a normal fixed effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premier effect) having a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal fixed effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to Appendix A13, wherein the specific effect is the rare confirmed effect.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A14, since the specific effect is a rare confirmed effect, it is more effective to awaken the game after the movable accessory member is activated, as compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix A15]
A second image display means (391B) different from the image display means (341),
The second movable position is moved between the third position (second standby position) and the fourth position (second operating position) by the effect executing means (51), and the second image display means (391B) is provided. Accessory member (39B) and
The second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B), and
With more
When the movable accessory member (39A) is moved between the first position (first standby position) and the second position (first operating position), the detection means (38A, 38B) causes the movable accessory member (39A). Detected and not detected by the second detection means (39C, 39D),
When the second movable accessory member (39B) is moved between the third position (first standby position) and the fourth position (first operating position), the detection means (38A, 38B). ) Is not detected
The first effect executing means is the image display means (341) when the presence of an object in the specific area is detected by the second detection means (38C, 38D) in the second predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period). ) To execute the first effect (touch operation effect)
The effect limiting means is characterized in that the execution of the first effect by the image display means (341) is not restricted in the second overlapping period in which the second predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap. The game machine described in Appendix A0.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A15, in the second overlapping period in which the second predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, the execution of the first effect and the second effect is not restricted by the effect limiting means. Therefore, even if the predetermined period for executing the first effect and the second predetermined period overlap with the execution period of the second effect, the first effect is unnecessarily executed by the second image display means. Is prevented from being executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress an extremely decrease in the execution frequency of the first effect, and thus it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

[Appendix A16]
The effect limiting means is the detection means (38A) during a specific period from when it is determined to operate the movable accessory member (39A) until the movable accessory member (39A) returns to the first position. , 38B), the gaming machine according to Appendix A15, which limits the execution of the first effect when the presence of an object is detected.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A16, even if the presence of an object is detected by the detection means, the execution of the first effect during a specific period is restricted, so that the first effect is executed by erroneous detection by a simple process. Can be prevented.

[Appendix A17]
The effect limiting means is the detection means (38A) during a specific period from when it is determined to operate the movable accessory member (39A) until the movable accessory member (39A) returns to the first position. , 38B), the gaming machine according to Appendix A15, characterized in that the execution of a process for confirming whether or not the existence of an object is detected is restricted.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A17, since the process of confirming whether or not the existence of the object is detected by the detection means is not executed, the execution of the first effect in a specific period can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed.

[Appendix A18]
Further provided with a driving means (39a) for applying a driving force for moving the movable accessory member (39A) between the first position and the second position.
The effect executing means (51) limits the execution of the first effect between the time when the driving means (39a) is determined to be driven and the time when the driving of the driving means (39a) is started. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A15 to Supplementary A17, which is characterized by starting.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A18, the execution of the first effect is restricted immediately before the movable accessory member is operated by the driving means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the first detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A19]
When the first movable accessory member (39A) is moved from the first position to the second position, the first movable accessory member (39A) returns from the second position to the first position. Further equipped with a return detection means (39b) for detecting this,
When the return detecting means (39b) detects that the movable accessory member (39A) has returned to the first position, the effect limiting means releases the restriction on the execution of the first effect. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A15 to Supplementary A18.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A19, the restriction on the execution of the first effect is lifted when the return of the movable accessory member is detected. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A20]
The coverage of the image display means (341) when the movable accessory member (39A) is in the second position is the image when the second movable accessory member (39B) is in the fourth position. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A15 to Supplementary A19, wherein the coverage is larger than that of the display means (341).

[Appendix A21]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A15 to Supplementary A20, wherein the movable accessory member (39A) and the second movable accessory member (39B) have different operating frequencies in the game production.

[Appendix A22]
A second image display means (391B, 392C) different from the first image display means (341) is further provided.
The effect executing means (51) is
When the execution of the first effect on the image display means (341) is restricted by the effect limiting means, a specific effect different from the first effect is executed on the second image display means (381B, 392C). The gaming machine according to Appendix A0, further comprising a specific effect executing means for causing the image to be generated.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A22, when the execution of the first effect on the image display means is restricted by the effect limiting means in the overlapping period, the specific effect executing means causes the second image display means to perform a specific effect different from the first effect. Is executed. This specific effect is executed by the second image display means when the presence of the object in the predetermined region is detected by the detection means based on the operation of the movable accessory member in the overlapping period. That is, the specific effect is executed in the second image display means by utilizing the false detection of the object in the detection means. As a result, by executing the specific effect instead of the first effect based on the false detection in the predetermined period, not only the execution of the first effect can be restricted, but also the execution of the first effect is simply restricted. It is possible to improve the interest of the game as compared with the case where the game is played.

Further, since the specific effect is executed by the second image display means instead of the image display means on which the first effect should be executed, the specific effect is executed by the second image display means that the player does not expect. It is possible to pay attention not only to what kind of effect (expectation degree) is executed, but also to which image display means the effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from diminishing, and thus the interest in the game can be improved.

[Appendix A23]
Further provided with a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition.
The specific effect is characterized in that, as compared with the first effect, the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) that the determination result by the determination means (41) shifts to the special gaming state is relatively high. The gaming machine according to Appendix A22.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A23, since the specific effect has a relatively higher expectation than the first effect, the movable accessory member is operated after the operation of the movable accessory member as compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. Awakening to the game is effectively prevented, and the interest in the game is effectively improved.

[Appendix A24]
Further provided with a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A22 or Appendix A23, wherein the specific effect is a definite effect that clearly indicates that the determination result by the determination means (41) is to shift to the special gaming state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A24, since the specific effect is a final effect, the awakening of the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix A25]
The finalized effect is a normal fixed effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premier effect) having a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal fixed effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to Appendix A24, wherein the specific effect is the rare confirmed effect.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A25, since the specific effect is a rare confirmed effect, it is more effective to awaken the game after the movable accessory member is activated, as compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix A26]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A22 to Appendix A25, wherein the second image display means (391C) is provided on the movable accessory member (39C).

[Appendix A27]
A second movable accessory member (39B) that is moved between the third position (second standby position) and the fourth position (second operating position) and is not detected by the detection means (38A, 38B).
When an object exists in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (392B), the second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the object, and
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A22 to Appendix A26, wherein the second image display means (392B) is provided on the second movable accessory member (39B).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A26 and the appendix A27, a specific effect is executed by the movable accessory member or the second image display means provided on the second movable accessory member by utilizing the false detection of the object by the detection means. To. As a result, when the movable accessory member is in the second position for a predetermined period of time that causes erroneous detection, the specific effect is executed in the second image display means, so that the operation of the movable accessory member and the specific effect are combined. By making it, it is possible to significantly improve the interest of the game as compared with the case where the movable accessory member is simply operated.

[Appendix A28]
A second image display means (391B) different from the first image display means (341),
The second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B), and
Unlike the first image display means (341) and the second image display means (391B), the third image display means (392A) provided on the movable accessory member (39A) and the third image display means (392A).
With more
The first effect executing means is the second image display means when the presence of an object in the specific area is detected by the second detection means (38C, 38D) during the second predetermined period (touch operation reception period). Let (391B) perform the first production,
The effect limiting means restricts the execution of the first effect by the second image display means (391B) in the second overlapping period in which the second predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap.
The effect executing means (51) applies the first to the third image display means (392B) when the execution of the first effect by the second image display means (391B) is restricted in the second overlapping period. The gaming machine according to Appendix A0, further comprising a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect different from the effect.

[Appendix A29]
A second movable accessory member (39B) that is moved between a third position (second standby position) and a fourth position (second operating position) and is not detected by the detection means (38A, 38B) is further provided. The gaming machine according to Appendix A28, wherein the second image display means (391B) is provided on the second movable accessory member (39B).

In the gaming machines according to Appendix A28 and Appendix A29, when the presence of an object in a specific area is detected by the second detecting means during the second overlapping period, instead of executing the first effect by the second image display means. , The third image display means executes a specific effect different from the first effect. As a result, when the movable accessory member is operated in the second overlapping period, the specific effect is executed by the third image display means provided on the movable accessory member that the player does not expect. It is possible to pay attention not only to whether the (expected degree) effect is executed, but also to which image display means the effect is executed. Further, by executing the specific effect in the third image display means provided on the movable accessory member, the operation of the movable accessory member and the specific effect are combined, so that the movable accessory member is simply operated. Compared to the case where the game is played, the interest of the game can be significantly improved.

[Appendix A30]
Further provided with a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition.
Compared to the first effect, the specific effect has a higher expectation (big hit expectation) that the determination result by the determination means (41) shifts to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to the feature A28 or A29.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A30, since the specific effect has a relatively higher expectation than the first effect, the movable accessory member is operated after the operation of the movable accessory member as compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. Awakening to the game is effectively prevented, and the interest in the game is effectively improved.

[Appendix A31]
Further provided with a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition.
The specific effect is described in any one of Supplementary A28 to Appendix A30, which is a definite effect that clearly indicates that the determination result by the determination means (41) is to shift to the special gaming state. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A31, since the specific effect is a final effect, the awakening of the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix A32]
The finalized effect is a normal fixed effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premier effect) having a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal fixed effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to Appendix A31, wherein the specific effect is the rare confirmed effect.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A32, since the specific effect is a rare confirmed effect, it is more effective to awaken the game after the movable accessory member is activated, as compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix A33]
A second image display means (391B) different from the first image display means (341),
The second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B), and
Unlike the first image display means (341) and the second image display means (391B), the third image display means (392A) provided on the movable accessory member (39A) and the third image display means (392A).
With more
The effect executing means (51) replaces the first effect when the effect limiting means restricts the execution of the first effect on the first image display means (341) during the overlapping period. The second image display means (381B) is made to execute the first specific effect that clearly indicates that the predetermined period is reached, and when an object is detected in the specific area in the predetermined period, the third image display means (392C) is used. The gaming machine according to Appendix A0, further comprising a specific effect executing means for executing the first effect and a second specific effect different from the first specific effect.

[Appendix A34]
A second movable accessory member (39B) that is moved between the third position (second standby position) and the fourth position (second operating position) and is not detected by the detection means (38A, 38B) is further provided.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A33, wherein the second image display means (391B) is provided on the second movable accessory member (39B).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A34, when the effect limiting means restricts the execution of the first effect by the image display means in the overlapping period, the first specific effect is executed by the second image display means instead of the first effect. Then, on condition that the presence of the object in the specific area is detected, the third image display means executes the first effect and the second specific effect different from the first specific effect. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game as compared with the case where the execution of the first effect is simply restricted. Further, when the movable accessory member is in the first position in the overlapping period, the second specific effect is executed by the third image display means provided on the movable accessory member, so that the operation of the movable accessory member and the second By combining the two specific effects, the interest of the game can be significantly improved as compared with the case where the movable accessory is simply operated.

[Appendix A35]
Further provided with a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition.
Compared to the first effect, the second specific effect has a relatively high degree of expectation (big hit expectation) that the determination result by the determination means (41) shifts to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to Appendix A33 or Appendix A34.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A35, the second specific effect has a relatively higher expectation than the first effect, so that after the movable accessory member is activated, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. The awakening of the game is effectively prevented, and the interest in the game is effectively improved.

[Appendix A36]
Further provided with a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition.
The game according to Appendix A33 or Appendix A34, wherein the second specific effect is a definite effect that clearly indicates that the determination result by the determination means (41) is to shift to the special gaming state. Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A36, since the second specific effect is a final effect, it is more effective to awaken the game after the movable accessory member is activated, as compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix A37]
The finalized effect is a normal fixed effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premier effect) having a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal fixed effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to Appendix A36, wherein the second specific effect is the rare definite effect.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A37, since the specific effect is a rare confirmed effect, it is more effective to awaken the game after the movable accessory member is activated, as compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix A38]
The movable accessory member (39) is movable between the first position and an intermediate position between the first position and the second position.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A0, wherein the effect limiting means enables execution of the first effect when the movable accessory member (39) is in the intermediate position during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A38, the execution of the first effect is restricted when the movable accessory member is in the second position for a predetermined period, while the first effect is restricted when the movable accessory member is in the intermediate position. Execution is not restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to the erroneous detection that the operation of the movable accessory member is performed by the player, and the movable accessory member is in the intermediate position. It is possible to prevent the execution of the first effect from being unnecessarily restricted in the case of.

[Appendix A39]
When the movable accessory member is in the second position in the predetermined period and the detection means (38) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined region, the effect executing means (51) is said to be the first. 1. The gaming machine according to Appendix A38, further comprising a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect different from the effect.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A39, when the movable accessory member is in the second position in a predetermined period and the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means, the first effect is produced by the specific effect execution means. Perform a specific effect different from. That is, the specific effect is executed by utilizing the false detection of the object by the detection means. In this way, by executing the specific effect instead of the first effect based on the false detection in the predetermined period, not only the execution of the first effect can be restricted, but also the execution of the first effect is simply restricted. It is possible to improve the interest of the game as compared with the case where it is played.

[Appendix A40]
The movable accessory member (39) further includes a second image display means (392C) different from the image display means (341).
The gaming machine according to Appendix A39, wherein the specific effect executing means causes the second image display means (392C) to execute the specific effect when the execution of the first effect is restricted.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A40, the specific effect is executed not by the image display means on which the first effect should be executed but by the second image display means different from the image display means. Therefore, the specific effect is executed in the second image display means that the player does not expect, and not only what kind of effect (expectation degree) is executed, but also which image display means is used to execute the effect. You can also pay attention to that. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from diminishing, and thus the interest in the game can be improved.

[Appendix A41]
Further provided with a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition.
The specific effect is characterized in that, as compared with the first effect, the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) that the determination result by the determination means (41) shifts to the special gaming state is relatively high. The gaming machine according to Appendix A39 or Appendix A40.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A41, since the specific effect has a relatively higher expectation than the first effect, after the operation of the first movable accessory member, compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. The awakening of the game in the game is effectively prevented, and the interest in the game is effectively improved.

[Appendix A42]
Further provided with a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A39 or Appendix A40, wherein the specific effect is a definite effect that clearly indicates that the determination result by the determination means (41) is to shift to the special gaming state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A42, since the specific effect is a definite effect, it is more effective to awaken the game after the operation of the first movable accessory member than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix A43]
The finalized effect is a normal fixed effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premier effect) having a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal fixed effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to Appendix A42, wherein the specific effect is the rare confirmed effect.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A43, since the specific effect is a rare confirmed effect, it is more effective to awaken the game after the movable accessory member is activated, as compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix A44]
The detection means (38)
When the movable accessory member (39) is in the intermediate position, the presence of an object in the predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341) is not detected, and the object is not detected.
Addendum A38 to A43, which detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341) when the movable accessory member (39) is in the second position. The gaming machine described in any of.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A44, when the movable accessory member (39) is in the intermediate position, the presence of an object is present by the detecting means in a predetermined period while preventing the first effect from being executed due to an erroneous detection. When it is detected, the first effect can be executed.

[Appendix A45]
The effect limiting means is used in a specific period from when it is determined to operate the movable accessory member (39) to the second position until the movable accessory member (39) returns to the second position. The gaming machine according to Appendix A38, wherein when the presence of an object is detected by the detecting means (38), the execution of the first effect is restricted.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A45, even if the presence of an object is detected by the detection means, the execution of the first effect during a specific period is restricted, so that the first effect is executed by erroneous detection by a simple process. Can be prevented.

[Appendix A46]
The effect limiting means is the detection means (38) during a specific period from when it is determined to operate the movable accessory member (39) until the movable accessory member (39) returns to the first position. The gaming machine according to Appendix A38, wherein the execution of a process for confirming whether or not the existence of an object is detected by) is restricted.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A46, since the process of confirming whether or not the existence of the object is detected by the detection means is not executed, the execution of the first effect in a specific period can be restricted, so that the erroneous detection is performed by a simple process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed.

[Appendix A47]
Further provided with a driving means (39a) for applying a driving force for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position, the intermediate position, and the second position.
After it is determined that the effect limiting means drives the drive means (39a) in order to move the movable accessory member (39) from the first position to the second position, the drive means (39a) The gaming machine according to the appendix A45 or the appendix A46, characterized in that the restriction on the execution of the first effect is started before the driving of the first effect is started.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A47, the execution of the first effect is restricted immediately before the movable accessory member is operated by the driving means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A48]
When the movable accessory member (39) is moved from the first position to the second position, it is detected that the movable accessory member (39) has returned from the second position to the first position. Further equipped with a return detection means (39b),
When the return detecting means (39b) detects that the movable accessory member (39) has returned to the second position, the effect limiting means releases the restriction on the execution of the first effect. The gaming machine according to the appendix A45 or the appendix A46.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A48, the restriction on the execution of the first effect is lifted when the return of the movable accessory member is detected. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A49]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A0, wherein the effect limiting means limits the execution of the second effect during the overlapping period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A49, since the execution of the second effect can be restricted in a predetermined period, it is erroneously detected that the player has operated the image display means based on the operation of the movable accessory member. It is possible to prevent the first effect from being unnecessarily executed due to this.

[Appendix A50]
The game according to Appendix A49, wherein the effect limiting means limits the execution of the process of starting the second effect when it is determined that it is the timing to start the second effect in the predetermined period. Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A50, even if it is determined that it is the timing to start the second effect in the predetermined period, the second effect in the predetermined period is restricted by limiting the execution of the process for starting the second effect. Since it is possible to limit the execution of the first effect, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to an erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Appendix A51]
The second effect executing means is characterized in that, when the timing for starting the second effect is the predetermined period, the second effect is executed when a certain period has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to Appendix A50.

[Appendix A52]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A51, wherein the time point at which the certain period has elapsed is the end time point of the predetermined period.

[Appendix A53]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A51 or Appendix A52, wherein the time point after the lapse of a certain period of time is the end time point of the first effect when the first effect is executed.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices A51 to A53, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the second effect in the predetermined period, the second effect is executed when a certain period elapses from the start of the predetermined period. Therefore, while preventing erroneous detection that the image display means has been operated by the operation of the movable accessory member, when a certain period has passed from the start of the predetermined period, for example, the predetermined period or the first effect. After the end, the second effect, which is generally executed as an effect with a high degree of expectation, is executed, so that the decrease in interest in the game and the interest in the game can be suppressed.

[Appendix A54]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A49, wherein the effect executing means (51) limits the execution of a process for confirming whether or not it is the timing to start the second effect in the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A54, the execution of the second effect in the predetermined period can be restricted by limiting the execution of the process of confirming whether or not it is the timing to start the second effect in the predetermined period. A simple process can prevent the first effect from being executed due to a false positive.

[Appendix A55]
The first effect is a normal effect having a high probability of being executed by the first effect executing means, and a determination means (41) having a lower probability of being executed by the first effect executing means (51) than the normal effect. ) Includes a rare production (premier production) that clearly indicates that the judgment result is to shift to the special gaming state.
The second effect executing means is the first effect means when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) during the predetermined period (touch operation reception period). When it is determined that the rare effect is to be executed as the effect, the detection means (38a to 38d) will be used until the forced operation time set to a time shorter than the predetermined period elapses. When the presence of the object in the predetermined area is not detected, the second effect is shifted to the special gaming state by the forced operation of the movable accessory member (39) before the elapse of the predetermined period. Performed as a production that clearly shows that there is,
The first effect executing means is the first effect when the detection means (38a to 38d) detects that an object exists in the predetermined region by the forced operation of the movable accessory member (39). The gaming machine according to Appendix A0, characterized in that the rare effect is executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A55, when it is determined that the rare effect is executed as the first effect, the object in the predetermined area is determined by the detection means between the start of the predetermined period and the elapse of the forced operation time. If the presence of is not detected, the movable accessory member is forcibly activated before the elapse of a predetermined time. Since such a player can give a surprise or a shock to the player by the unexpected forced operation of the movable accessory member, it is possible to improve the interest and interest of the game. Further, by executing the detection effect by utilizing the erroneous detection due to the forced operation of the movable accessory member, it is possible to make the player surely see the first effect. Then, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A55, as the first effect, a rare effect that clearly indicates that the determination result shifts to the special gaming state is executed, so that the rare effect is caused by an erroneous detection due to the operation of the movable accessory member. By being executed, when a rare effect that is rarely seen is determined as a detection effect, not only can the rare effect be surely shown to the player, but also an unexpected movable accessory member. By executing a rare effect in addition to the operation of, it is possible to give a further surprise or impact to the player. As a result, the interest and interest in the game can be further improved.

[Appendix A56]
The game state transition means (41) for shifting the gaming state between the notification game state in which the notification game for notifying the determination result in the determination means (41) is executed and the special game state is further provided.
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game.
The special game state includes a first special game state in which the first special game is executed (5R normal jackpot game state) and a second special game state in which the second special game is executed (5R probability variation jackpot game state). 16R probability change jackpot game state) including
The notified game state includes a first notified game state and a second notified game state in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the determination means (41) is higher than that of the first notified game state. ,
The game state transition means (41) shifts to the first notified game state after the end of the first special game, and shifts to the second notified game state after the end of the second special game.
The rare effect is an effect that clearly indicates that the determination result by the determination means (41) is shifted to the second special gaming state by the game state transition means (41) after the end of the notification game. The gaming machine according to Appendix A55, which is characterized by the above.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A56, the rarity effect is an effect that clearly indicates that the determination result by the determination means shifts to the (second) special gaming state ((probability variation) jackpot gaming state). That is, the rare effect is executed as an effect that clearly indicates that the movement is shifted to the (second) special game state ((probability change) jackpot game state) by erroneous detection due to the forced operation of the movable accessory member. As a result, the player can know before the end of the notification game that the determination result is advantageous when the rare effect is executed after the forced operation of the movable accessory member, so that the player is interested in or interested in the game. Can be improved.

[Appendix A57]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A55 or Appendix A56, wherein the effect limiting means limits the execution of the second effect when the first effect is not the rare effect.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A57, when the first effect is not a rare effect, the execution of the second effect in the overlapping period is restricted by the effect limiting means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed against the player's will due to erroneous detection based on the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A58]
The detection means (38a to 38a) when the device is moved between the third position (second standby position) and the fourth position (second operating position) and is moved between the third position and the fourth position. Further equipped with a second movable accessory member (39B) which is not detected by 38d),
The second effect executing means executes a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) for moving the second movable accessory member (39B) between the third position and the fourth position.
The effect limiting means can limit the execution of the second effect by the movable accessory member (39A) executed by the second effect executing means during the overlapping period, and the second movable accessory member (the second movable accessory member (39A). 39B) The gaming machine according to Appendix A0, wherein the execution of the second effect is not restricted.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A58, since the execution of the second effect by the first movable accessory member can be restricted in a predetermined period, a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means is determined based on the operation of the first movable accessory member. It is prevented from being erroneously detected as having been operated by the player.

Further, when the second movable accessory member is moved between the third position and the fourth position, the object is not detected by the detecting means. Therefore, since erroneous detection by the detection means does not occur due to the operation of the second movable accessory member, it is possible to prevent the operation of the second movable accessory member from which the erroneous detection does not occur from being unnecessarily restricted. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming monotonous by preventing the execution of the movable accessory effect from being excessively restricted, and to suppress a decrease in interest in and interest in the game.

[Appendix A59]
When the effect limiting means determines that it is the timing to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in the predetermined period, the effect limiting means restricts the execution of the process of starting the operation of the first movable accessory member. The gaming machine according to Appendix A58, which is characterized by the above.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A59, even when it is determined that it is the timing to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in a predetermined period, the process of starting the operation of the first movable accessory member is performed. By limiting the execution, it is possible to limit the execution of the first movable accessory effect in a predetermined period, so that it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to an erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Appendix A60]
The effect limiting means is the second movable accessory member by the first movable accessory member when a certain period has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period when the timing for starting the first movable accessory effect is the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to Appendix A59, which is characterized in that the production is executed.

[Appendix A61]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A60, wherein the time point at which the certain period has elapsed is the end time point of the predetermined period.

[Appendix A62]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A60, wherein the time point after the lapse of a certain period of time is the end time point of the first effect when the first effect is executed.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices A60 to A62, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in the predetermined period, the first is when a certain period elapses from the start of the predetermined period. 1 The second effect by the movable accessory member is executed. Therefore, while preventing false detection that the image display means has been operated by the operation of the first movable accessory member, when a certain period has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period, for example, the predetermined period or the first. After the end of the effect, the second effect by the first movable accessory member, which is generally executed as an effect with high expectation, is executed, so that the decrease in interest in the game and the interest in the game can be suppressed.

[Appendix A63]
The addition A58, wherein the effect limiting means limits the execution of a process for confirming whether or not it is the timing to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in the predetermined period. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A63, the execution of the second effect in the predetermined period is performed by limiting the execution of the process of confirming whether or not it is the timing to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in the predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Appendix A64]
The coverage of the image display means (341) when the first movable accessory member (39A) is in the second position is when the second movable accessory member (39B) is in the fourth position. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A58 to Appendix A63, which is characterized in that the coverage is larger than that of the image display means (341).

[Appendix A65]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A58 to Appendix A64, wherein the first movable accessory member (39A) and the second movable accessory member (39B) have different operating frequencies in the game production. ..

[Appendix A66]
The effect limiting means can limit the execution of the second effect when the predetermined period is started before the overlap period, and when the execution period is started before the overlap period. The gaming machine according to Appendix A0, wherein the execution of the first effect can be restricted.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A66, when the predetermined period is started earlier than the overlapping period, the execution of the second effect is restricted, and the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the operation of the movable accessory member. It is prevented that the means is erroneously detected, and when the execution period is started earlier than the overlapping period, the execution of the first effect is restricted, so that the object is placed in the predetermined area by the operation of the movable accessory member. It is prevented that the detection means erroneously detects the existence. Therefore, when the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, the movable accessory member is operated regardless of whether the predetermined period is started first or the execution period is started first. False positives based on the above can be prevented, and the detection effect is prevented from being unnecessarily executed based on the false positives.

[Appendix B1]
The main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game,
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition, and
An image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variablely displayed, and an image display means (341).
When an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341), the detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting the object and the detection means (38a to 38d).
When it is moved between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) and moved between the first position and the second position, it is detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d). Movable accessory member (39) to be
An effect executing means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute the game effect in the progress of the game.
With
The effect executing means (51) is
A first effect executing means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) during a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period).
A second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position, and
With
An effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) shifts the second effect to the special gaming state in the overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap. When the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) in the case of executing as the jackpot confirmation effect and the one-shot notification effect), the existence of the object in the predetermined area is detected. A gaming machine characterized in that the above-mentioned gaming effect of a type according to a situation is executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, when the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected when performing an effect clearly indicating that the determination result shifts to the special gaming state in the overlapping period, the game machine in the predetermined area A type of game effect is executed according to the situation when the presence of an object is detected. Therefore, it is possible to limit the execution of the first effect in a situation where the awakening of the game is likely to occur throughout the game effect. As a result, the awakening of the game is prevented, and the interest in the game is improved. Further, in a situation where the awakening of the game is unlikely to occur, it is possible to execute the first effect as scheduled, so that it is possible to prevent the first effect from becoming meaningless.

[Appendix B2]
When the presence of the object in the predetermined region is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) in the overlapping period, the effect executing means (51) detects the existence of the object in the predetermined region. The game machine according to Appendix B1, wherein the effect according to the type of the game effect being executed is executed.

[Appendix B3]
The game effect includes a notification game effect (variable game effect) executed in a notification game (variable game) that notifies the player of the determination result by the determination means (41).
The notification game effect is a basic effect (high-speed fluctuation effect) executed from the start of the notification game, a first development effect (normal reach effect) that can be executed after the end of the basic effect, and the first development effect. Including the second development effect (super reach effect, special reach effect) that can be executed after execution,
The effect executing means (51) is
When the presence of an object in the predetermined region is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) in the overlapping period and the second development effect is being executed, the effect restriction that limits the execution of the first effect. Means and
When the execution of the first effect is restricted by the effect limiting means, the specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect different from the first effect, and the specific effect executing means.
The gaming machine according to Appendix B2, which further comprises.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix B2 and the appendix B3, the effect according to the type of the game effect executed when the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means in the overlapping period is executed. For example, when the game effect executed when the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the detection means in the overlapping period is the second development effect, a specific effect different from the first effect is executed. Therefore, as the first effect, even if a low-expectation effect that can hardly be expected to shift the determination result to the special gaming state is determined, the low-expectation effect is executed after the movable accessory member is activated. Since this is prevented, the awakening of the game is prevented, and the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix B4]
When the first effect executing means is executing the basic effect or the first development effect when the presence of an object in the predetermined region is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) during the overlapping period. , The gaming machine according to Appendix B3, characterized in that the first effect is executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B4, even if the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the detection means in the overlapping period, if the basic effect or the first development effect is being executed, the first effect is executed. The first effect is executed by means. Therefore, at a timing when it is difficult to awaken even if the low expectation effect is executed, even if an object is detected during the overlapping period due to the operation of the movable accessory member, the first effect is executed as scheduled, so that the game is played. It is possible to prevent the first production from becoming meaningless while preventing the awakening of the first effect.

[Appendix B5]
The predetermined period includes a first predetermined period (third touch operation acceptance period, fourth touch operation acceptance period) in which an effect (touch operation acceptance effect) for clearly indicating to the player that the predetermined period is executed is executed.
When the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined region during the first predetermined period, the effect executing means (51) executes the first effect by the effect limiting means. The gaming machine according to Appendix B3 or Appendix B4, wherein the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means, which is different from the first effect.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B5, when the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the detection means in the first predetermined period (during reception effect execution), the execution of the first effect is restricted by the effect limiting means and specified. A specific effect different from the first effect is executed depending on the effect execution means. That is, when the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means by the operation of the movable accessory member, the specific effect is executed instead of the first effect in the first predetermined period (during the reception effect). To. Therefore, as the first effect, even if a low-expectation effect that can hardly be expected to shift the determination result to the special gaming state is determined, the low-expectation effect is executed after the movable accessory member is activated. Since this is prevented, the awakening of the game is prevented, and the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix B6]
The predetermined period includes a second predetermined period (first touch operation reception period) in which an effect (touch operation reception effect) that clearly indicates to the player that the predetermined period is not executed is not executed.
The effect executing means (51) is characterized in that when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) in the second predetermined period, the first effect is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix B1 to Appendix B5.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B6, even when the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the detection means in the overlapping period, the first effect is executed in the second predetermined period. Therefore, at a timing when it is difficult to awaken even if the low expectation effect is executed, even if an object is detected in the second predetermined period due to the operation of the movable accessory member or the like, the first effect is executed as scheduled. , It is possible to prevent the first production from becoming meaningless while preventing the awakening of the game.

[Appendix B7]
Compared to the first effect, the specific effect has a higher expectation (big hit expectation) that the determination result by the determination means (41) shifts to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B6, which is a feature.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B7, since the specific effect has a relatively higher expectation than the first effect, the movable accessory member is operated after the operation of the movable accessory member as compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. Awakening to the game is effectively prevented, and the interest in the game is effectively improved.

[Appendix B8]
The specific effect is described in any one of Appendix B1 to Appendix B7, which is a definite effect that clearly indicates that the determination result by the determination means (41) is to shift to the special gaming state. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B8, since the specific effect is a final effect, the awakening of the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix B9]
The finalized effect is a normal fixed effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premier effect) having a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal fixed effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to Appendix B8, wherein the specific effect is the rare confirmed effect.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B9, since the specific effect is a rare confirmed effect, it is more effective to awaken the game after the movable accessory member is activated, as compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix C1]
The main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game,
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition, and
A game state transition means (41) that shifts the game state between the notification game state in which the notification game for notifying the determination result of the determination means (41) is executed and the special game state.
An image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variablely displayed, and an image display means (341).
When an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341), the detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting the object and the detection means (38a to 38d).
When it is moved between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) and moved between the first position and the second position, it is detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d). Movable accessory member (39) to be
An effect executing means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute the game effect in the progress of the game.
With
The effect executing means (51) is
A first effect executing means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) during a predetermined period (touch operation reception period) is provided. ,
By moving the movable accessory member (39) from the first position to the second position in the predetermined period, the determination result by the determination means (41) shifts to the special gaming state. When the expectation improvement effect (chance increase effect) for improving the expectation degree is executed, the detection means (38a to 38d) causes the movable accessory in the predetermined area by executing the expectation degree improvement effect. When the presence of a member is detected, a game characterized in that it is possible to execute a definite effect that clearly indicates that the determination result by the determination means (41) is to shift to the special gaming state. Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C1, when the presence of the movable accessory member in a predetermined area is detected by executing the expectation improvement effect in which the movable accessory member operates, the final effect can be executed. Is. That is, when the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the detection means triggered by the operation of the movable accessory member, even if it is erroneously detected as the movement of the player by the player, the existence of the object is detected. A definite effect is executed using false positives. In other words, the problem that awakening may occur due to the execution of the first effect, which is unlikely to shift to the special gaming state after the movable accessory member is activated, is solved by using the false positive as a reverse move. be able to.

[Appendix C2]
The effect executing means (51) executes the final effect when the predetermined effect is executed when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to Appendix C1, characterized in that it is possible.

[Appendix C3]
The game effect includes a notification game effect (variable game effect) executed in a notification game (variable game) that notifies the player of the determination result by the determination means (41).
The notification game effect is a basic effect (high-speed fluctuation effect) executed from the start of the notification game, a first development effect (normal reach effect) that can be executed after the end of the basic effect, and the first development effect. Including the second development effect (super reach effect, special reach effect) that can be executed after execution,
The gaming machine according to Appendix C2, wherein the predetermined effect is the second development effect.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix C2 and the appendix C3, when the presence of the object in the predetermined region is detected by the detection means in the predetermined period and the predetermined effect (for example, the second development effect) is being executed, the final effect is executed. Can be done. That is, when the presence of the object in the predetermined region is detected by the detecting means by operating the movable accessory member, the definite effect can be executed during the execution of the predetermined effect such as the second development effect. Therefore, as the first effect, even if a low-expectation effect that can hardly be expected to shift the determination result to the special gaming state is determined, the low-expectation effect is executed after the movable accessory member is activated. Since this is prevented, the awakening of the game is prevented, and the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix C4]
The predetermined period includes a first predetermined period (third touch operation acceptance period, fourth touch operation acceptance period) in which an effect (touch operation acceptance effect) for clearly indicating to the player that the predetermined period is executed is executed.
The effect executing means (51) can execute the definite effect when the presence of an object in the predetermined region is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) in the first predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C1 to C3.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C4, when the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the detection means in the first predetermined period (during reception effect execution), the final effect can be executed. That is, when the presence of the object in the predetermined region is detected by the detecting means by the operation of the movable accessory member, the final effect can be executed in the first predetermined period (during the reception effect execution). Therefore, as the first effect, even if a low-expectation effect that can hardly be expected to shift the determination result to the special gaming state is determined, the low-expectation effect is executed after the movable accessory member is activated. Since this is prevented, the awakening of the game is prevented, and the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix C5]
The final effect is an effect executed after the movable accessory member (39) returns to the first position, and the movable accessory member (39) is moved from the first position to the second position. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C1 to C4, characterized in that the effect involves movement (fixed effect B).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C5, after the operation of the movable accessory member is completed, an effect accompanied by the operation of the movable accessory member is executed again as a final effect. That is, the final effect is executed as the second actuating accessory member actuation effect of the movable accessory member actuation effect that is continuously executed. Therefore, the final effect is executed as an unexpected effect. In addition, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the movable accessory member is operated again after the movable accessory member is returned. As a result, the player can continue to be interested in the production even after the production of the movable accessory member is completed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C6]
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game.
The special game state includes a first special game state in which the first special game is executed (5R normal jackpot game state) and a second special game state in which the second special game is executed (5R probability variation jackpot game state). 16R probability change jackpot game state) including
When the expected degree improving effect is executed by moving the movable accessory member (39), the effect executing means (51) moves the movable accessory member (39) from the first position. When the presence of an object in the predetermined region is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) triggered by the movement to the second position, the determination result by the determination means (41) is the second special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary note C1 to Supplementary note C5, characterized in that the final effect is executed on condition that the game is shifted to.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C6, the final effect is executed on condition that the determination result shifts to the second special gaming state in which the second special game, which is more advantageous to the player than the first special game, is executed. Will be done. For example, the determination result shifts to the second special gaming state in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the determination means is higher than that in the first notification game to the second notification game which is shifted after the end of the special game. The final effect is executed on the condition that Therefore, when the player executes the definite effect when the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means triggered by the operation of the movable accessory member, the determination result is from the first special gaming state. Since it is possible to know that the player is in the second special gaming state, which is advantageous to the player, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C7]
The finalized effect is a normal fixed effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premier effect) having a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal fixed effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C1 to C6, wherein the final production is the rare final production.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C7, since the definite effect is a rare definite effect, it is easy to know that the determination result shifts to the second special game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state. Because it can be done, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix D1]
The main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game,
The first image display means (341), which displays a variable display image in which the decorative symbol (main symbol) is variablely displayed, and
A second image display means (391B) different from the first image display means (341),
A first movable accessory member (39A) that is moved between a first position (first standby position) and a second position (first operating position),
A second movable accessory member (39B) that has been moved between a third position (second standby position) and a fourth position (second operating position) and provided with the second image display means (391B).
The first detecting means (38A, 38B) for detecting the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the first image displaying means (341), and
The second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B), and
An effect executing means (51) for causing the image display means (341), the first movable accessory member (39A), and the second movable accessory member (39B) to execute the game effect in the progress of the game.
With
When the first movable accessory member (39A) is moved between the first position (first standby position) and the second position (first operating position), the first detecting means (38A). , 38B) and not detected by the second detection means (39C, 39D).
When the second movable accessory member (39B) is moved between the third position (first standby position) and the fourth position (first operating position), the first detecting means (38A). , 38B), not detected
The effect executing means (51) is
When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B) in the first predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period), and in the second predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period), the identification is performed. When the presence of an object in the region is detected by the second detection means (38C, 38D), the first effect execution means for causing the first image display means (341) to execute the first effect (touch operation effect). ,
A second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) for moving the first movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position.
In the first overlapping period in which the first predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, the execution of the first effect by the first image display means (341) is restricted, and the second predetermined period and the execution period are described. An effect limiting means that does not restrict the execution of the first effect by the first image display means (341) in the second overlapping period in which the execution period of the second effect overlaps.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D1, in the first overlapping period in which the first predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, the execution of one of the first effect and the second effect is restricted by the effect limiting means. Will be done. Therefore, when it is detected by the first detection means that an object exists in the predetermined area, the first effect is executed because it is erroneously detected as being based on the movement of the player. It is possible to prevent inconvenience. On the other hand, the effect limiting means does not limit the execution of the first effect and the second effect in the second overlapping period in which the second predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap. Therefore, even if the predetermined period for executing the first effect (the first predetermined period and the second predetermined period) and the execution period of the second effect overlap, the second image display means unnecessarily uses the second image display means. It is prevented that the first effect to be executed is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress an extremely decrease in the execution frequency of the first effect, and thus it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

[Appendix D2]
The effect limiting means is described in a specific period from when it is determined to operate the first movable accessory member (39A) until the first movable accessory member (39A) returns to the first position. The gaming machine according to Appendix D1, wherein when the presence of an object is detected by the first detecting means (38A, 38B), the execution of the first effect is restricted.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D2, even if the presence of an object is detected by the first detection means, the execution of the first effect during a specific period is restricted, so that the first effect is erroneously detected by a simple process. It can be prevented from being executed.

[Appendix D3]
The effect limiting means is described in a specific period from when it is determined to operate the first movable accessory member (39A) until the first movable accessory member (39A) returns to the first position. The gaming machine according to Appendix D1, wherein the execution of a process for confirming whether or not the presence of an object is detected by the first detecting means (38A, 38B) is restricted.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D3, the execution of the first effect in a specific period can be restricted by not executing the process of confirming whether or not the existence of the object is detected by the first detection means. It is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to false detection.

[Appendix D4]
A driving means (39a) for applying a driving force for moving the first movable accessory member (39A) between the first position and the second position is further provided.
The effect executing means (51) limits the execution of the first effect between the time when the driving means (39a) is determined to be driven and the time when the driving of the driving means (39a) is started. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D1 to D3, characterized in that it is started.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D4, the execution of the first effect is restricted immediately before the first movable accessory member is operated by the driving means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the first detection means due to the operation of the first movable accessory member.

[Appendix D5]
When the first movable accessory member (39A) is moved from the first position to the second position, the first movable accessory member (39A) returns from the second position to the first position. Further equipped with a return detection means (39b) for detecting this,
The effect limiting means limits the execution of the first effect when the return detecting means (39b) detects that the first movable accessory member (39A) has returned to the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices D1 to D4, characterized in that the above is released.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D5, the restriction on the execution of the first effect is released when the return of the first movable accessory member is detected. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the first detection means due to the operation of the first movable accessory member.

[Appendix D6]
When the first movable accessory member (39A) is in the second position, the coverage of the first image display means (341) is such that the second movable accessory member (39B) is in the fourth position. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D1 to D5, characterized in that the coverage is larger than that of the first image display means (341) in the case.

[Appendix D7]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary note D1 to Supplementary note D6, wherein the first movable accessory member (39A) and the second movable accessory member (39B) have different operating frequencies in the game production. ..

[Appendix E1]
The main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game,
The first image display means (341), which displays a variable display image in which the decorative symbol (main symbol) is variablely displayed, and
A second image display means (391B, 392C) different from the first image display means (341), and
When an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341), the detection means (38a to 38d, 38A, 38B) for detecting the object and the image display means (341).
The detection means (38a to 38d, 38A, when moved between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) and between the first position and the second position. Movable accessory members (39A, 39C) detected by 38B) and
In the progress of the game, the first image display means (341), the second image display means (391B, 392C), and the movable accessory member (39A, 39C) execute the game effect, and the effect execution means (51).
With
The effect executing means (51) is
When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d, 38A, 38B) in the predetermined period (touch operation reception period), the first effect (341) is performed on the first image display means (341). The first effect execution means for executing the touch operation effect) and
A second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39, 39C) between the first position and the second position,
In the overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, the effect limiting means for restricting the execution of the first effect on the first image display means (341) and the effect limiting means.
When the execution of the first effect on the first image display means (341) is restricted by the effect limiting means, the second image display means (381B, 392C) performs a specific effect different from the first effect. And the specific production execution means to be executed by
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E1, the execution of the first effect on the first image display means is restricted by the effect limiting means during the overlapping period. Therefore, when the detection means detects that an object exists in the predetermined area, there is an inconvenience that the first effect is executed because it is erroneously detected as being based on the movement of the player. It can be prevented from occurring. On the other hand, when the execution of the first effect on the first image display means is restricted by the effect limiting means in the overlapping period, the specific effect executing means executes a specific effect different from the first effect on the second image display means. .. This specific effect is executed by the second image display means when the presence of the object in the predetermined region is detected by the detection means based on the operation of the movable accessory member in the overlapping period. That is, the specific effect is executed in the second image display means by utilizing the false detection of the object in the detection means. As a result, by executing the specific effect instead of the first effect based on the false detection in the predetermined period, not only the execution of the first effect can be restricted, but also the execution of the first effect is simply restricted. It is possible to improve the interest of the game as compared with the case where the game is played.

Further, since the specific effect is executed by the second image display means instead of the first image display means on which the first effect should be executed, the specific effect is executed by the second image display means that the player does not expect. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention not only to what kind of effect (expectation degree) is executed, but also to which image display means the effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from diminishing, and thus the interest in the game can be improved.

[Appendix E2]
Further provided with a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition.
The specific effect is characterized in that, as compared with the first effect, the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) that the determination result by the determination means (41) shifts to the special gaming state is relatively high. The gaming machine according to Appendix E1.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E2, since the specific effect has a relatively higher expectation than the first effect, after the operation of the first movable accessory member, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. The awakening of the game is effectively prevented, and the interest in the game is effectively improved.

[Appendix E3]
Further provided with a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition.
The gaming machine according to Appendix E1 or Appendix E2, wherein the specific effect is a definite effect that clearly indicates that the determination result by the determination means (41) is to shift to the special gaming state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E3, since the specific effect is a final effect, it is more effective to awaken the game after the operation of the first movable accessory member than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix E4]
The finalized effect is a normal fixed effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premier effect) having a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal fixed effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to Appendix E3, wherein the specific effect is the rare confirmed effect.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E4, since the specific effect is a rare fixed effect, the awakening for the game after the operation of the first movable accessory member is further increased as compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is effectively prevented and the interest in the game is further effectively improved.

[Appendix E5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E1 to E4, wherein the second image display means (391C) is provided on the first movable accessory member (39C).

[Appendix E6]
A second movable accessory member (39B) that is moved between the third position (second standby position) and the fourth position (second operating position) and is not detected by the detection means (38A, 38B).
When an object exists in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (392B), the second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the object, and
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E1 to E4, wherein the second image display means (392B) is provided on the second movable accessory member (39B).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix E5 and the appendix E6, a specific effect is executed by the movable accessory member or the second image display means provided on the second movable accessory member by utilizing the false detection of the object by the detection means. To. As a result, when the movable accessory member is in the second position for a predetermined period of time that causes erroneous detection, the specific effect is executed in the second image display means, so that the operation of the movable accessory member and the specific effect are combined. By making it, it is possible to significantly improve the interest of the game as compared with the case where the movable accessory member is simply operated.

[Appendix F1]
The main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game,
The first image display means (341), which displays a variable display image in which the decorative symbol (main symbol) is variablely displayed, and
A second image display means (391B) different from the first image display means (341),
The first detecting means (38A, 38B) for detecting the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the first image displaying means (391B), and
The second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B), and
The first detecting means (38A, 38B) when the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) are moved and the first position and the second position are moved. Movable accessory member (39A) detected by
Unlike the first image display means (341) and the second image display means (391B), the third image display means (392A) provided on the movable accessory member (39A) and the third image display means (392A).
Execution of the effect of causing the first image display means (341), the second image display means (391B), the third image display means (392A), and the movable accessory member (39) to execute the game effect in the progress of the game. Means (51) and
With
The effect executing means (51) is
When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B) in the first predetermined period (touch operation reception period), the first effect is given to the first image display means (341). When the second image display means (391B) detects the presence of an object in the specific area during the second predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period), the second image display means (391B) is used. 1 The first effect execution means for executing the effect,
A second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position, and
In the first overlapping period in which the first predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, the execution of the first effect by the first image display means (341) is restricted, and the second predetermined period and the execution period are described. In the second overlapping period in which the execution period of the second effect overlaps, the effect limiting means for limiting the execution of the first effect in the second image display means (391B)
When the execution of the first effect by the second image display means (391B) is restricted in the second overlapping period, the third image display means (392B) is made to execute a specific effect different from the first effect. Specific production execution means and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

[Appendix F2]
Further, the second movable accessory member (39B) that is moved between the third position (second standby position) and the fourth position (second operating position) and is not detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B). The gaming machine according to Appendix F1, wherein the second image display means (391B) is provided on the second movable accessory member (39B).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix F1 and the appendix F2, the execution of the first effect by the first image display means can be restricted in the first overlapping period in which the first predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap by the effect limiting means. Is. Therefore, when the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the first detection means, the first effect is executed because it is erroneously detected as being based on the movement of the player. Can be prevented from occurring.

When the presence of an object in a specific area is detected by the second detecting means during the second overlapping period, the third image displaying means first instead of executing the first effect by the second image displaying means. A specific effect different from the effect is executed. As a result, when the movable accessory member is operated in the second overlapping period, the specific effect is executed by the third image display means provided on the movable accessory member that the player does not expect. It is possible to pay attention not only to whether the (expected degree) effect is executed, but also to which image display means the effect is executed. Further, by executing the specific effect in the third image display means provided on the movable accessory member, the operation of the movable accessory member and the specific effect are combined, so that the movable accessory member is simply operated. Compared to the case where the game is played, the interest of the game can be significantly improved.

[Appendix F3]
Further provided with a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition.
Compared to the first effect, the specific effect has a higher expectation (big hit expectation) that the determination result by the determination means (41) shifts to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to Appendix F1 or Appendix F2, which is a feature.

Note: In the gaming machine related to F3, the specific effect has a relatively higher expectation than the first effect, so that after the movable accessory member is activated, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. Awakening to the game is effectively prevented, and the interest in the game is effectively improved.

[Appendix F4]
Further provided with a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition.
The specific effect is described in any one of Appendix F1 to Appendix F3, which is a definite effect that clearly indicates that the determination result by the determination means (41) is to shift to the special gaming state. Game machine.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix F4, since the specific effect is a final effect, the awakening of the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix F5]
The finalized effect is a normal fixed effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premier effect) having a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal fixed effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to Appendix F4, wherein the specific effect is the rare confirmed effect.

In the game machine related to Appendix F5, since the specific effect is a rare confirmed effect, it is more effective to awaken the game after the movable accessory member is activated, as compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix G1]
The main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game,
The first image display means (341), which displays a variable display image in which the decorative symbol (main symbol) is variablely displayed, and
A second image display means (391B) different from the first image display means (341),
The first detecting means (38A, 38B) for detecting the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the first image displaying means (391B), and
The second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B), and
The first detection means (when it is moved between the first position (first standby position) and the second position (first operating position) and between the first position and the second position (the first detection means). The movable accessory member (39A) detected by 38A, 38B) and
Unlike the first image display means (341) and the second image display means (391B), the third image display means (392A) provided on the movable accessory member (39A) and the third image display means (392A).
Execution of the effect of causing the first image display means (341), the second image display means (391B), the third image display means (392A), and the movable accessory member (39) to execute the game effect in the progress of the game. Means (51) and
With
The effect executing means (51) is
When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38A, 38B) in a predetermined period (touch operation reception period), the first effect (touch operation effect) is performed on the first image display means (341). The first production execution means to execute
A second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position, and
In the overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, the effect limiting means for restricting the execution of the first effect on the first image display means (341) and the effect limiting means.
When the execution of the first effect in the first image display means (341) is restricted by the effect limiting means in the overlapping period, the second image display means (381B) replaces the first effect. The first specific effect that clearly indicates that it is the predetermined period is executed, and when an object is detected in the specific area in the predetermined period, the third image display means (392C) performs the first effect and the first specific effect. A specific effect execution means for executing a second specific effect different from the effect,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

[Appendix G2]
Further, the second movable accessory member (39B) that is moved between the third position (second standby position) and the fourth position (second operating position) and is not detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B). Prepare,
The gaming machine according to Appendix G1, wherein the second image display means (391B) is provided on the second movable accessory member (39B).

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note G1 and G2, the execution of the first effect by the first image display means is restricted by the effect limiting means during the overlapping period. Therefore, when the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the first detection means, the first effect is executed because it is erroneously detected as being based on the movement of the player. Can be prevented from occurring. On the other hand, when the effect limiting means restricts the execution of the first effect by the first image display means in the overlapping period, the first specific effect is executed by the second image display means instead of the first effect, and the specific effect is described. On condition that the presence of an object in the area is detected, the third image display means executes the first effect and the second specific effect different from the first specific effect. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game as compared with the case where the execution of the first effect is simply restricted. Further, when the movable accessory member is in the first position in the overlapping period, the second specific effect is executed by the third image display means provided on the movable accessory member, so that the operation of the movable accessory member and the second By combining the two specific effects, the interest of the game can be significantly improved as compared with the case where the movable accessory is simply operated.

[Appendix G3]
Further provided with a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition.
Compared to the first effect, the second specific effect has a relatively high degree of expectation (big hit expectation) that the determination result by the determination means (41) shifts to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to Appendix G1 or Appendix G2, characterized in that.

Note: In the gaming machine related to G3, the second specific effect has a relatively higher expectation than the first effect, so that after the movable accessory member is activated, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. The awakening of the game is effectively prevented, and the interest in the game is effectively improved.

[Appendix G4]
Further provided with a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition.
The game according to Appendix G1 or Appendix G2, wherein the second specific effect is a definite effect that clearly indicates that the determination result by the determination means (41) is to shift to the special gaming state. Machine.

Note: In the game machine related to G4, since the second specific effect is a final effect, it is more effective to awaken the game after the movable accessory member is activated, as compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix G5]
The finalized effect is a normal fixed effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premier effect) having a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal fixed effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to Appendix G4, wherein the second specific effect is the rare definite effect.

In the game machine related to Appendix G5, since the specific effect is a rare confirmed effect, it is more effective to awaken the game after the movable accessory member is activated, as compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix H1]
The main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game,
An image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variablely displayed, and an image display means (341).
When an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341), the detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting the object and the detection means (38a to 38d).
It is moved between the first position (standby position), the second position (operating position), and the intermediate position between the first position and the second position, and the first position and the second position are moved. Movable accessory member (39) detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) when moved between
An effect executing means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute the game effect in the progress of the game.
With
The effect executing means (51) is
A first effect executing means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) during a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period).
A second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) of moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position, the second position, the first position, and the second position is executed. Directing execution means and
In the predetermined period, when the movable accessory member (39) is in the second position, the execution of the first effect is restricted, and when the movable accessory member (39) is in the intermediate position, the first effect is restricted. 1 Production limiting means that enable the execution of production,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H1, the execution of the first effect is restricted when the movable accessory member is in the second position for a predetermined period, while the first effect is restricted when the movable accessory member is in the intermediate position. Execution is not restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to the erroneous detection that the operation of the movable accessory member is performed by the player, and the movable accessory member is in the intermediate position. It is possible to prevent the execution of the first effect from being unnecessarily restricted in the case of.

[Appendix H2]
When the movable accessory member is in the second position in the predetermined period and the detection means (38) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined region, the effect executing means (51) is said to be the first. 1 The gaming machine according to Appendix H1, further comprising a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect different from the effect.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H2, when the movable accessory member is in the second position in a predetermined period and the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means, the first effect is produced by the specific effect execution means. Perform a specific effect different from. That is, the specific effect is executed by utilizing the false detection of the object by the detection means. In this way, by executing the specific effect instead of the first effect based on the false detection in the predetermined period, not only the execution of the first effect can be restricted, but also the execution of the first effect is simply restricted. It is possible to improve the interest of the game as compared with the case where it is played.

[Appendix H3]
The movable accessory member (39) further includes a second image display means (392C) different from the image display means (341).
The gaming machine according to Appendix H2, wherein the specific effect executing means causes the second image display means (392C) to execute the specific effect when the execution of the first effect is restricted.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H3, the specific effect is executed not by the image display means on which the first effect should be executed but by the second image display means different from the image display means. Therefore, the specific effect is executed in the second image display means that the player does not expect, and not only what kind of effect (expectation degree) is executed, but also which image display means is used to execute the effect. You can also pay attention to that. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from diminishing, and thus the interest in the game can be improved.

[Appendix H4]
Further provided with a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition.
The specific effect is characterized in that, as compared with the first effect, the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) that the determination result by the determination means (41) shifts to the special gaming state is relatively high. The gaming machine according to Appendix H2 or Appendix H3.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H4, since the specific effect has a relatively higher expectation than the first effect, the movable accessory member is operated after the operation of the movable accessory member as compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. Awakening to the game is effectively prevented, and the interest in the game is effectively improved.

[Appendix H5]
Further provided with a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition.
The gaming machine according to Appendix H2 or Appendix H3, wherein the specific effect is a definite effect that clearly indicates that the determination result by the determination means (41) is to shift to the special gaming state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H5, since the specific effect is a definite effect, it is more effective to awaken the game after the operation of the first movable accessory member than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix H6]
The finalized effect is a normal fixed effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premier effect) having a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal fixed effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to Appendix H5, wherein the specific effect is the rare confirmed effect.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix H6, since the specific effect is a rare fixed effect, the awakening for the game after the operation of the first movable accessory member is further increased as compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is effectively prevented and the interest in the game is further effectively improved.

[Appendix H7]
The detection means (38)
When the movable accessory member (39) is in the intermediate position, the presence of an object in the predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341) is not detected, and the object is not detected.
Addendum H1 to H6, which detects the presence of an object in the predetermined region on the front side of the image display means (341) when the movable accessory member (39) is in the second position. The gaming machine described in any of.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H7, when the movable accessory member (39) is in the intermediate position, the presence of an object is present by the detecting means in a predetermined period while preventing the first effect from being executed due to an erroneous detection. When it is detected, the first effect can be executed.

[Appendix H8]
The effect limiting means is used in a specific period from when it is determined to operate the movable accessory member (39) to the second position until the movable accessory member (39) returns to the second position. The gaming machine according to Appendix H1, wherein when the presence of an object is detected by the detection means (38), the execution of the first effect is restricted.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H8, even if the presence of an object is detected by the detection means, the execution of the first effect during a specific period is restricted, so that the first effect is executed by erroneous detection by a simple process. Can be prevented.

[Appendix H9]
The effect limiting means is the detection means (38) during a specific period from when it is determined to operate the movable accessory member (39) until the movable accessory member (39) returns to the first position. The gaming machine according to Appendix H1, wherein the execution of a process for confirming whether or not the existence of an object is detected by) is restricted.

Note: In the gaming machine according to H9, since the process of confirming whether or not the existence of the object is detected by the detection means is not executed, the execution of the first effect in a specific period can be restricted, so that the erroneous detection is performed by a simple process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed.

[Appendix H10]
Further provided with a driving means (39a) for applying a driving force for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position, the intermediate position, and the second position.
After it is determined that the effect limiting means drives the drive means (39a) in order to move the movable accessory member (39) from the first position to the second position, the drive means (39a) The gaming machine according to the appendix H8 or the appendix H9, characterized in that the restriction on the execution of the first effect is started before the driving of the first effect is started.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix H10, the execution of the first effect is restricted immediately before the movable accessory member is operated by the driving means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix H11]
When the movable accessory member (39) is moved from the first position to the second position, it is detected that the movable accessory member (39) has returned from the second position to the first position. Further equipped with a return detection means (39b),
When the return detecting means (39b) detects that the movable accessory member (39) has returned to the second position, the effect limiting means releases the restriction on the execution of the first effect. The gaming machine according to the appendix H8 or the appendix H9, which is characterized by the above.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H11, the restriction on the execution of the first effect is released when the return of the movable accessory member is detected. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix I1]
The main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game,
An image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variablely displayed, and an image display means (341).
When an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341), the detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting the object and the detection means (38a to 38d).
When it is moved between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) and moved between the first position and the second position, it is detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d). Movable accessory member (39) to be
An effect executing means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute the game effect in the progress of the game.
With
A first effect executing means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) during a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period).
A second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position, and
In the overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, the effect limiting means for restricting the execution of the second effect and the effect limiting means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I1, since the execution of the second effect can be restricted in a predetermined period, it is erroneously detected that the player has operated the image display means based on the operation of the movable accessory member. It is possible to prevent the first effect from being unnecessarily executed due to this.

[Appendix I2]
The game according to Appendix I1, wherein the effect limiting means limits the execution of the process of starting the second effect when it is determined that it is the timing to start the second effect in the predetermined period. Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I2, even if it is determined that it is the timing to start the second effect in the predetermined period, the second effect in the predetermined period is restricted by limiting the execution of the process for starting the second effect. Since it is possible to limit the execution of the first effect, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to a false detection by a simple process.

[Appendix I3]
The second effect executing means is characterized in that, when the timing for starting the second effect is the predetermined period, the second effect is executed when a certain period has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period. The gaming machine described in Appendix I2.

[Appendix I4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I3, wherein the time point at which the certain period has elapsed is the end time point of the predetermined period.

[Appendix I5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I3 or Appendix I4, wherein the time point after the lapse of the certain period is the end time point of the first effect when the first effect is executed.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices I3 to I5, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the second effect in the predetermined period, the second effect is executed when a certain period elapses from the start of the predetermined period. Therefore, while preventing erroneous detection that the image display means has been operated by the operation of the movable accessory member, when a certain period has passed from the start of the predetermined period, for example, the predetermined period or the first effect. After the end, the second effect, which is generally executed as an effect with a high degree of expectation, is executed, so that the decrease in interest in the game and the interest in the game can be suppressed.

[Appendix I6]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I1, wherein the effect executing means (51) limits the execution of a process for confirming whether or not it is the timing to start the second effect in the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I6, the execution of the second effect in the predetermined period can be restricted by limiting the execution of the process of confirming whether or not it is the timing to start the second effect in the predetermined period. A simple process can prevent the first effect from being executed due to a false positive.

[Appendix J1]
The main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game,
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition, and
An image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variablely displayed, and an image display means (341).
When an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341), the detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting the object and the detection means (38a to 38d).
When it is moved between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) and moved between the first position and the second position, it is detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d). Movable accessory member (39) to be
An effect executing means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute the game effect in the progress of the game.
With
The effect executing means (51) is
A first effect executing means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) during a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period).
A second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position, and
With
The first effect is a normal effect having a high probability of being executed by the first effect executing means, and a determination means (41) having a lower probability of being executed by the first effect executing means (51) than the normal effect. ) Includes a rare production (premier production) that clearly indicates that the judgment result is to shift to the special gaming state.
The second effect executing means is the first effect means when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) during the predetermined period (touch operation reception period). When it is determined that the rare effect is to be executed as the effect, the detection means (38a to 38d) will be used until the forced operation time set to a time shorter than the predetermined period elapses. When the presence of the object in the predetermined area is not detected, the second effect is shifted to the special gaming state by the forced operation of the movable accessory member (39) before the elapse of the predetermined period. Performed as a production that clearly shows that there is,
The first effect executing means is the first effect when the detection means (38a to 38d) detects that an object exists in the predetermined region by the forced operation of the movable accessory member (39). A game machine characterized by executing the rare effect.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J1, when it is determined that the rare effect is executed as the first effect, the object in the predetermined area is determined by the detection means between the start of the predetermined period and the elapse of the forced operation time. If the presence of is not detected, the movable accessory member is forcibly activated before the elapse of a predetermined time. Since such a player can give a surprise or a shock to the player by the unexpected forced operation of the movable accessory member, it is possible to improve the interest and interest of the game. Further, by executing the detection effect by utilizing the erroneous detection due to the forced operation of the movable accessory member, it is possible to make the player surely see the first effect. Then, in the gaming machine according to Appendix J1, as the first effect, a rare effect that clearly indicates that the determination result shifts to the special gaming state is executed, so that the rare effect is caused by an erroneous detection due to the operation of the movable accessory member. By being executed, when a rare effect that is rarely seen is determined as a detection effect, not only can the rare effect be surely shown to the player, but also an unexpected movable accessory member. By executing a rare effect in addition to the operation of, it is possible to give a further surprise or impact to the player. As a result, the interest and interest in the game can be further improved.

[Appendix J2]
The game state transition means (41) for shifting the gaming state between the notification game state in which the notification game for notifying the determination result in the determination means (41) is executed and the special game state is further provided.
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game.
The special game state includes a first special game state in which the first special game is executed (5R normal jackpot game state) and a second special game state in which the second special game is executed (5R probability variation jackpot game state). 16R probability change jackpot game state) including
The notified game state includes a first notified game state and a second notified game state in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the determination means (41) is higher than that of the first notified game state. ,
The game state transition means (41) shifts to the first notified game state after the end of the first special game, and shifts to the second notified game state after the end of the second special game.
The rare effect is an effect that clearly indicates that the determination result by the determination means (41) is shifted to the second special gaming state by the game state transition means (41) after the end of the notification game. The gaming machine according to Appendix J1, which is characterized by the above.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J2, the rarity effect is an effect that clearly indicates that the determination result by the determination means shifts to the (second) special gaming state ((probability variation) jackpot gaming state). That is, the rare effect is executed as an effect that clearly indicates that the movement is shifted to the (second) special game state ((probability change) jackpot game state) by erroneous detection due to the forced operation of the movable accessory member. As a result, the player can know before the end of the notification game that the determination result is advantageous when the rare effect is executed after the forced operation of the movable accessory member, so that the player is interested in or interested in the game. Can be improved.

[Appendix J3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix J1 or Appendix J2, wherein the effect limiting means limits the execution of the second effect when the first effect is not the rare effect.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J3, when the first effect is not a rare effect, the execution of the second effect in the overlapping period is restricted by the effect limiting means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed against the player's will due to erroneous detection based on the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix K1]
The main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game,
An image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variablely displayed, and an image display means (341).
When an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341), the detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting the object and the detection means (38a to 38d).
When the detection means (38a to 38a) is moved between the first position (first standby position) and the second position (first operating position) and between the first position and the second position. The first movable accessory member (39A) detected by 38d) and
The detection means (38a to 38a) when the device is moved between the third position (second standby position) and the fourth position (second operating position) and is moved between the third position and the fourth position. The second movable accessory member (39B), which is not detected by 38d),
An effect executing means (51) for causing the image display means (341), the first movable accessory member (39A), and the second movable accessory member (39B) to execute the game effect in the progress of the game.
With
The effect executing means (51) is
A first effect executing means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) during a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period).
The first movable accessory member (39A) is moved between the first position and the second position, or the second movable accessory member (39B) is moved between the third position and the fourth position. The second effect executing means for executing the second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) to be moved between, and
In the overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, the execution of the second effect by the first movable accessory member (39A) executed by the second effect execution means can be restricted. Yes, there is an effect limiting means that does not restrict the execution of the second effect by the second movable accessory member (39B), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K1, since the execution of the second effect by the first movable accessory member can be restricted in a predetermined period, a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means is determined based on the operation of the first movable accessory member. It is prevented from being erroneously detected as having been operated by the player.

Further, when the second movable accessory member is moved between the third position and the fourth position, the object is not detected by the detecting means. Therefore, since erroneous detection by the detection means does not occur due to the operation of the second movable accessory member, it is possible to prevent the operation of the second movable accessory member from which the erroneous detection does not occur from being unnecessarily restricted. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming monotonous by preventing the execution of the movable accessory effect from being excessively restricted, and to suppress a decrease in interest in and interest in the game.

[Appendix K2]
When the effect limiting means determines that it is the timing to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in the predetermined period, the effect limiting means limits the execution of the process of starting the operation of the first movable accessory member. The gaming machine according to Appendix K1, which is characterized in that the game is played.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K2, even when it is determined that it is the timing to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in a predetermined period, the process of starting the operation of the first movable accessory member is performed. By limiting the execution, it is possible to limit the execution of the first movable accessory effect in a predetermined period, so that it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to an erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Appendix K3]
The effect limiting means is the second movable accessory member by the first movable accessory member when a certain period has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period when the timing for starting the first movable accessory effect is the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to Appendix K2, which is characterized by executing a production.

[Appendix K4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix K3, wherein the time point after the lapse of the certain period is the end time point of the predetermined period.

[Appendix K5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix K3, wherein the time when the certain period elapses is the end time of the first effect when the first effect is executed.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices K3 to K5, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in the predetermined period, the first is when a certain period elapses from the start of the predetermined period. 1 The second effect by the movable accessory member is executed. Therefore, while preventing false detection that the image display means has been operated by the operation of the first movable accessory member, when a certain period has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period, for example, the predetermined period or the first. After the end of the effect, the second effect by the first movable accessory member, which is generally executed as an effect with high expectation, is executed, so that the decrease in interest in the game and the interest in the game can be suppressed.

[Appendix K6]
The addition K1 wherein the effect limiting means limits the execution of a process for confirming whether or not it is the timing to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in the predetermined period. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K6, the execution of the second effect in the predetermined period is performed by limiting the execution of the process of confirming whether or not it is the timing to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in the predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Appendix K7]
The coverage of the image display means (341) when the first movable accessory member (39A) is in the second position is when the second movable accessory member (39B) is in the fourth position. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions K1 to K6, characterized in that the coverage is larger than that of the image display means (341).

[Appendix K8]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions K1 to K7, wherein the first movable accessory member (39A) and the second movable accessory member (39B) have different operating frequencies in the game production. ..

[Appendix L1]
The main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game,
An image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variablely displayed, and an image display means (341).
When an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341), the detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting the object and the detection means (38a to 38d).
When it is moved between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) and moved between the first position and the second position, it is detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d). Movable accessory member (39) to be
An effect executing means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute the game effect in the progress of the game.
With
The effect executing means (51) is
A first effect executing means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) during a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period).
A second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position, and
In the overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, the effect limiting means for restricting the execution of one of the first effect and the second effect, and the effect limiting means.
The effect limiting means can limit the execution of the second effect when the predetermined period is started before the overlap period, and the execution period is started before the overlap period. A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of the first effect can be restricted in some cases.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L1, when the predetermined period is started before the overlapping period, the execution of the second effect is restricted, and it is detected that the object exists in the predetermined area by the operation of the movable accessory member. It is prevented that the means is erroneously detected, and when the execution period is started earlier than the overlapping period, the execution of the first effect is restricted, so that the object is placed in the predetermined area by the operation of the movable accessory member. It is prevented that the detection means erroneously detects the existence. Therefore, when the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, the movable accessory member is operated regardless of whether the predetermined period is started first or the execution period is started first. False positives based on the above can be prevented, and the detection effect is prevented from being unnecessarily executed based on the false positives.

[Appendix L2]
The effect limiting means is the detection means (38a) during a specific period from when it is determined to operate the movable accessory member (39) until the movable accessory member (39) returns to the first position. ~ 38d) The gaming machine according to Appendix L1, wherein when the presence of an object is detected, the execution of the first effect is restricted.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix L2, even if the presence of an object is detected by the detection means, the execution of the first effect in a specific period is restricted. Therefore, in the overlapping period, the first effect is erroneously detected by a simple process. Can be prevented from being executed.

[Appendix L3]
The effect limiting means has the detection means (38a to 38a) in a specific period from when it is determined to operate the movable accessory member (39) until the movable accessory member (39) returns to the standby position. 38d) The gaming machine according to Appendix L1, wherein the execution of a process for confirming whether or not the presence of an object is detected is restricted.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix L3, the execution of the detection effect in the overlapping period can be restricted by not executing the process of confirming whether or not the existence of the object is detected by the detection means in the specific period. It is possible to prevent the detection effect from being executed due to false detection.

[Appendix L4]
Further provided with a driving means (39a) for applying a driving force for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position.
The effect limiting means starts limiting the execution of the first effect between the time when it is determined to drive the driving means (39a) and the time when the driving of the driving means (39a) is started. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions L1 to L3.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L4, the execution of the first effect is restricted immediately before the movable accessory member is operated by the driving means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix L5]
When the movable accessory member (39) is moved from the first position to the second position, it is detected that the movable accessory member (39) has returned from the first position to the second position. Further equipped with a return detection means (39b),
When the return detecting means (39b) detects that the movable accessory member (39) has returned to the first position, the effect limiting means releases the restriction on the execution of the first effect. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions L1 to L4.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L5, the restriction on the execution of the first effect is released when the return of the movable accessory member is detected. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix L6]
When the effect limiting means determines that it is the timing to start the second effect in the predetermined period, any of the appendices L1 to L5 characterized in that the execution of the process for starting the second effect is restricted. The game machine described in the crab.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix L6, even if it is determined that it is the timing to start the second effect in the predetermined period, the second effect in the predetermined period is restricted by limiting the execution of the process for starting the second effect. Since it is possible to limit the execution of the second effect, it is possible to prevent the second effect from being executed due to an erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Appendix L7]
The game according to any one of Supplementary Provisions L1 to L5, wherein the effect limiting means restricts execution of a process for confirming whether or not it is a timing to start the movable accessory effect in the predetermined period. Machine.

Note: In the gaming machine related to L7, the execution of the movable accessory production during the reception period can be restricted by restricting the execution of the process of confirming whether or not it is the timing to start the movable accessory production during the reception period. It is possible to prevent the detection effect from being executed due to false detection by a simple process.

[Appendix M1]
The main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game,
An image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variablely displayed, and an image display means (341).
When an object exists in the first predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341), the first detection means (38A, 38B) for detecting the object and the first detection means (38A, 38B).
Second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting an object when an object exists in a second predetermined area that is at least partially different from the first predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341). )When,
An object exists in the first predetermined region or the second predetermined region based on both the detection result by the first detection means (38A, 38B) and the detection result by the second detection means (38C, 38D). The first judgment means (51) for judging whether or not to do, and
A second determination means for determining whether or not an object exists based on one of the first detection means (38A, 38B) and the second detection means (38C, 38D) when a specific condition is satisfied. (51) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix M1, the existence of the object is determined by the first determination means based on the detection results of both the first detection means and the second detection means, but if a specific condition is satisfied, the existence of the object is determined. The second determination means determines whether or not an object exists based on one of the first detection means and the second detection means. Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied, for example, even if a problem may occur by referring to the detection results of both the first detection means and the second detection means, the object is based on one of the detection means. By determining the existence, it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not an object exists while preventing the occurrence of defects.

[Appendix M2]
A movable accessory member (39) that is moved between a first position (first standby position) and a second position (first operating position) set in the first predetermined area is further provided.
When the movable accessory member (39) is in the first position, the first determination means (51) can be used by the first detection means (38C, 38D) and the second detection means (38C, 38D). Based on this, it is determined whether or not an object is detected in the first predetermined region or the second predetermined region.
The second determination means (51) is based on the second detection means (38C, 38D) assuming that the specific condition is satisfied when the movable accessory member (39) is in the second position. The gaming machine according to Appendix M1, wherein it is determined whether or not an object exists in the second predetermined region.

[Appendix M3]
The movable accessory member (39) is detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B) when it is moved between the first position and the second position, and the second detection means (38C, The gaming machine according to Appendix M2, which is not detected by 38D).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix M3, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, the presence or absence of an object in the first predetermined region based on the first detection means is not determined, and the presence or absence of the object is not determined based on the second detection means. The presence or absence of an object in the second predetermined region is determined. Therefore, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, it is possible to prevent the operation of the movable accessory member from being erroneously detected as a touch operation performed by the player. Further, even when the movable accessory member is operating, it can be determined whether or not the player has performed a touch operation on the second predetermined area. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the touch effect based on the touch operation of the player outside the operating area of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix M4]
The movable accessory member (39) is moved between the first position and the second position by the first detecting means (38A, 38B) and the second detecting means (38C, 38D). The gaming machine according to Appendix M2, which is characterized in that it is detected.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix M4, for example, when a game is in progress, even if one of the first detecting means and the second detecting means fails, it is possible to detect that the movable accessory member is in the second position. .. In addition, when checking the operation of the movable accessory member when the main power of the game machine is turned on, it is checked that the movable accessory member is in the second position only by the detection result by the first detection means. On the contrary, by checking that the movable accessory member is in the second position only by the detection result by the second detecting means, it is checked whether the first detecting means and the second detecting means are out of order. It also becomes possible.

[Appendix M5]
Further provided with an effect executing means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute the game effect in the progress of the game.
The effect executing means (51) is
In the predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period), the first effect (touch operation effect, alternative touch operation effect) is triggered by the existence of the object in the first predetermined area or the existence of the object in the second predetermined area. The first production execution means to execute
A second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position, and
In the overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, the execution of the first effect triggered by the presence of an object in the first predetermined area can be restricted, and the execution of the first effect can be restricted. The effect limiting means that enables the execution of the first effect triggered by the presence of an object in the area, and
The gaming machine according to the appendix M3, characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to the appendix M5, an object is placed in the first predetermined area during the execution period of the second effect by the movable accessory member detected by the first detection means when the object is moved between the first position and the second position. The execution of the first effect triggered by the existence of is restricted by the effect limiting means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detection effect from being executed due to the erroneous detection that the operation of the movable accessory member has been performed by the player. On the other hand, when the object exists in the second predetermined area outside the detection range of the first detection means, the second detection means detects the existence of the object even during the execution period of the second effect. 1 The effect is executed without limitation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being unnecessarily executed, and it is possible to suppress an extremely decrease in the execution frequency of the first effect, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

[Appendix M6]
The addition M5, wherein the effect limiting means limits the execution of a process for confirming whether or not the presence of an object is detected by the first detecting means (38A, 38B) during the overlapping period. Game machine.

Note: In the gaming machine according to M6, since the process of confirming whether or not the existence of the object is detected by the first detecting means is not executed in the overlapping period, the execution of the first effect in the overlapping period can be restricted, which is simple. It is possible to prevent the detection effect from being executed due to false detection by various processing.

[Appendix M7]
Described in Appendix M6, wherein the effect limiting means limits the execution of the first effect when the presence of an object is detected by the first detecting means (38A, 38B) during the overlapping period. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix M7, even if the presence of an object is detected by the detection means, the execution of the first effect during a specific period is restricted. Therefore, the first effect is erroneously detected by a simple process during the overlapping period. Can be prevented from being executed.

[Appendix M8]
The first effect executing means displays the first effect by the image display means (38C, 38D) when the presence of an object in the second predetermined region is detected by the second detecting means (38C, 38D) in the overlapping period. 341) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions M5 to M7, wherein the game is executed in a region corresponding to the second predetermined region.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix M8, since it is possible to prevent the first effect executed by the image display means from being restricted, the execution of the first effect by other effect means (for example, a speaker or a lamp) is restricted. Compared with the above, it is possible to effectively suppress the deterioration of the interest due to the restriction on the execution of the first effect.

[Appendix M9]
A second image display means (391B), which is arranged at a position corresponding to the second predetermined area and is different from the first image display means (341), is further provided.
When the effect limiting means restricts the execution of the first effect triggered by the presence of an object in the first predetermined area during the overlapping period, the first effect executing means is set in the second predetermined area. When the presence of an object is detected by the second detection means (38C, 38D), the first effect is executed by the second image display means. Described gaming machine.

Note: When the gaming machine according to M9 is provided with the second image display means, it is possible to prevent the first effect executed by the second image display means from being restricted, so that other effect means (for example, a speaker or a lamp) can be prevented. Compared with the case where the execution of the first effect is restricted in the above, it is possible to effectively suppress the deterioration of the interest due to the restriction of the execution of the first effect.

[Appendix M10]
Under the specific condition, the presence of an object in the first predetermined region or the second predetermined region is detected by one of the first detection means (38A, 38B) and the second detection means (38C, 38D). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary note M1 to Supplementary note M9, which is characterized in that it is in an impossible state.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix M10, if the first detecting means or the second detecting means is out of order, whether the object exists based on one of the first detecting means and the second detecting means by the second determining means. Whether or not it is judged. Therefore, even if the first detection means or the second detection means is out of order, is the presence of the object, for example, a touch operation on a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means performed by the detection means that is not out of order? It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix M11]
The specific condition is any one of Supplementary Provisions M1 to M10, wherein the operation check of the first detection means (38A, 38B) or the second detection means (38C, 38D) is performed. Described gaming machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix M11, when the operation check of the first detection means or the second detection means is performed, the object exists based on one of the first detection means and the second detection means by the second determination means. Whether or not to do it is judged. Thereby, it can be determined whether or not one of the first detection means and the second detection means is out of order. Here, the operation check of the first detection means or the second detection means includes, for example, an operation check executed when the main power is turned on. The actuating chuck can also be performed as the game progresses. For example, when the movable accessory member is moved to the second position, whether or not the object exists by the second determination means based on the detection result of one of the first detection means and the second detection means. By making a judgment, it is also possible to check the operation of whether or not one of the first detecting means and the second detecting means is normally operated. The operation check in Appendix M11 includes not only the operation check performed when the main power is turned on, but also the operation check performed when the game progresses.

10: Game machine 25: Panel 38: Detection sensor 38a: Upper left detection sensor 38b: Lower left detection sensor 38c: Upper right detection sensor 38d: Lower right detection sensor 38A: First main detection sensor 38B: Second main detection sensor 38C: First Sub-detection sensor 38D: Second sub-detection sensor 38E: Sub-detection sensor 341: Symbol display units 39, 39C: Movable accessory member 392C: Display unit 39A: Main movable accessory member 392A: Display unit 39B: Sub-movable accessory member 391B: Display unit 39a: Motor 39a1: First motor 39a2: Second motor 39b: Return detection unit 39c: Motor driver 4: Main controller 41: MPU
5: Voice lamp control device 51: MPU
6: Display control device

Claims (1)

The main control means that controls the progress of the game,
Judgment means for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition,
A game state transition means for shifting the game state between the notification game state in which the notification game for notifying the determination result of the determination means is executed and the special game state.
An image display means for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern is variablely displayed, and an image display means for displaying a variable display image,
When an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means, the detection means for detecting the object and the detection means.
A movable accessory member that is moved between the first position and the second position and is detected by the detection means when moved between the first position and the second position.
An effect executing means for causing the image display means and the movable accessory member to execute the game effect in the progress of the game.
With
The effect executing means is
A first effect executing means for executing a first effect when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means in a predetermined period is provided.
By moving the movable accessory member from the first position to the second position in the predetermined period, the degree of expectation that the determination result by the determination means shifts to the special gaming state is improved. When the expectation improvement effect is executed, when the detection means detects the presence of the movable accessory member in the predetermined region by executing the expectation improvement effect, the determination result by the determination means A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a definite effect that clearly indicates that is to shift to the special gaming state.

Images